Contents

Hyundai Genesis 3.8 R Spec 2014 Coupe Owner's Manual PDF

1 of 442
1 of 442

Summary of Content for Hyundai Genesis 3.8 R Spec 2014 Coupe Owner's Manual PDF

OWNER'S MANUAL

Operation Maintenance Specifications

All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publi- cation. However, Hyundai reserves the right to make changes at any time so that our policy of continual product improvement may be car- ried out.

This manual applies to all models of this vehicle and includes descrip- tions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a result, you may find material in this manual that does not apply to your specific vehicle.

F2

Your Hyundai should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect the performance, safety or durability of your Hyundai and may, in addition, violate conditions of the limited warranties covering the vehicle. Certain modifications may also be in violation of regulations established by the U.S. Department of Transportation and other federal or state agencies.

Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic components. It is possible for an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular telephone to adversely affect electronic systems. For this reason, we recommend that you carefully follow the radio manufacturer's instructions or consult your Hyundai dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions if you choose to install one of these devices.

CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI

TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION

F3

This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTICE. These titles indicate the following:

NOTICE This indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.

SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING

WARNING This indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death to you or other persons if the warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the warning.

CAUTION This indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its equipment if the caution is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the caution.

F4

FOREWORD

Thank you for choosing Hyundai. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of discriminating people who drive Hyundais. The advanced engineering and high-quality construction of each Hyundai we build is something of which we're very proud.

Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new Hyundai. It is suggested that you read it carefully because the information it contains can contribute greatly to the satisfaction you receive from your new car.

The manufacturer also recommends that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by an authorized Hyundai dealer. Hyundai dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance and any other assistance that may be required.

HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA

Note : Because future owners will also need the information included in this manual, if you sell this Hyundai, please leave the manual in the vehicle for their use. Thank you.

Copyright 2013 Hyundai Motor America. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in any retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of Hyundai Motor America.

CAUTION Severe engine and transmission damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that do not meet Hyundai specifications.You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the specifi- cations listed on Page 8-4 in the Vehicle Specifications and consumer information section of the Owner's Manual.

F5

Guide to Hyundai Genuine Parts 1. What are Hyundai Genuine

Parts? Hyundai Genuine Parts are the same parts used by Hyundai Motor Company to manufacture vehicles. They are designed and tested for the optimum safety, performance, and reliability to our customers.

2. Why should you use genuine parts? Hyundai Genuine Parts are engi- neered and built to meet rigid man- ufacturing requirements. Using imi- tation, counterfeit or used salvage parts is not covered under the Hyundai New Vehicle Limited Warranty or any other Hyundai warranty.

In addition, any damage to or fail- ure of Hyundai Genuine Parts caused by the installation or failure of an imitation, counterfeit or used salvage part is not covered by any Hyundai Warranty.

3. How can you tell if you are pur- chasing Hyundai Genuine Parts? Look for the Hyundai Genuine Parts Logo on the package (see below). Hyundai Genuine Parts exported to are packaged with labels written only in English. Hyundai Genuine Parts are only sold through authorized Hyundai Dealerships.

A100A01L A100A02L A100A04L

A100A03L

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

I

Introduction How to use this manual / Fuel requirements / Vehicle break-in process / Vehicle data collection and event data recorders / Indicator symbols on the instrument cluster

Your vehicle at a glance Exterior overview / Interior overview / Instrument panel overview / Engine compartment

Safety features of your vehicle Seats / Seat belts / Child restraint system / Air bag

Features of your vehicle Keys / Door locks / Trunk / Windows / Hood / Fuel filler lid / Sunroof / Steering wheel / Mirrors / Instrument cluster / Multigauge / Lighting / Wipers & Washers / Climate control system / Etc.

Driving your vehicle Before driving / Engine start/stop button / Transmission / Brake system / Cruise control system / Winter driving / Vehicle load limit / Etc.

What to do in an emergency Road warning / Emergency while driving / Emergency starting / Engine overheat / TPMS / Flat tire / Towing / Etc.

Maintenance Engine compartment / Maintenance service / Engine oil / Engine coolant / Brake fluid / Washer fluid / Parking brake / Air cleaner / Wiper blades / Battery / Tire and wheels / Fuses / Light bulbs / Etc.

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Index

table of contents

1

Introduction

How to use this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Symbols used in this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Fuel requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Gasoline containing alcohol and methanol . . . . . . . . 1-4 Do not use methanol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Operation in foreign countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Vehicle break-in process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Vehicle data collection and event data recorders . 1-7 Indicator symbols on the instrument cluster . . . . 1-8

Introduction

21

We want to help you get the greatest possible driving pleasure from your vehicle. Your Owners Manual can assist you in many ways. We strong- ly recommend that you read the entire manual. In order to minimize the chance of death or injury, you must read the WARNING and CAU- TION sections in the manual. Illustrations complement the words in this manual to best explain how to enjoy your vehicle. By reading your manual, you learn about features, important safety information, and driving tips under various road condi- tions. The general layout of the manual is provided in the Table of Contents. A good place to start is the index; it has an alphabetical listing of all informa- tion in your manual. Sections: This manual has eight sec- tions plus an index. Each section begins with a brief list of contents so you can tell at a glance if that section has the information you want.

You will find various WARNINGs, CAUTIONs, and NOTICEs in this manual.These WARNINGs were pre- pared to enhance your personal safe- ty. You should carefully read and fol- low ALL procedures and recommen- dations provided in these WARN- INGS, CAUTIONS and NOTICES.

Symbols used in this manual Warnings, cautions and Notices

NOTICE A NOTICE indicates interesting or helpful information is being provided.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

WARNING A WARNING indicates a situation in which harm, serious bodily injury or death could result if the warning is ignored.

CAUTION A CAUTION indicates a situation in which damage to your vehicle could result if the caution is ignored.

1 3

Introduction

Symbols used in illustrations

Safety symbol The symbol means to "Avoid" or "Do not do something".

Arrows Indicates the location.

Indicates the action (pressing, turning, etc.) or outcome of an operation.

Your new vehicle is designed to use only unleaded fuel having a pump octane number ((R+M)/2) of 87 or higher.

Your new vehicle is designed to obtain maximum performance with UNLEADED FUEL, as well as mini- mize exhaust emissions and spark plug fouling.

CAUTION Never add any fuel system cleaning agents to the fuel tank other than what has been speci- fied. (Consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.)

WARNING Do not "top off" after the noz-

zle automatically shuts off when refueling.

Tighten the cap until it clicks once, otherwise the Malfunction Indicator Light will illumi- nate.

Always check that the fuel cap is installed securely to pre- vent fuel spillage in the event of an accident.

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

Introduction

41

Gasoline containing alcohol and methanol Do not use gasohol containing more than 10% ethanol, and do not use gasoline or gasohol containing any methanol. Either of these fuels may cause drivability problems and dam- age to the fuel system. Discontinue using gasohol of any kind if drivability problems occur. Vehicle damage or drivability prob- lems may not be covered by the manufacturers warranty if they result from the use of: 1. Gasohol containing more than

10% ethanol. 2. Gasoline or gasohol containing

methanol. 3. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.

"E85" fuel is an alternative fuel com- prised of 85 percent ethanol and 15 percent gasoline, and is manufac- tured exclusively for use in Flexible Fuel Vehicles. E85 is not compati- ble with your vehicle. Use of E85 may result in poor engine perform- ance and damage to your vehicle's engine and fuel system. HYUNDAI recommends that customers do not use fuel with an ethanol content exceeding 10 percent.

Gasoline containing MMT Some gasoline contains harmful manganese-based fuel additives such as MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). HYUNDAI does not recommend the use of gasoline containing MMT. This type of fuel can reduce vehicle performance and affect your emis- sion control system. The malfunction indicator lamp on the cluster may come on.

CAUTION Never use gasohol which con- tains methanol. Discontinue use of any gasohol product which impairs drivability.

CAUTION Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not cover damage to the fuel system or any per- formance problems caused by the use of E85 fuel.

1 5

Introduction

Do not use methanol Fuels containing methanol (wood alcohol) should not be used in your vehicle. This type of fuel can reduce vehicle performance and damage components of the fuel system.

Fuel Additives HYUNDAI recommends that you use good quality gasolines treated with detergent additives such as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline, which help prevent deposit formation in the engine. These gasolines will help the engine run cleaner and enhance per- formance of the Emission Control System. For more information on TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline, please go to the website (www.toptiergas.com). For customers who do not use TOP Tier Detergent Gasoline regularly, and experience difficulty in starting the engine or other fuel related engine conditions, approved fuel additives may be added to the gaso- line. If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, HYUNDAI recom- mends an approved fuel additive be added to the fuel tank at every 7,500mile or every engine oil change. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them.

Operation in foreign countries If you are going to drive your vehicle in another country, be sure to: Observe all regulations regarding

registration and insurance. Determine that acceptable fuel is

available.

CAUTION Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty may not cover damage to the fuel system and any per- formance problems that are caused by the use of fuels con- taining methanol.

Introduction

61

No special break-in period is need- ed. By following a few simple precau- tions for the first 600 miles (1,000 km) you may add to the perform- ance, economy and life of your vehi- cle. Do not race the engine. While driving, keep your engine

speed (rpm, or revolutions per minute) between 2,000 rpm and 4,000 rpm.

Do not maintain a single speed for long periods of time, either fast or slow. Varying engine speed is needed to properly break-in the engine.

Avoid hard stops, except in emer- gencies, to allow the brakes to seat properly.

Don't let the engine idle longer than 3 minutes at one time.

Don't tow a trailer during the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of opera- tion.

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING

Items contained in motor vehi- cles or emitted from them are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or reproductive harm. These include: Gasoline and its vapors Engine exhaust Used engine oil Interior passenger compart-

ment components and materi- als

Component parts which are subject to heat and wear

In addition, battery posts, termi- nals and related accessories contain lead, lead compounds and other chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm.

VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCESS

1 7

Introduction

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety sys- tems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: How various systems in your

vehicle were operating; Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;

How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

How fast the vehicle was travel- ing.

These data can help provide a bet- ter understanding of the circum- stances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of per- sonally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investiga- tion.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS

INDICATOR SYMBOLS ON THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

Seat belt warning light

High beam indicator

Turn signal indicator

ABS warning light

Parking brake & Brake fluid warning light

Engine oil pressure warning light

Malfunction indicator light

Air bag warning light

Cruise indicator (if equipped)

Cruise SET indicator (if equipped)

Immobilizer indicator

Low fuel level warning light

For more detailed explanations, refer to Instrument cluster in section 4.

Charging system warning light

Low windshield washer fluid level warning light (if equipped)

Door ajar warning light

Trunk ajar warning light

Front fog light indicator (if equipped)

Low tire pressure telltale

ESC indicator

ESC OFF indicator

Key out warning (if equipped) KEY OUT

1 8

Introduction

Exterior overview I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Exterior overview II. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Interior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

2

Your vehicle at a glance

(front) (rear)

Your vehicle at a glance

22

EXTERIOR OVERVIEW (FRONT)

1. Removable towing hook.......................6-21

2. Windshield wiper ..................................4-89

3. Outside rearview mirror .......................4-43

4. Door lock..............................................4-16

5. Head lights ...........................................4-84

6. Front fog lamp ......................................4-88

7. Hood ...................................................4-26

8. Tire & wheel..................................7-24, 8-3

9. Parking assist system ..........................4-78

OBK012005L

2 3

Your vehicle at a glance

EXTERIOR OVERVIEW (REAR)

1. Glass antenna....................................4-130

2. Rear window defroster .........................4-93

3. Fuel filler lid..........................................4-27

4. Rear combination lights .......................7-73

5. Rear parking assist system..................4-75

6. Removable towing hook.......................6-21

7. Trunk ....................................................4-20

8. Windows...............................................4-22

OBK012006

Your vehicle at a glance

42

INTERIOR OVERVIEW

1. Door lock/unlock button ....................4-18

2. Power window switches ....................4-22

3. Outside rearview mirror control switch ................................................4-44

4. Trunk lid release switch ....................4-20

5. Fuel filler lid release button...............4-27

6. Hood release lever............................4-26

7. Brake pedal.......................................5-25

8. Accelerator pedal

9. ESC OFF button ...............................5-31

10. Steering wheel tilt ..........................4-33

11. Instrument panel illumination control knob ....................................4-47

12. Light control/Turn signals................4-84

13. Steering wheel ................................4-33

14. Shift lever...............................5-13, 5-17

15. Parking brake lever .........................5-27

16. Parking assist system off button.....4-78

17. Multi gauges ...................................4-72

OBK012001N

2 5

Your vehicle at a glance

INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW

1. Instrument cluster.............................4-45

2. Horn .................................................4-34

3. Drivers front air bag.........................3-48

4. Wiper/Washer...................................4-89

5. Ignition switch or engine start/stop button ..........................5-5, 5-8

6. Hazard warning flasher switch..4-83, 6-2

7. Climate control system .........4-94, 4-104

8. Shift lever ................................5-13, 5-17

9. Seat warmer.....................................3-10

10. Passengers front air bag ...............3-48

11. Glove box .....................................4-122

OBK012002N

Your vehicle at a glance

62

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

1. Negative battery terminal..................7-39

2. Positive battery terminal ...................7-39

3. Fuse and relay box ...........................7-56

4. Windshield washer fluid reservoir .....7-31

5. Power steering fluid reservoir ...........7-30

6. Air cleaner.........................................7-33

7. Radiator cap .....................................7-28

8. Engine oil dipstick .............................7-24

9. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-24

10. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir .............7-29

11. Engine coolant reservoir .................7-27

OBK012003

2.0 TCI Engine

* The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

2 7

Your vehicle at a glance

1. Negative battery terminal..................7-39

2. Positive battery terminal ...................7-39

3. Fuse and relay box ...........................7-56

4. Windshield washer fluid reservoir .....7-31

5. Power steering fluid reservoir ...........7-30

6. Air cleaner.........................................7-33

7. Radiator cap .....................................7-28

8. Engine oil dipstick .............................7-24

9. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-24

10. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir .............7-29

11. Engine coolant reservoir .................7-27

3.8 GDI Engine

* The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

OBK012004

Safety features of your vehicle

Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Front seat adjustment (manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Front seat adjustment (power) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Rear seat entry (walk in device) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Seat belt restraint system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Shoulder belt extension guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Pre-tensioner seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Seat belt precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 Care of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27 Using a child restraint system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29

- Automatic locking mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30 - Tether Anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32 - Lower anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34

Air bag - advanced supplemental restraint system . 3-36 How does the air bag system operate . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 SRS components and functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39 Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40 Occupation classification system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43 Driver's and passenger's front air bag. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48 Side impact air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52 Curtain air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54 SRS care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60 Additional safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61 Air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63

3

Safety features of your vehicle

23

Drivers seat (1) Forward and backward (2) Seatback angle (3) Seat cushion height (4) Lumbar support (5) Walk - in seat (6) Seat warmer (7) Headrest

Front passengers seat (8) Forward and backward (9) Seatback angle (10) Walk-in seat (11) Seat warmer (12) Headrest

Rear seat (13) Seatback locking knob

(in the trunk) (14) Seatback locking strap

(in the vehicle)

SEATS

OBK032001

3 3

Safety features of your vehicle

WARNING - Drivers seat Never attempt to adjust the

seat while the vehicle is mov- ing.This could result in loss of control, and an accident caus- ing death, serious injury, or property damage.

Do not allow anything to inter- fere with the normal position of the seatback. Storing items against a seatback or in any other way interfering with proper locking of a seatback could result in serious or fatal injury in a sudden stop or col- lision.

Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap portion of the seat belt snug and low across the hips. This is the best position to protect you in case of an accident.

(Continued)

WARNING - Loose objects

Loose objects in the drivers foot area could interfere with the operation of the foot pedals, possibly causing an accident. Do not place anything under the front seats.

WARNING - Driver responsibility for passen- gers

Riding in a vehicle with the seatback reclined could lead to serious or fatal injury in an acci- dent. If a seat is reclined during an accident, the occupants hips may slide under the lap portion of the seat belt applying great force to the unprotected abdomen. Serious or fatal inter- nal injuries could result. The driver must advise the passen- ger to keep the seatback in an upright position whenever the vehicle is in motion.

WARNING - Uprighting seat

When you return the seatback to its upright position, hold the seatback return it slowly and be sure there are no other occu- pants around the seat. If the seatback is returned without being held and controlled, the back of the seat could spring forward resulting in accidental injury to a person struck by the seatback.

WARNING Do not use a sitting cushion that reduces friction between the seat and passenger.The passen- ger's hips may slide under the lap portion of the seat belt dur- ing an accident or a sudden stop. Serious or fatal internal injuries could result because the seat belt can't operate normally.

Safety features of your vehicle

43

Front seat adjustment - manual Forward and rearward To move the seat forward or rear- ward: 1. Pull the seat slide adjustment

lever up and hold it. 2. Slide the seat to the position you

desire. 3. Release the lever and make sure

the seat is locked in place. Adjust the seat before driving, and make sure the seat is locked secure- ly by trying to move forward and rear- ward without using the lever. If the seat moves, it is not locked properly.

WARNING After adjusting the seat, always check that it is securely locked into place by attempting to move the seat forward or rearward without using the lock release lever. Sudden or unexpected movement of the driver's seat could cause you to lose control of the vehicle resulting in an accident.

WARNING Use extreme caution so that hands or other objects are not caught in the seat mechanisms while the seat is moving.

(Continued) In order to avoid unnecessary

and perhaps severe air bag injuries, always sit as far back as possible from the steering wheel while maintaining com- fortable control of the vehicle. We recommend that your chest be at least 10 inches (250 mm) away from the steering wheel.

OBK032002

3 5

Safety features of your vehicle

Seatback angle To recline the seatback: 1. Lean forward slightly and lift up the

seatback recline lever. 2. Carefully lean back on the seat

and adjust the seatback of the seat to the position you desire.

3. Release the lever and make sure the seatback is locked in place. (The lever MUST return to its orig- inal position for the seatback to lock.)

Seat cushion height (for drivers seat) To change the height of the seat cushion, push the lever upwards or downwards. To lower the seat cushion, push the

lever down several times. To raise the seat cushion, pull the

lever up several times.

Front seat adjustment - power (for drivers seat) (if equipped) The front seat can be adjusted by using the control knob located on the outside of the seat cushion. Before driving, adjust the seat to the proper position so as to easily control the steering wheel, pedals and switches on the instrument panel.

OBK032003 OBK032004 WARNING The power seat is operable with the ignition OFF, therefore, chil- dren should never be left unat- tended in the car.

Safety features of your vehicle

63

Forward and rearward Push the control knob forward or rearward to move the seat to the desired position. Release the knob once the seat reaches the desired position.

Seatback angle To recline the seatback: 1. Lean forward slightly and lift up the

seatback recline lever. 2. Carefully lean back on the seat

and adjust the seatback of the seat to the position you desire.

3. Release the lever and make sure the seatback is locked in place. (The lever MUST return to its orig- inal position for the seatback to lock.)

CAUTION The power seat is driven by an

electric motor. Stop operating once the adjustment is com- pleted. Excessive operation may damage the electrical equipment.

When in operation, the power seat consumes a large amount of electrical power. To prevent unnecessary charging system drain, dont adjust the power seat longer than necessary while the engine is not running.

Do not operate two or more power seat control knobs at the same time. Doing so may result in power seat motor or electri- cal component malfunction.

OBK032060 OBK032061

3 7

Safety features of your vehicle

Seat cushion height Pull the front portion of the control knob up to raise or push down to lower the front part of the seat cush- ion. Pull the rear portion of the con- trol knob up to raise or push down to lower the rear part of the seat cush- ion. Release the knob once the seat reaches the desired position.

Headrest The driver's and front passenger's seats are equipped with a headrest for the occupant's safety and com- fort. The headrest not only provides com- fort for the driver and front passen- ger, but also helps protect the head and neck in the event of a collision.

OBK032062 OBK039051N

WARNING For maximum effectiveness in

case of an accident, the head- rest should be adjusted so the middle of the headrest is at the same height of the center of gravity of an occupant's head. Generally, the center of gravity of most people's head is similar with the height of the top of their eyes. Also, adjust the headrest as close to your head as possible. For this reason, the use of a cush- ion that holds the body away from the seatback is not rec- ommended.

Do not operate the vehicle with the headrests removed. Severe injury to the occu- pants may occur in the event of an accident. Headrests may provide protection against neck injuries when properly adjusted.

Do not adjust the headrest position of the drivers seat while the vehicle is in motion.

Safety features of your vehicle

83

Forward and rearward adjustment

The headrest may be adjusted for- ward to 3 different positions by pulling the headrest forward to the desired detent. To adjust the head- rest to its furthest rearward position, pull it fully forward to the farthest position and release it. Adjust the headrest so that it properly supports the head and neck.

Adjusting the height up and down

To raise the headrest, pull it up to the desired position (1). To lower the headrest, push and hold the release button (2) on the headrest support and lower the headrest to the desired position (3).

Removal/Reinstall

To remove the headrest: 1. Recline the seatback (2) with the

recline lever or switch (1). 2. Raise headrest as far as it can go. 3. Press the headrest release button

(3) while pulling the headrest up (4).

OBK039005 OBK039006 OBK033069

WARNING NEVER allow anyone to ride in a seat with the headrest removed.

3 9

Safety features of your vehicle

To reinstall the headrest : 1. Put the headrest poles (2) into the

holes while pressing the release button (1).

2. Recline the seatback (4) with the recline lever or switch (3).

3. Adjust the headrest to the appro- priate height.

Active headrest (if equipped)

The active headrest is designed to move forward and upward during a rear impact. This helps prevent the driver's and front passengers heads from moving backward and thus helps minimize neck injuries.

Lumbar support (for drivers seat, if equipped) The lumbar support can be adjusted by pressing the lumbar support switch on the side of the drivers seat. Press the front portion of the switch to increase support, or the rear por- tion of the switch, to decrease sup- port.

OBK033070 HNF2041-1 OBK032063

WARNING Always make sure the headrest locks into position after rein- stalling and adjusting it properly.

Safety features of your vehicle

103

Seat warmer (if equipped) The seat warmers are provided to warm the front seats during cold weather. While the engine is running, push either of the switches to warm the driver's seat or the front passen- ger's seat. During mild weather or under condi- tions where the operation of the seat warmer is not needed, keep the switches in the OFF position. Each time you press the button,

the temperature setting of the seat will change as follows

The seat warmer defaults to the OFF position whenever the ignition switch is turned on.

NOTICE With the seat warmer switch in the ON position, the heating system in the seat turns off or on automatical- ly depending on the seat tempera- ture.

OBK034009

OFF HIGH( ) LOW( )

CAUTION

When cleaning the seats, do not use an organic solvent such as paint thinner, ben- zene, alcohol and gasoline. Doing so may damage the sur- face of the heater or seats.

To prevent overheating the seat warmer, do not place any- thing on the seats that insu- lates against heat, such as blankets, cushions or seat covers while the seat warmer is in operation.

Do not place heavy or sharp objects on seats equipped with seat warmers. Damage to the seat warming components could occur.

3 11

Safety features of your vehicle

Seatback pocket The seatback pocket is provided on the back of the front passengers and drivers seatbacks.

WARNING - Seat warmer burns

Passengers should use extreme caution when using seat warm- ers due to the possibility of excess heating or burns. The occupant must turn the seat warmer off if the seat is becom- ing too warm. The seat warmer may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time. In particular, the driver must exercise extreme care for the following types of passengers: 1. Infants, children, elderly or

disabled persons, or hospital outpatients

2. Persons with sensitive skin or those that burn easily

3. Fatigued individuals 4. Intoxicated individuals 5. Individuals taking medication

that can cause drowsiness or sleepiness (sleeping pills, cold tablets, etc.)

OBK032066

WARNING - Seatback pockets

Do not put heavy or sharp objects in the seatback pockets. In an accident they could come loose from the pocket and injure vehicle occupants.

Safety features of your vehicle

123

Rear seat entry (Walk in device) The driver and front passenger's seatbacks should be tilted to enter the rear seat.

Drivers seat By pulling up the seatback recline lever or the walk in device lever (1) the seatback will tilt forward. Then pull the seat slide adjustment lever up or push the control knob forward to move the seat forward. After getting in or out, recline and return the seatback to the original position. Make sure that the seat is locked in place.

Front passengers seat By pulling up the walk in device lever (1) on the back of the front passen- gers seatback, the seatback will tilt forward. Then push the seat forward to allow the occupants to enter.

By pulling up the seatback, the seat- back is reclined and returned to the original position.

OBK032017

WARNING Don't drive with the passenger side seatback reclined. It is dan- gerous to move it while driving. Be sure the seatback is upright before driving.

WARNING Never attempt to adjust the

seat while the vehicle is mov- ing or the front seats are occupied as the seat may sud- denly move and cause the passenger on the seat to be injured.

Do not put your hands under- neath the seat while adjusting it.OBK032068

3 13

Safety features of your vehicle

Rear seat Folding the rear seat The rear seatbacks may be folded to facilitate carrying long items or to increase the luggage capacity of the vehicle.

To fold down the rear seatback:

1. Set the front seatback to the upright position and if necessary, slide the front seat forward.

2. Pull out the seatback locking knob (1) in the trunk or the strap (2) at the center of the rearseat.

WARNING The purpose of the fold-down rear seatbacks is to allow you to carry longer objects than could otherwise be accommodated. Never allow passengers to sit on top of the folded down seat- back while the car is moving as this is not a proper seating position and no seat belts are available for use. This could result in serious injury or death in case of an accident or sud- den stop. Objects carried on the folded down seatback should not extend higher than the top of the front seats. This could allow cargo to slide forward and cause injury or damage during sudden stops.

OBK039014

OBK039032

CAUTION To discourage theft, only use the seatback locking strap(2) at the center of the rear seat in an emergency situation(The bat- tery is discharged). Hide the strap so it is not always visible.

Safety features of your vehicle

143

3. Remove the belt webbing from the rear shoulder belt guide and move the rear belt webbing to the out- side so it does not interfere with the seatback when folding.

4. Fold the seat toward the front of the vehicle.

5. When returning the seatback to its upright position, always be sure it has locked into position by firmly pushing on the top of the seat- back.

6. Insert the belt webbing in the rear shoulder belt guide.

NOTICE If the seat belt locks when the seat- back is folded, and pull out the locked seat belt then release it.

OBK032015OBK032067

WARNING When you return the rear seat- back to its upright position after being folded down: Be careful not to damage the seat belt webbing or buckle. Do not allow the seat belt webbing or buckle to get caught or pinched in the rear seat. Ensure that the seatback is completely locked into its upright position by pushing on the top of the seatback. Otherwise, in an acci- dent or sudden stop, the seat could fold down and allow cargo to enter the passenger compartment, which could result in serious injury or death.

3 15

Safety features of your vehicle

WARNING - Cargo Cargo should always be secured to prevent it from being thrown about the vehicle in a collision and causing injury to the vehicle occupants. Do not place objects on the rear seats, since they cannot be properly secured and may hit the front seat occupants in a collision.

WARNING - Rear seat belts

When returning the rear seat- backs to the upright position, remember to return the rear shoulder belts to their proper position.

After returning the rear seat- backs to the upright position, check that the rear seats are secure.

WARNING - Cargo load- ing

Make sure the engine is off, the automatic transmission is in P (Park) or the manual transmis- sion is in reverse, and the park- ing brake is securely applied whenever loading or unloading cargo. Failure to take these steps may allow the vehicle to move if the shift lever is inad- vertently moved to another position.

Safety features of your vehicle

163

Seat belt restraint system SEAT BELTS

WARNING Seat belts are designed to bear upon the bony structure of the body, and should be worn low across the front of the pelvis, or the pelvis, chest and shoulders, as applicable; wearing the lap section of the belt across the abdominal area must be avoided. Seat belts should be adjusted as firmly as possible, consis- tent with comfort, to provide the protection for which they have been designed.

(Continued)

(Continued) A slack belt will greatly reduce the protection afforded to the wearer. Care should be taken to avoid contamination of the webbing with polishes, oils and chemi- cals and particularly battery acid. Cleaning may safely be carried out using mild soap and water. The belt should be replaced if webbing becomes frayed, contaminated or dam- aged. It is essential to replace the entire assembly after it has been worn in a severe impact even if damage to the assembly is not obvious. Belts should not be worn with straps twisted. Each seat belt assembly must only be used by one occupant; it is dangerous to put a belt around a child being carried on the occupant's lap.

(Continued) Avoid wearing twisted seat

belts. A twisted belt can't do its job as well. In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt webbing is straight and not twisted.

Be careful not to damage the belt webbing or hardware. If the belt webbing or hardware is damaged, replace it.

WARNING For maximum restraint system

protection, the seat belts must always be used whenever the car is moving.

Seat belts are most effective when seatbacks are in the upright position.

Children age 12 and under must always be properly restrained in the rear seat. Never allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. If a child over 12 must be seated in the front seat, he/she must be properly belted and the seat should be moved as far back as possible.

Never wear the shoulder belt under your arm or behind your back. An improperly posi- tioned shoulder belt can cause serious injuries in a crash. The shoulder belt should be posi- tioned midway over your shoul- der across your collarbone.

(Continued)

3 17

Safety features of your vehicle

Seat belt warning (for drivers seat) As a reminder to the driver, the seat belt warning light will blink for approximately 6 seconds each time you turn the ignition switch ON and/or START regardless of belt fas- tening.

If the driver's seat belt is not fastened when the ignition switch is turned ON and/or START, the seat belt warning light and the seat belt warning chime will operate for approximately 6 sec- onds. If the drivers seat belt is fas- tened within the 6 seconds, the warning light will blink during the 6 seconds and the warning chime will turn off immediately. If the driver's seat belt is disconnect- ed after the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the seat belt warning light will blink for approxi- mately 6 seconds until the belt is fas- tened. If the driver's seat belt is not fastened when the vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h), the seat belt warning light and chime will operate for approximately 10 times with a pattern of 6 seconds on and 24 seconds off until the belt is fas- tened or the vehicle speed decreas- es below 3 mph (5 km/h).

WARNING No modifications or additions

should be made by the user which will either prevent the seat belt adjusting devices from operating to remove slack, or prevent the seat belt assembly from being adjusted to remove slack.

When you fasten the seat belt, be careful not to latch the seat belt in buckles of other seat. It's very dangerous and you may not be protected by the seat belt properly.

Do not unfasten and fasten the seat belt repeatedly while driv- ing. This could result in loss of control, and an accident caus- ing death, serious injury, or property damage.

When fastening the seat belt, make sure that the seat belt does not pass over objects that are hard or can break easily.

Make sure there is nothing in the buckle. The seat belt may not be fastened securely.

1GQA2083

Safety features of your vehicle

183

Seat belt - Driver's 3-point system with emergency locking retractor To fasten your seat belt:

To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the retractor and insert the metal tab (1) into the buckle (2). There will be an audible "click" when the tab locks into the buckle. The seat belt automatically adjusts to the proper length only after the lap belt portion is adjusted manually so that it fits snugly around your hips. If you lean forward in a slow, easy motion, the belt will extend and let you move around. If there is a sud- den stop or impact, however, the belt will lock into position. It will also lock if you try to lean forward too quickly.

If you are not able to pull out the seat belt from the retractor, firmly pull the belt out and release it. Then you will be able to pull the belt out smoothly.

WARNING Failure to replace seat belts after an accident could leave you with damaged seat belts that will not provide protection in the event of another collision leading to personal injury or death. Replace your seat belts as soon as possible after being in an accident.

B200A02NF

WARNING You should place the lap belt portion as low as possible and snugly across your hips, not on your waist. If the lap belt is located too high on your waist, it may increase the chance of injury in the event of a collision. Both arms should not be under or over the belt. Rather, one should be over and the other under, as shown in the illustra- tion. Never wear the seat belt under the arm nearest the door.

B180A01NF-1

3 19

Safety features of your vehicle

Seat belts - Front passenger and rear seat 3-point system with combination locking retractor To fasten your seat belt:

Combination retractor type seat belts are installed in the rear seat posi- tions to help accommodate the installation of child restraint systems. Although a combination retractor is also installed in the front passenger seat position, it is strongly recom- mended that children always be seated in the rear seat. NEVER place any infant restraint system in the front seat of the vehicle. This type of seat belt combines the features of both an emergency lock- ing retractor seat belt and an auto- matic locking retractor seat belt. To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the retractor and insert the metal tab into the buckle. There will be an audible "click" when the tab locks into the buckle. When not securing a child restraint, the seat belt operates in the same way as the driver's seat belt (Emergency Locking Retractor Type).

It automatically adjusts to the proper length only after the lap belt portion of the seat belt is adjusted manually so that it fits snugly around your hips. When the seat belt is fully extended from the retractor to allow the instal- lation of a child restraint system, the seat belt operation changes to allow the belt to retract, but not to extend (Automatic Locking Retractor Type). Refer to Using a child restraint sys- tem in this section.

NOTICE Although the combination retractor provides the same level of protection for seated passengers in either emer- gency or automatic locking modes, it is recommended that seated passen- gers use the emergency locking fea- ture for improved convenience. The automatic locking function is intended to facilitate child restraint installation. To convert from the automatic locking feature to the emergency locking operation mode, allow the unbuckled seat belt to fully retract.

To release the seat belt:

The seat belt is released by pressing the release button (1) in the locking buckle. When it is released, the belt should automatically draw back into the retractor. If this does not happen, check the belt to be sure it is not twisted, then try again.

B210A01NF-1

Safety features of your vehicle

203

Shoulder belt extension guide You can adjust the position of the shoulder belt extension guide for easier access to the shoulder belt. Set the belt extension guide to the position (1~3) when using the seat belt.

Pre-tensioner seat belt Your vehicle is equipped with driver's and front passenger's pre-tensioner seat belts. The purpose of the pre- tensioner is to make sure that the seat belts fit tightly against the occu- pant's body in certain frontal colli- sions. The pre-tensioner seat belts may be activated in certain frontal collisions.

OFS031034 OED030300

WARNING Verify the shoulder belt exten-

sion guide is locked into posi- tion at the appropriate height. Never position the shoulder belt across your neck or face. Improperly positioned seat belts can cause serious injuries in an accident.

Failure to replace seat belts after an accident could leave you with damaged seat belts that will not provide protec- tion in the event of another collision leading to personal injury or death. Replace your seat belts after being in an accident as soon as possible.

3 21

Safety features of your vehicle

When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if the occupant tries to lean forward too quickly, the seat belt retractor will lock into position. In certain frontal collisions, the pre-tensioner will acti- vate and pull the seat belt into tighter contact against the occupant's body. If the system senses excessive ten- sion on the driver or passenger's seat belt when the pre-tensioner acti- vates, the load limiter inside the pre- tensioner will release some of the pressure on the affected seat belt. The seat belt pre-tensioner system

consists mainly of the following com- ponents.Their locations are shown in the illustration: 1. SRS air bag warning light 2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly 3. SRS control module

OBH038100

WARNING To obtain maximum benefit from a pre-tensioner seat belt: 1. The seat belt must be worn

correctly and adjusted to the proper position. Please read and follow all of the important information and precautions about your vehicles occu- pant safety features includ- ing seat belts and air bags that are provided in this man- ual.

2. Be sure you and your passen- gers always wear seat belts properly.

WARNING Do not put anything near the buckle. Placing objects near the buckle can adversely affect the buckle pre-tensioner and may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a collision.

WARNING For your safety, be sure that the belt webbing is not loose or twisted and always sit property on your seat.

Safety features of your vehicle

223

NOTICE Both the driver's and front pas-

senger's pre-tensioner seat belts may be activated in certain frontal collisions.

When the pre-tensioner seat belts are activated, a loud noise may be heard and fine dust, which may appear to be smoke, may be visible in the passenger compartment. These are normal operating condi- tions and are not hazardous.

The fine dust may cause skin irri- tation and should not be breathed for prolonged periods. Wash all exposed skin areas thoroughly after an accident in which the pre- tensioner seat belts were activated.

NOTICE Because the sensor that activates the SRS air bag is connected with the pre-tensioner seat belt, the SRS air bag warning light on the instru- ment panel will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned to the ON position, and then it should turn off.

CAUTION If the pre-tensioner seat belt is not working properly, this warn- ing light will illuminate even if there is no malfunction of the SRS air bag. If the SRS air bag warning light does not illumi- nate when the ignition switch is turned ON, or if it remains illu- minated after illuminating for approximately 6 seconds, or if it illuminates while the vehicle is being driven, have an author- ized HYUNDAI dealer inspect the pre-tensioner seat belt and SRS air bag system as soon as possible.

WARNING Pre-tensioners are designed

to operate only one time. After activation, pre-tensioner seat belts must be replaced. All seat belts, of any type, should always be replaced after they have been worn during a colli- sion.

The pre-tensioner seat belt assembly mechanisms become hot during activation. Do not touch the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies for several min- utes after they have been acti- vated.

Do not attempt to inspect or replace the pre-tensioner seat belts yourself. This must be done by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Do not strike the pre-tension- er seat belt assemblies.

Do not attempt to service or repair the pre-tensioner seat belt system in any manner.

(Continued)

3 23

Safety features of your vehicle

Seat belt precautions Infant or small child All 50 states have child restraint laws. You should be aware of the specific requirements in your state. Child and/or infant seats must be properly placed and installed in the rear seat. For more information about the use of these restraints, refer to Child restraint system in this section.

WARNING All occupants of the vehicle must wear their seat belts at all times. Seat belts and child restraints reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries for all occupants in the event of a col- lision or sudden stop. Without a seat belt, occupants could be shifted too close to a deploying air bag, strike the interior struc- ture or be thrown from the vehi- cle. Properly worn seat belts greatly reduce these hazards. Even with advanced air bags, unbelted occupants can be severely injured by a deploying air bag. Always follow the precautions about seat belts, air bags and occupant seating contained in this manual.

WARNING Every person in your vehicle needs to be properly restrained at all times, including infants and children. Never hold a child in your arms or lap when riding in a vehicle. The violent forces created during a crash will tear the child from your arms and throw the child against the inte- rior. Always use a child restraint appropriate for your child's height and weight.

(Continued) Improper handling of the pre-

tensioner seat belt assem- blies, and failure to heed the warnings not to strike, modify, inspect, replace, service or repair the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies may lead to improper operation or inad- vertent activation and serious injury.

Always wear the seat belts when driving or riding in a motor vehicle.

If the vehicle or pre-tensioner seat belt must be discarded, contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Safety features of your vehicle

243

NOTICE Small children are best protected from injury in an accident when properly restrained in the rear seat by a child restraint system that meets the requirements of the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Before buying any child restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. The restraint must be appropriate for your child's height and weight. Check the label on the child restraint for this information. Refer to Child restraint system in this section.

Larger children Children who are too large for child restraint systems should always occupy the rear seat and use the available lap/shoulder belts. The lap portion should be fastened and snugged on the hips and as low as possible. Check if the belt fits period- ically. A child's squirming could put the belt out of position. Children are given the most safety in the event of an accident when they are restrained by a proper restraint system in the rear seat. If a larger child (over age 12) must be seated in the front seat, the child should be securely restrained by the available lap/shoul- der belt and the seat should be placed in the rearmost position. Children age 12 and under should be restrained securely in the rear seat. NEVER place a child age 12 and under in the front seat. NEVER place a rear facing child seat in the front seat of a vehicle.

If the shoulder belt portion slightly touches the childs neck or face, try placing the child closer to the center of the vehicle. If the shoulder belt still touches their face or neck they need to be returned to a child restraint system.

WARNING - Shoulder belts on small children

Never allow a shoulder belt to be in contact with a childs neck or face while the vehicle is in motion.

If seat belts are not properly worn and adjusted on chil- dren, there is a risk of death or serious injury.

3 25

Safety features of your vehicle

Restraint of pregnant women Pregnant women should wear lap/shoulder belt assemblies when- ever possible according to specific recommendations by their doctors. The lap portion of the belt should be worn AS SNUGLY AND LOW AS POSSIBLE on the hips, not a cross the abdomen.

Injured person A seat belt should be used when an injured person is being transported. When this is necessary, you should consult a physician for recommenda- tions.

One person per belt Two people (including children) should never attempt to use a single seat belt. This could increase the severity of injuries in case of an acci- dent.

Do not lie down To reduce the chance of injuries in the event of an accident and to achieve maximum effectiveness of the restraint system, all passengers should be sitting up and the front seats should be in an upright posi- tion when the car is moving. A seat belt cannot provide proper protection if the person is lying down in the rear seat or if the front seats are in a reclined position.

WARNING Riding with a reclined seatback increases your chance of seri- ous or fatal injuries in the event of a collision or sudden stop. The protection of your restraint system (seat belts and air bags) is greatly reduced by reclining your seat. Seat belts must be snug against your hips and chest to work properly. The more the seatback is reclined, the greater the chance that an occupant's hips will slide under the lap belt causing serious internal injuries or the occu- pant's neck could strike the shoulder belt. Drivers and pas- sengers should always sit well back in their seats, properly belted, and with the seatbacks upright.

WARNING - Pregnant women

Pregnant women must never place the lap portion of the safety belt over the area of the abdomen where the fetus is located or above the abdomen where the belt could crush the fetus during an impact.

Safety features of your vehicle

263

Care of seat belts Seat belt systems should never be disassembled or modified. In addi- tion, care should be taken to assure that seat belts and belt hardware are not damaged by seat hinges, doors or other abuse.

Periodic inspection All seat belts should be inspected periodically for wear or damage of any kind. Any damaged parts should be replaced as soon as possible.

Keep belts clean and dry Seat belts should be kept clean and dry. If belts become dirty, they can be cleaned by using a mild soap solu- tion and warm water. Bleach, dye, strong detergents or abrasives should not be used because they may damage and weaken the fabric.

When to replace seat belts Entire in-use seat belt assembly or assemblies should be replaced if the vehicle has been involved in an acci- dent. This should be done even if no damage is visible. Additional ques- tions concerning seat belt operation should be directed to an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING When you return the rear seat- back to its upright position after the rear seatback has been fold- ed down, be careful not to dam- age the seat belt webbing or buckle. Be sure that the web- bing or buckle does not get caught or pinched in the rear seat. A seat belt with damaged webbing or buckle could possi- bly fail during a collision or sud- den stop, resulting in serious injury. If the webbing or buckles are damaged, get them replaced immediately.

3 27

Safety features of your vehicle

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM Children riding in the car should sit in the rear seat and must always be properly restrained to minimize the risk of injury in an accident, sudden stop or sudden maneuver. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats than in the front seat. Larger children not in a child restraint should use one of the seat belts pro- vided. You should be aware of the specific requirements in your state. Child and/or infant safety seats must be properly placed and installed in the rear seat. You must use a commer- cially available child restraint system that meets the requirements of the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS). Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt, or by a LATCH sys- tem (if equipped).

Children could be injured or killed in a crash if their restraints are not properly secured. For small children and babies, a child seat or infant seat must be used. Before buying a par- ticular child restraint system, make sure it fits your car seat and seat belts, and fits your child. Follow all the instructions provided by the man- ufacturer when installing the child restraint system.

WARNING A child restraint system must

be placed in the rear seat. Never install a child or infant seat on the front passenger's seat. Should an accident occur and cause the passen- ger-side air bag to deploy, it could severely injure or kill an infant or child seated in an infant or child seat. Thus only use a child restraint in the rear seat of your vehicle.

(Continued)

(Continued) A seat belt or child restraint

system can become very hot if it is left in a closed vehicle on a sunny day, even if the outside temperature does not feel hot. Be sure to check the seat cover and buckles before placing a child there.

When the child restraint sys- tem is not in use, store it in the luggage area or fasten it with a seat belt so that it will not be thrown forward in the case of a sudden stop or an accident.

Children may be seriously injured or killed by an inflating air bag. All children, even those too large for child restraints, must ride in the rear seat.

Safety features of your vehicle

283

(Continued) Never put a seat belt over your-

self and a child. During a crash, the belt could press deep into the child causing serious inter- nal injuries.

Never leave children unattend- ed in a vehicle not even for a short time.The car can heat up very quickly, resulting in seri- ous injuries to children inside. Even very young children may inadvertently cause the vehi- cle to move, entangle them- selves in the windows, or lock themselves or others inside the vehicle.

Never allow two children, or any two persons, to use the same seat belt.

Children often squirm and reposition themselves improp- erly. Never let a child ride with the shoulder belt under their arm or behind their back. Always properly position and secure children in the rear seat.

(Continued)

(Continued) Never allow a child to stand-up

or kneel on the seat or floor of a moving vehicle. During a col- lision or sudden stop, the child can be violently thrown against the vehicles interior, resulting in serious injury.

Never use an infant carrier or a child safety seat that "hooks" over a seatback, it may not pro- vide adequate security in an accident.

Seat belts can become very hot, especially when the car is parked in direct sunlight. Always check seat belt buckles before fastening them over a child.

After an accident, have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer check the child restraint sys- tem, seat belt, tether anchor and lower anchor.

If there is not enough space to place the child restraint system because of the driver's seat, install the child restraint sys- tem in the rear right seat.

WARNING To reduce the chance of serious or fatal injuries: Children of all ages are safer

when restrained in the rear seat. A child riding in the front passenger seat can be forcefully struck by an inflat- ing air bag resulting in seri- ous or fatal injuries.

Always follow the child restraint system manufactur- ers instructions for installa- tion and use of the child restraint.

Always make sure the child seat is secured properly in the car and your child is securely restrained in the child seat.

Never hold a child in your arms or lap when riding in a vehicle.The violent forces cre- ated during a crash will tear the child from your arms and throw the child against the cars interior.

(Continued)

3 29

Safety features of your vehicle

Using a child restraint system For small children and babies, the use of a child seat or infant seat is required. This child seat or infant seat should be of appropriate size for the child and should be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

For safety reasons, we recommend that the child restraint system be used in the rear seats.

Since all passenger seat belts move freely under normal conditions and only lock under extreme or emer- gency conditions (emergency locking mode), you must manually change these seat belts to the automatic locking mode to secure a child restraint.

CRS09

OBK039018

Forward-facing child restraint system

Rearward-facing child restraint system

WARNING - Child seat installation

A child can be seriously injured or killed in a collision if the child restraint is not properly anchored to the car and the child is not properly restrained in the child restraint. Before installing the child restraint system, read the instructions supplied by the child restraint system manufacturer.

If the seat belt does not oper- ate as described in this sec- tion, have the system checked immediately by your author- ized HYUNDAI dealer.

Failure to observe this manu- al's instructions regarding child restraint systems and the instructions provided with the child restraint system could increase the chance and/or severity of injury in an accident.

WARNING Never place a rear-facing child restraint in the front passenger seat, because of the danger that an inflating passenger-side air bag could impact the rear-fac- ing child restraint and kill the child.

Safety features of your vehicle

303

Placing a passenger seat belt into the automatic locking mode The automatic locking mode will help prevent the normal movement of the child in the vehicle from causing the seat belt to loosen and compromise the child restraint system. To secure a child restraint system, use the fol- lowing procedure.

To install a child restraint system on the rear seats, do the following: 1. Place the child restraint system on

the seat and route the lap/shoul- der belt around or through the restraint, following the restraint manufacturers instructions. Be sure the seat belt webbing is not twisted.

2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch into the buckle. Listen for the dis- tinct click sound.

Position the release button so that it is easy to access in case of an emer- gency.

3. Pull the shoulder portion of the seat belt all the way out. When the shoulder portion of the seat belt is fully extended, it will shift the retractor to the Automatic Locking (child restraint) mode.

E2MS103005 OBH039102OEN036101

3 31

Safety features of your vehicle

4. Slowly allow the shoulder portion of the seat belt to retract and listen for an audible clicking or ratchet- ing sound. This indicates that the retractor is in the Automatic Locking mode. If no distinct sound is heard, repeat steps 3 and 4.

5. Remove as much slack from the belt as possible by pushing down on the child restraint system while feeding the shoulder belt back into the retractor.

6. Push and pull on the child restraint system to confirm that the seat belt is holding it firmly in place. If it is not, release the seat belt and repeat steps 2 through 6.

7. Double check that the retractor is in the Automatic Locking mode by attempting to pull more of the seat belt out of the retractor. If you cannot, the retractor is in the Automatic Locking mode.

To remove the child restraint, press the release button on the buckle and then pull the lap/shoulder belt out of the restraint and allow the seat belt to retract fully.

OBH039103 OEN036104

Safety features of your vehicle

323

When the seat belt is allowed to retract to its fully stowed position, the retractor will automatically switch from the Automatic Locking mode to the emergency locking mode for normal adult usage.

Securing a child restraint seat with Tether Anchor system Child restraint hook holders are located on the package tray.

1. Route the child restraint seat teth- er strap over the seatback. For vehicles with adjustable head- rests, route the tether strap under the headrest and between the headrest posts, otherwise route the tether strap over the top of the seatback.

2. Connect the tether strap hook to the appropriate child restraint hook holder and tighten to secure the child restraint seat.

OBK039034

WARNING - Auto lock mode

The lap/shoulder belt automati- cally returns to the emergency lock mode whenever the belt is allowed to retract fully. Therefore, the preceding seven steps must be followed each time a child restraint is installed. If the retractor is not in the Automatic Locking mode, the child restraint can move when your vehicle turns or stops sud- denly. A child can be seriously injured or killed if the child restraint is not properly anchored to the car, including setting the retractor to the Automatic Locking mode.

OBK039035

3 33

Safety features of your vehicle

WARNING When using the vehicle's

"Tether Anchor" system to install a child restraint system in the rear seat, all unused vehicle rear seat belt metal latch plates or tabs must be latched securely in their seat belt buckles and the seat belt webbing must be retracted behind the child restraint to prevent the child from reach- ing and taking hold of unre- tracted seat belts. Unlatched metal latch plates or tabs may allow the child to reach the unretracted seat belts which may result in strangulation and a serious injury or death to the child in the child restraint.

Do not place anything around the lower anchors. Also make sure that the seat belt is not caught in the lower anchors.

WARNING - Tether strap Never mount more than one child restraint to a single tether or to a single lower anchorage point. The increased load caused by multiple seats may cause the tethers anchor or lower anchorage points to break, causing serious injury or death.

WARNING A child can be seriously injured or killed in a collision if the child restraint is not properly anchored to the car and the child is not properly restrained in the child restraint. Always fol- low the child seat manufactur- ers instructions for installation and use.

WARNING - Child restraint anchorage

Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by cor- rectly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.

The tether strap may not work properly if attached some- where other than the correct tether anchor.

WARNING - Child restraint check

Check that the child restraint system is secure by pushing and pulling it in different direc- tions. Incorrectly fitted child restraints may swing, twist, tip or separate causing death or serious injury.

Safety features of your vehicle

343

Securing a child restraint seat with child seat lower anchor sys- tem Some child seat manufacturers make child restraint seats that are labeled as LATCH or LATCH-com- patible child restraint seats. LATCH stands for "Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children". These seats include two rigid or webbing mount- ed attachments that connect to two LATCH anchors at specific seating positions in your vehicle. This type of child restraint seat eliminates the need to use seat belts to attach the child seat in the rear seats.

Child restraint symbols are located on the left and right rear seat backs to indicate the position of the lower anchors for child restraints. LATCH anchors have been provided in your vehicle. The LATCH anchors are located in the left and right out- board rear seating positions. Their locations are shown in the illustra- tion. The LATCH anchors are located on the back of the rear seat cushion of the rear seat left and right outboard seating positions. Follow the child seat manufacturers instructions to properly install child restraint seats with LATCH or LATCH-compatible attachments.

Once you have installed the LATCH child restraint, assure that the seat is properly attached to the LATCH and tether anchors. Also, test the child restraint seat before you place the child in it. Tilt the seat from side to side. Also try to tug the seat forward. Check to see if the anchors hold the seat in place.

OBK039036 OBK032037ISOFIX Anchor

ISOFIX Anchor Position Indicator

3 35

Safety features of your vehicle

WARNING If the child restraint is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being seriously injured or killed in a collision greatly increases.

WARNING - LATCH lower anchors

LATCH lower anchors are only to be used with the left and right rear outboard seating positions.

WARNING When using the vehicle's "LATCH" system to install a child restraint system in the rear seat, all unused vehicle rear seat belt metal latch plates or tabs must be latched secure- ly in their seat belt buckles and the seat belt webbing must be retracted behind the child restraint to prevent the child from reaching and taking hold of unretracted seat belts. Unlatched metal latch plates or tabs may allow the child to reach the unretracted seat belts which may result in strangula- tion and a serious injury or death to the child in the child restraint.

CAUTION Do not allow the rear seat belt webbing to get scratched or pinched by the child-seat latch and LATCH anchor during the installation.

Safety features of your vehicle

363

(1) Drivers front air bag (2) Passengers front air bag (3) Side impact air bag (4) Curtain air bag

AIR BAG - ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

WARNING Even in vehicles with air bags, you and your passengers must always wear the seat belts pro- vided in order to minimize the risk and severity of injury in the event of a collision or rollover.

OBK032019

* The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

3 37

Safety features of your vehicle

How does the air bag system operate Air bags are activated (able to

inflate if necessary) only when the ignition switch is turned to the ON or START position.

Air bags inflate in the event of a serious frontal or side collision in order to help protect the occupants from serious physical injury.

There is no single speed at which the air bags will inflate. Generally, air bags are designed to inflate based upon the severity of a collision and its direction. These two factors determine whether the sensors produce an electronic deployment/ inflation signal.

Air bag deployment depends on a number of factors including vehicle speed, angles of impact and the density and stiffness of the vehi- cles or objects which your vehicle hits in the collision. The determin- ing factors are not limited to those mentioned above.

The front air bags will completely inflate and deflate in an instant. It is virtually impossible for you to see the air bags inflate during an accident. It is much more likely that you will simply see the deflated air bags hanging out of their storage com- partments after the collision.

In order to help provide protection in a severe collision, the air bags must inflate rapidly. The speed of air bag inflation is a consequence of the extremely short time in which a collision occurs and the need to inflate the air bag between the occupant and the vehicle struc- tures before the occupant impacts those structures. This speed of inflation reduces the risk of serious or life-threatening injuries in a severe collision and is thus a nec- essary part of air bag design. However, air bag inflation can also cause injuries which can include facial abrasions, bruises and bro- ken bones because the inflation speed also causes the air bags to expand with a great deal of force.

There are even circumstances under which contact with the air bag can cause fatal injuries, especially if the occupant is positioned excessively close to the air bag.

WARNING To avoid severe personal

injury or death caused by deploying air bags in a colli- sion, the driver should sit as far back from the steering wheel air bag as possible (at least 10 inches (250 mm) away). The front passengers should always move their seats as far back as possible and sit back in their seat.

Air bags inflate instantly in the event of collision, and passen- gers may be injured by the air bag expansion force if they are not in proper position.

Air bag inflation may cause injuries including facial or bodily abrasions, injuries from broken glasses or burns.

Safety features of your vehicle

383

Noise and smoke When the air bags inflate, they make a loud noise and they leave smoke and powder in the air inside of the vehicle. This is normal and is a result of the ignition of the air bag inflator. After the air bag inflates, you may feel substantial discomfort in breath- ing due to the contact of your chest with both the seat belt and the air bag, as well as from breathing the smoke and powder. Open your doors and/or windows as soon as possible after impact in order to reduce discomfort and prevent prolonged exposure to the smoke and powder. Though the smoke and powder are non-toxic, they may cause irritation to the skin (eyes, nose and throat, etc). If this is the case, wash and rinse with cold water immediately and consult a doctor if the symptom persists.

Do not install a child restraint on the front passengers seat. Never place a rear-facing child restraint in the front passengers seat. If the air bag deploys, it would impact the rear-facing child restraint, causing serious or fatal injury. In addition, do not place front-facing child restraints in the front passen- gers seat either. If the front passen- ger air bag inflates, it could cause serious or fatal injuries to the child.

1JBH3051

WARNING When the air bags deploy, the air bag related parts in the steering wheel and/or instru- ment panel and/or in both sides of the roof rails above the front and rear doors and in the front seatbacks are very hot. To pre- vent injury, do not touch the air bag storage areas internal components immediately after an air bag has inflated.

3 39

Safety features of your vehicle

SRS components and func- tions The SRS consists of the following components: 1. Driver's front air bag module 2. Passenger's front air bag module 3. Side impact air bag modules 4. Curtain air bag modules 5. Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies 6. Air bag warning light 7. SRS control module (SRSCM) 8. Front impact sensors 9. Side impact sensors 10. PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF"

indicator (Front passengers seat only)

11. Occupant classification system (Front passengers seat only)

The SRSCM continually monitors all SRS components while the ignition switch is ON to determine if a crash impact is severe enough to require air bag deployment or pre-tensioner seat belt deployment.

OBK039059N

WARNING Extreme Hazard! Do not use a

rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an air bag in front of it!

Never put a child restraint in the front passengers seat. If the front passenger air bag inflates, it can cause serious or fatal injuries.

Safety features of your vehicle

403

Air bag warning light The SRS air bag warning light " " on the instrument panel will illumi- nate for about 6 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, after which the SRS air bag warning light " " should go out. If any of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction of the SRS. Have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer inspect the air bag system as soon as possible. The light does not turn on briefly

when you turn the ignition ON. The light stays on after illuminating

for approximately 6 seconds.

The light comes on while the vehi- cle is in motion.

The light blinks when you turn the ignition ON.

The front air bag modules are locat- ed both in the center of the steering wheel and in the front passenger's panel above the glove box. When the SRSCM detects a sufficiently severe impact to the front of the vehicle, it will automatically deploy the front air bags.

W7-147 B240B01L

Drivers front air bag (1)

3 41

Safety features of your vehicle

Upon deployment, tear seams mold- ed directly into the pad covers will separate under pressure from the expansion of the air bags. Further opening of the covers then allows full inflation of the air bags.

A fully inflated air bag, in combina- tion with a properly worn seat belt, slows the driver's or the passenger's forward motion, reducing the risk of head and chest injury.

After complete inflation, the air bag immediately starts deflating, enabling the driver to maintain for- ward visibility and the ability to steer or operate other controls.

B240B02L B240B03L

Drivers front air bag (2) Drivers front air bag (3)

WARNING Do not install or place any

accessories (drink holder, cas- sette holder, sticker, etc.) on the front passenger's panel above the glove box in a vehi- cle with a passenger's air bag. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the passenger's air bag inflates.

(Continued)

B240B05L

Passengers front air bag

Safety features of your vehicle

423

WARNING If an air bag deploys, there

may be a loud noise followed by a fine dust released in the vehicle. These conditions are normal and are not hazardous - the air bags are packed in this fine powder. The dust generat- ed during air bag deployment may cause skin or eye irrita- tion as well as aggravate asth- ma for some persons. Always wash all exposed skin areas thoroughly with lukewarm water and a mild soap after an accident in which the air bags were deployed.

(Continued)

(Continued) The SRS can function only

when the ignition switch is in the ON position. If the SRS air bag warning light " " does not illuminate, or continuous- ly remains on after illuminat- ing for about 6 seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, or after the engine is started, comes on while driving, the SRS is not working properly. If this occurs, have your vehicle immediately inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Before you replace a fuse or disconnect a battery terminal, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the ignition key. Never remove or replace the air bag related fuse(s) when the ignition switch is in the ON position. Failure to heed this warning will cause the SRS AIR BAG warning light to illuminate.

(Continued) When installing a container of

liquid air freshener inside the vehicle, do not place it near the instrument cluster nor on the instrument panel surface. It may become a dangerous projectile and cause injury if the passenger's air bag inflates.

3 43

Safety features of your vehicle

Occupant classification sys- tem Your vehicle is equipped with an occupant classification system in the front passenger's seat. The occupant classification system is designed to detect the presence of a properly-seated front passenger and determine if the passenger's front air bag should be enabled (may inflate) or not. The driver's front air bag is not affected or controlled by the occupant classification system.

Main components of occupant classification system A detection device located within

the front passenger seat track. Electronic system to determine

whether the passenger air bag systems should be activated or deactivated.

A warning light located on the instrument panel which illuminates the words PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicating the front passen- ger air bag system is deactivated.

The instrument panel air bag warn- ing light is interconnected with the occupant classification system.

If the front passenger seat is occu- pied by a person that the system determines to be of adult size, and he/she sits properly (sitting upright with the seatback in an upright posi- tion, centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legs comfort- ably extended and their feet on the floor), the PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator will be turned off and the front passenger's air bag will be able to inflate, if necessary, in frontal crashes.

You will find the PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator on the center facia panel. This system detects the conditions 1~4 in the following table and activates or deactivates the front passenger air bag based on these conditions.

OBK032058N

Safety features of your vehicle

443

Always be sure that you and all vehi- cle occupants are seated and restrained properly (sitting upright with the seat in an upright position, cen- tered on the seat cushion, with the person's legs comfortably extended, feet on the floor, and wearing the safe- ty belt properly) for the most effective protection by the air bag and the safe- ty belt. The OCS may not function proper-

ly if the passenger takes actions which can affect the detection sys- tem. These include: (1) Failing to sit in an upright posi-

tion. (2) Leaning against the door or

center console. (3) Sitting towards the sides or the

front of the seat. (4) Putting legs on the dashboard

or resting them on other loca- tions which reduce the passen- ger weight on the front seat.

(5) Improperly wearing the safety belt.

(6) Reclining the seat back.

Condition and operation of the front passenger occupant classification system

*1) The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front pas- senger seat, the system may rec- ognize him/her as a child depend- ing on his/her physique and pos- ture.

*2) Do not allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. When a smaller child than the same age sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as an infant depending on his/her physique or posture.

*3) Never install a child restraint sys- tem on the front passenger seat.

WARNING Riding in an improper position or placing weight on the front passenger's seat when it is unoccupied by a passenger adversely affects the occupant classification system (OCS).

(Continued)

Condition detected by the occupant classifica-

tion system

1. Adult *1

2. Child *2 *3 of about 36

months old and

younger with child

restraint system

3. Unoccupied

4. There is a malfunc-

tion in the system

Off

On

On

Off

Off

Off

Off

On

Activated

Deactivated

Deactivated

Activated

PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator light

SRS warning light Front passenger air

bag

Indicator/Warning light Devices

3 45

Safety features of your vehicle

1KMN3663

1KMN3664

1KMN3665

- Never sit with hips shifted towards the front of the seat.

- Never lean on the the door or center console.

- Never sit on one side of the front passenger seat.

- Never place feet on the dash- board.

OVQ036013N

1KMN3662

- Never put a heavy load in the front passenger seat or seat- back pocket.

- Never excessively recline the front passenger seatback.

OVQ036014N

- Never place feet on the front passenger seatback.

(Continued)

Safety features of your vehicle

463

When an adult is seated in the front passenger seat, if the PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator is on, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi- tion and ask the passenger to sit properly (sitting upright with the seat back in an upright position, centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and their feet on the floor). Restart the engine and have the person remain in that position for about 30 seconds.This will allow the system to detect the person and to enable the passenger air bag.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator is still on, ask the passen- ger to move to the rear seat.

NOTICE The PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator illuminates for about 4 sec- onds after the ignition switch is turned to the ON position or after the engine is started. If the front passenger seat is occupied, the occu- pant classification sensor will then classify the front passenger after several more seconds.

B990A01O

WARNING Do not allow an adult passenger to ride in the front seat when the PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator is illuminated because the air bag will not deploy in the event of a crash. If the PASSEN- GER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator remains illuminated after the adult passenger repositions themselves properly and the car is restarted, it is recommended that passenger move to the rear seat because the passenger's front air bag will not deploy. Front seat passengers must stay properly seated to avoid serious injury from a deploying air bag.

Proper position

3 47

Safety features of your vehicle

(Continued) Air bags can only be used

once have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer replace the air bag immediately after deployment.

A smaller-stature adult who is not seated correctly (for exam- ple: seat excessively reclined, leaning on the door or center console, or hips shifted for- ward in the seat) can cause a condition where the advanced frontal air bag system senses less weight than if the occu- pant were seated properly (sit- ting upright with the seatback in an upright position, cen- tered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legs com- fortably extended and their feet on the floor). This condition can result in an adult potentially being mis- classified and illumination of the PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator.

(Continued) Do not modify or replace the

front passenger seat. Don't place anything on or attach anything such as a blanket or seat heater to the front passen- ger seat. This can adversely affect the occupant classifica- tion system.

Do not sit on sharp objects such as tools when occupying the front passenger seat. This can adversely affect the occu- pant classification system.

Do not use accessory seat cov- ers on the front seats.

Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear, as opposed to the front seat. It is recommended that child restraints be secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat.

(Continued)

WARNING Even though your vehicle is

equipped with the occupant classification system, never install a child restraint system in the front passenger's seat. A deploying air bag can force- fully strike a child resulting in serious injuries or death. Any child age 12 and under should ride in the rear seat. Children too large for child restraints should use the available lap/shoulder belts. No matter what type of crash, children of all ages are safer when restrained in the rear seat.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator is illuminated when the front passenger's seat is occupied by an adult and he/she sits properly (sit- ting upright with the seatback in an upright position, centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and their feet on the floor), have that person sit in the rear seat.

(Continued)

Safety features of your vehicle

483

Driver's and passenger's front air bag Your vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Restraint (Air Bag) System and lap/shoulder belts at both the driver and passenger seating posi- tions. The indications of the system's presence are the letters "SRS AIR BAG" embossed on the air bag pad cover in the steering wheel and the passenger's side front panel pad above the glove box.

The SRS consists of air bags installed under the pad covers in the center of the steering wheel and the passenger's side front panel above the glove box.

The purpose of the SRS is to provide the vehicle's driver and/or the front passenger with additional protection than that offered by the seat belt sys- tem alone in case of a frontal impact of sufficient severity. The SRS uses sensors to gather information about the impact severity.

WARNING If the occupant classification system is not working properly, the SRS air bag warning light on the instrument panel will illu- minate because the passenger's front air bag is connected with the occupant classification sys- tem. If there is a malfunction of the occupant classification sys- tem, the PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator will not illumi- nate and the passenger's front air bag will inflate in frontal impact crashes even if there is no occupant in the front passen- ger's seat. If the SRS air bag warning light does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, remains illuminated after approx- imately 6 seconds when the igni- tion switch is turned to the ON position, or if it illuminates while the vehicle is being driven, have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer inspect the occupant classifica- tion system and the SRS air bag system as soon as possible.

OBK032020

Drivers front air bag

OBK032021

Passengers front air bag

3 49

Safety features of your vehicle

The advanced SRS offers the ability to control the air bag inflation within two levels. A first stage level is pro- vided for moderate-severity impacts. A second stage level is provided for more severe impacts. The front passenger air bag is designed to help reduce the injury of children through interaction with the front passenger air bag by being too close to the instrument panel in the low speed collisions. But children are safer if they are restrainted in the rear seat.

According to the impact severity, the SRSCM (SRS Control Module) con- trols the air bag inflation. Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.

Additionally, your vehicle is equipped with an occupant classification sys- tem in the front passenger's seat. The occupant classification system detects the presence of a passenger in the front passenger's seat and will turn off the front passenger's air bag under certain conditions. For more details, see "Occupant classification system" in this section.

NOTICE Be sure to read information about

the SRS on the labels provided on the sun visor.

Advanced air bags are combined with pre-tensioner seat belts to help provide enhanced occupant protection in frontal crashes. Front air bags are not intended to deploy in collisions in which pro- tection can be provided by the pre- tensioner seat belt.

WARNING If you are considering modifica- tion of your vehicle due to a dis- ability, please contact the Hyundai Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-633-5151.

Safety features of your vehicle

503

(Continued) No objects should be placed

over or near the air bag mod- ules on the steering wheel, instrument panel, and the front passenger's panel above the glove box, because any such object could cause harm if the vehicle is in a crash severe enough to cause the air bags to deploy.

Never place covers, blankets or seat warmers on the passenger seat as these may interfere with the occupant classification sys- tem.

Do not tamper with or discon- nect SRS wiring or other com- ponents of the SRS system. Doing so could result in injury, due to accidental deployment of the air bags or by rendering the SRS inoperative.

If the SRS air bag warning light remains illuminated while the vehicle is being driven, have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer inspect the air bag system as soon as possible.

(Continued)

(Continued) Front and side air bags can

injure occupants improperly positioned in the front seats.

Move your seat as far back as practical from the front air bags, while still maintaining control of the vehicle.

You and your passengers should never sit or lean unnecessarily close to the air bags. Improperly positioned driver and passengers can be severely injured by inflating air bags.

Never lean against the door or center console always sit in an upright position.

Do not allow a passenger to ride in the front seat when the PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator is illuminated, because the air bag will not deploy in the event of a mod- erate or severe frontal crash.

(Continued)

WARNING Always use seat belts and child restraints every trip, every time, everyone! Air bags inflate with considerable force and in the blink of an eye. Seat belts help keep occupants in proper position to obtain maximum benefit from the air bag. Even with advanced air bags, improp- erly belted and unbelted occu- pants can be severely injured when the air bag inflates. Always follow the precautions about seat belts, air bags and occupant safety contained in this manual. To reduce the chance of serious or fatal injuries and receive the maximum safety benefit from your restraint system: Never place a child in any

child or booster seat in the front seat.

ABC Always Buckle Children in the back seat. It is the safest place for children of any age to ride.

(Continued)

3 51

Safety features of your vehicle

(Continued) Air bags can only be used

once have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer replace the air bag immediately after deployment.

The SRS is designed to deploy the front air bags only when an impact is sufficiently severe and when the impact angle is less than 30 from the forward longitudinal axis of the vehicle. Additionally, the air bags will only deploy once. Seat belts must be worn at all times.

Front air bags are not intend- ed to deploy in side-impact, rear-impact or rollover crash- es. In addition, front air bags will not deploy in frontal crashes below the deploy- ment threshold.

(Continued)

OBK039044

OBK032045L

OBK039050

Rear impact

Side impact

Rollover

(Continued) Even though your vehicle is

equipped with the occupant classification system, do not install a child restraint system in the front passenger seat position. A child restraint sys- tem must never be placed in the front seat. The infant or child could be severely injured or killed by an air bag deploy- ment in case of an accident.

Children age 12 and under must always be properly restrained in the rear seat. Never allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. If a child over 12 must be seated in the front seat, he or she must be properly belted and the seat should be moved as far back as possible.

(Continued)

Safety features of your vehicle

523

The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

Side impact air bag Your vehicle is equipped with a side impact air bag in each front seat. The purpose of the air bag is to provide the vehicle's driver and/or the front pas- senger with additional protection than that offered by the seat belt alone.

(Continued) For maximum safety protec-

tion in all types of crashes, all occupants including the driv- er should always wear their seat belts whether or not an air bag is also provided at their seating position to mini- mize the risk of severe injury or death in the event of a crash. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close to the air bag while the vehicle is in motion.

Sitting improperly or out of position can result in serious or fatal injury in a crash. All occupants should sit upright with the seatback in an upright position, centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and their feet on the floor until the vehicle is parked and the ignition key is removed.

(Continued)

(Continued) The SRS air bag system must

deploy very rapidly to provide protection in a crash. If an occupant is out of position because of not wearing a seat belt, the air bag may forcefully contact the occupant causing serious or fatal injuries.

OBK032022

OBK039038

Front

3 53

Safety features of your vehicle

The side impact air bags are designed to deploy only during cer- tain side-impact collisions, depend- ing on the crash severity, angle, speed and point of impact. The side impact air bags are not designed to deploy in all side impact situations.

(Continued) Use of seat covers could

reduce or prevent the effective- ness of the system.

Do not install any accessories on the side or near the side impact air bag.

Do not place any objects over the air bag or between the air bag and yourself.

Do not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the door and the seat. Such objects may become danger- ous projectiles and cause injury if the supplemental side impact air bag inflates.

To prevent unexpected deploy- ment of the side impact air bag that may result in personal injury, avoid impact to the side impact sensor when the igni- tion switch is on.

If the seat or seat cover is dam- aged, have the vehicle checked and repaired by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer because your vehicle is equipped with side impact air bags and an occu- pant classification system.

WARNING The side impact air bag is sup-

plemental to the drivers and the front passengers seat belt systems and is not a substi- tute for them. Therefore your seat belts must be worn at all times while the vehicle is in motion. The air bags deploy only in certain side impact conditions severe enough to cause significant injury to the vehicle occupants.

For best protection from the side impact air bag system and to avoid being injured by the deploying side impact air bag, all seat occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belt properly fas- tened. The driver's hands should be placed on the steer- ing wheel at the 9:00 and 3:00 positions. The passenger' arms and hands should be placed on their laps.

Do not use any accessory seat covers.

(Continued)

Safety features of your vehicle

543

The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

Curtain air bag Curtain air bags are located along both sides of the roof rails above the doors. They are designed to help protect the heads of the front seat occupants in certain side impact collisions.

The curtain air bags are designed to deploy only during certain side impact collisions, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and impact. The curtain air bags are not designed to deploy in all side impact situations, collisions from the front or rear of the vehicle or in most rollover situations.

WARNING In order for side and curtain

air bags to provide the best protection, both front seat occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belts properly fastened. Children should sit in a prop- er child restraint system in the rear seat.

(Continued)

(Continued) Do not allow the passengers

to lean their heads or bodies onto doors, put their arms on the doors, stretch their arms out of the window, or place objects between the doors and passengers when they are seated on seats equipped with side and/or curtain air bags.

Never try to open or repair any components of the side cur- tain air bag system. This should only be done by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Failure to follow the above instructions can result in injury or death to the vehicle occu- pants in an accident.

OBK039039

OBK039040

3 55

Safety features of your vehicle

Why didnt my air bag go off in a collision? (Airbags are not designed to inflate in every colli- sion.) There are certain types of acci- dents in which the air bag would not be expected to provide addi- tional protection to the vehicles occupants. These include rear impacts, sec- ond or third collisions in multiple impact accidents, as well as low speed impacts.

Air bag collision sensors (1) SRS control module (2) Front impact sensor

(3) Side impact sensor (4) Side impact sensor

OBK032023L/OBK032024/OBK032025L/OBK039054/OBK039055

1 2 3 4

Safety features of your vehicle

563

Air bag inflation conditions Front air bags

Front air bags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal colli- sions within a limited range of angles. The impact forces measured by the front impact sensors and SRS control module determine whether or not to inflate the front airbags.

WARNING Do not hit or allow any objects

to impact the locations where air bags or sensors are installed. This may cause unexpected air bag deployment, which could result in serious per- sonal injury or death.

If the installation location or angle of the sensors is altered in any way, the air bags may deploy when they should not or they may not deploy when they should, causing severe injury or death. Therefore, do not try to per- form maintenance on or around the air bag sensors. Have the vehicle checked and repaired by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

(Continued)

(Continued) Problems may arise if the sen-

sor installation angles are changed due to the deforma- tion of the front bumper, body or B and C pillars where side collision sensors are installed. Have the vehicle checked and repaired by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Your vehicle has been designed to absorb impact and deploy the air bag(s) in certain collisions. Installing bumper guards or replacing a bumper with non-genuine parts may adversely affect your vehicles collision and air bag deployment performance.

OBK039041

3 57

Safety features of your vehicle

Side impact and curtain air bags

Side impact and curtain air bags are generally designed to inflate in mod- erate to severe side collisions. The impact forces measured by the side impact sensors and SRS control module determine whether or not to inflate the side impact airbags. Although the front air bags (drivers and front passengers air bags) are designed to inflate only in frontal col- lisions, they also may inflate in other types of collisions if the front impact sensors detect a sufficient impact. Side impact and curtain air bags are designed to inflate only in side impact collisions, but they may inflate in other collisions if the side impact sensors detect a sufficient impact. If the vehicle chassis is impacted by bumps or objects on unimproved roads, the air bags may deploy. Drive carefully on unimproved roads or on surfaces not designed for vehicle traffic to prevent unintended air bag deployment.

Air bag non-inflation conditions In certain low-speed collisions the

air bags may not deploy. The air bags are designed not to deploy in such cases because they may not provide occupants protection beyond the protection of the seat belts in such collisions.

OBK039043

OBK032045L

OBK039040

OBK039038

Safety features of your vehicle

583

Frontal air bags are not designed to inflate in rear collisions, because occupants are moved backward by the force of the impact. In this case, inflated air bags would not to provide additional occupant pro- tection.

Front air bags are not designed to inflate in side impact collisions, because frontal air bag deploy- ment would not provide additional occupant protection.

In an angular collision, the force of impact may direct the occupants in a direction where the air bags would not provide additional occu- pant protection, and thus the sen- sors may not deploy any air bags.

OBK039046OBK032045LOBK039044

3 59

Safety features of your vehicle

Frontal airbags may not inflate in "under-ride" collisions where the collision energy is absorbed above the vehicle's front bumper.

Side impact and curtain air bags may not inflate in a rollover acci- dent unless the side of the vehicle is struck with sufficient force to cause air bag inflation to occur.

Air bags may not inflate if the vehi- cle collides with objects such as a utility pole or tree, where the point of impact is concentrated and the collision energy is absorbed by the vehicle structure.

OBK039047 OBK039050 OBK032049L

Safety features of your vehicle

603

SRS Care The SRS is virtually maintenance- free and there are no parts you can safely service by yourself. If the SRS air bag warning light " " does not illuminate, when you turn the ignition on, or continuously remains on, have your vehicle immediately inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Any work on the SRS system, such as removing, installing, repairing, or any work on the steering wheel, the front passenger's panel, front seats and roof rails must be performed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. Improper handling of the SRS sys- tem may result in serious personal injury.

WARNING Modification to SRS compo-

nents or wiring, including the addition of any kind of badges to the pad covers or modifica- tions to the body structure, can adversely affect SRS per- formance and lead to possible injury.

For cleaning the air bag pad covers, use only a soft, dry cloth or one which has been moistened with plain water. Solvents or cleaners could adversely affect the air bag covers and proper deploy- ment of the system.

No objects should be placed over or near the air bag mod- ules on the steering wheel, instrument panel, and the front passenger's panel above the glove box, because any such object could cause harm if the vehicle is in a crash severe enough to cause the air bags to inflate.

(Continued)

(Continued) If the air bags inflate, they

must be replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Do not tamper with or discon- nect SRS wiring, or other components of the SRS sys- tem. Doing so could result in injury, due to accidental infla- tion of the air bags or by ren- dering the SRS inoperative.

If components of the air bag system must be discarded, or if the vehicle must be scrapped, certain safety pre- cautions must be observed. An authorized HYUNDAI deal- er knows these precautions and can give you the neces- sary information. Failure to follow these precautions and procedures could increase the risk of personal injury.

If your car was flooded and has soaked carpeting or water on the flooring, you shouldn't try to start the engine; have the car towed to an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

3 61

Safety features of your vehicle

Additional safety precautions Never let passengers ride in the

cargo area or on top of a folded- down back seat. All occupants should sit upright, fully back in their seats with their seat belts on and their feet on the floor.

Passengers should not move out of or change seats while the vehicle is moving. A passenger who is not wearing a seat belt dur- ing a crash or emergency stop can be thrown against the inside of the vehicle, against other occupants, or out of the vehicle.

Each seat belt is designed to restrain one occupant. If more than one person uses the same seat belt, they could be seriously injured or killed in a collision.

Do not use any accessories on seat belts. Devices claiming to improve occupant comfort or repo- sition the seat belt can reduce the protection provided by the seat belt and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.

Passengers should not place hard or sharp objects between themselves and the air bags. Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap or in your mouth can result in injuries if an air bag inflates.

Keep occupants away from the air bag covers. All occupants should sit upright, fully back in their seats with their seat belts on and their feet on the floor. If occupants are too close to the air bag covers, they could be injured if the air bags inflate.

Do not attach or place objects on or near the air bag covers. Any object attached to or placed on the front or side air bag covers could interfere with the proper operation of the air bags.

Do not modify the front seats. Modification of the front seats could interfere with the operation of the supplemental restraint system sensing components or side air bags.

Do not place items under the front seats. Placing items under the front seats could interfere with the operation of the supplemental restraint system sensing compo- nents and wiring harnesses.

Never hold an infant or child on your lap. The infant or child could be seriously injured or killed in the event of a crash. All infants and chil- dren should be properly restrained in appropriate child safety seats or seat belts in the rear seat.

Safety features of your vehicle

623

Adding equipment to or modifying your air bag-equipped vehicle If you modify your vehicle by chang- ing your vehicle's frame, bumper sys- tem, front end or side sheet metal or ride height, this may affect the oper- ation of your vehicle's air bag sys- tem.

WARNING Sitting improperly or out of

position can cause occupants to be shifted too close to a deploying air bag, strike the interior structure or be thrown from the vehicle resulting in serious injury or death.

Always sit upright with the seatback in an upright posi- tion, centered on the seat cushion with your seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and your feet on the floor.

3 63

Safety features of your vehicle

OBK032027L/OBK039029

Air bag warning labels Air bag warning labels, some required by the U.S. National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), are attached to alert the driver and passengers of potential risks of the air bag system.

(if equipped)

(if equipped)

Features of your vehicle

Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Key operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Smart key functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Smart key precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Door lock/unlock in an emergency situation . . . . . . . 4-10

Remote keyless entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 Remote keyless entry system operations . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 Transmitter precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

Theft-alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 Door locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

Outside the vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 Speed sensing door lock system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26

Fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30 Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33

Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33 Tilt and telescope steering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35 Inside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35 Outside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44

Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45 Instrument panel illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47 Gauges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47 LCD display

- Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50 - User settings mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54 - LCD display warnings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57

Instrument cluster warning and indicators . . . . . . 4-62 Multi gauge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72 Rear parking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75 Parking assist system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78 Rear camera display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82 Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83

4

Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84 Battery saver function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84 Headlight (Headlamp) escort function . . . . . . . . . . 4-84 Headlight (Headlamp) welcome function . . . . . . . . 4-84 Daytime running light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85 Lighting control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85 High beam operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87 Turn signals and lane change signals . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87 Front fog light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88

Wipers and washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89 Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91

Map lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91 Trunk room lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92 Glove box lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92 Vanity mirror lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92

Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93 Manual climate control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94 Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104 Windshield defrosting and defogging . . . . . . . . . 4-116 Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122

Center console storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122 Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122 Sunglass holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123

Interior features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124 Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124 Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124 Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125 Sunvisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125 Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126 Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127 Outside thermometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127 Floor mat anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128 Luggage net (holder) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128 Aux, USB and iPod port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129

Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130 Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130 Steering wheel audio control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131 Audio system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138 Bluetooth wireless technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-159

4

Features of your vehicle

4 3

Features of your vehicle

Record your key number The key code number is stamped on the key code tag attached to the key set. Should you lose your keys, this number will enable an authorized HYUNDAI dealer to duplicate the keys easily. Remove the key code tag and store it in a safe place. Also, record the key code number and keep it in a safe place (not in the vehicle).

Key operations Used only to start the engine and lock and unlock the door.

KEYS

WARNING - Ignition key (Smart key)

Leaving children unattended in a vehicle with the ignition key (smart key) is dangerous even if the key is not in the ignition switch or the ENGINE START/STOP button is ACC or ON position. Children copy adults and they could place the key in the ignition switch or press the ENGINE START/STOP button. The ignition key (smart key) would enable children to operate power windows or other controls, or even make the vehicle move, which could result in serious bodily injury or even death. Never leave the keys in your vehicle with unsu- pervised children, when the Engine is running.

WARNING Use only HYUNDAI original parts for the ignition key in your vehicle. If an aftermarket key is used, the ignition switch may not return to ON after START. If this happens, the starter will continue to operate causing damage to the starter motor and possible fire due to exces- sive current in the wiring.OBK049113N

Features of your vehicle

44

Immobilizer system (if equipped) Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic engine immobilizer system to reduce the risk of unauthorized vehicle use. Your immobilizer system is com- prised of a small transponder in the ignition key and electronic devices inside the vehicle. With the immobilizer system, when- ever you insert your ignition key into the ignition switch and turn it to ON, it checks and determines and verifies that the ignition key is valid. If the key is determined to be valid, the engine will start.

If the key is determined to be invalid, the engine will not start.

To deactivate the immobilizer system: Insert the ignition key into the key cylinder and turn it to the ON position.

To activate the immobilizer sys- tem: Turn the ignition key to the OFF posi- tion. The immobilizer system acti- vates automatically. Without a valid ignition key for your vehicle, the engine will not start.

NOTICE When starting the engine, do not use the key with other immobilizer keys around. Otherwise the engine may not start or may stop soon after it starts. Keep each key separate in order to avoid a starting malfunc- tion.

NOTICE If you need additional keys or lose your keys, consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING In order to prevent theft of your vehicle, do not leave spare keys anywhere in your vehicle. Your Immobilizer password is a cus- tomer unique password and should be kept confidential. Do not leave this number anywhere in your vehicle.

OHD046100

CAUTION Do not put metal accessories near the ignition switch. Metal accessories may interrupt the transponder signal and may prevent the engine from being started.

4 5

Features of your vehicle

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harm-

ful interference, and 2. This device must accept any inter-

ference received, including inter- ference that may cause undesired operation.

CAUTION The transponder in your ignition key is an important part of the immobilizer system. It is designed to give years of trou- ble-free service, however you should avoid exposure to mois- ture, static electricity and rough handling. Immobilizer system malfunction could occur.

CAUTION Do not change, alter or adjust the immobilizer system because it could cause the immobilizer system to malfunction and should only be serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. Malfunctions caused by improp- er alterations, adjustments or modifications to the immobilizer system are not covered by your vehicle manufacturer warranty.

WARNING Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. If the keyless entry system is inoper- ative due to changes or modifi- cations not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance, it will not be cov- ered by your manufacturers vehicle warranty.

Features of your vehicle

64

SMART KEY (IF EQUIPPED)

With a smart key, you can lock or unlock a door and even start the engine without inserting the key. The functions of the buttons on a smart key are similar to the remote keyless entry. (Refer to the Remote keyless entry in this section.)

Smart key functions With the smart key, you can lock and unlock the vehicle doors, and the smart key enables starting of the engine as well. Detailed information follows:

Locking Pressing the button of the outside door handles with all doors closed and any door unlocked, locks all the doors. The hazard warning lights blink and the chime sounds once to indicate that all doors are locked.The button will only operate when the smart key is within 28~40 in. (0.7~1 m) from the outside door handle. If you want to make sure that a door has locked or not, you should check the door lock button inside the vehi- cle or pull the outside door handle.

Even though you press the outside door handle buttons, the doors will not lock and the chime will sound for 3 seconds if any of following occur: The smart key is in the vehicle. The ignition switch is in ACC or ON

position. Any door except the trunk is open.

OYF049211 OBK049002

4 7

Features of your vehicle

Unlocking Pressing the button of the drivers outside door handle with all doors closed and locked, unlocks the dri- vers door. The hazard warning lights blink and the chime sounds twice to indicate that the drivers door is unlocked. All doors are unlocked if the button is pressed once more within 4 seconds. The hazard warn- ing lights will blink and the chime will sound twice to indicate that all doors are unlocked. Pressing the button of the front pas- sengers outside door handle with all doors closed and locked, unlocks all doors. The hazard warning lights blink and the chime sounds once to indicate that all doors are unlocked. The button will only operate when the smart key is within 28~40 in. (0.7~1 m) from the outside door han- dle. When the smart key is recognized in the area of 28~40 in. (0.7~1 m) from the front outside door handle, other people can also open the doors with- out possession of the smart key.

Start-up You can start the engine without inserting the key. For detailed infor- mation refer to the Engine start/stop button in section 5.

Smart key precautions NOTICE If, for some reason, you happen to

lose your smart key, you will not be able to start the engine. Tow the vehicle, if necessary, and con- tact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

A maximum of 2 smart keys can be registered to a single vehicle. If you lose a smart key, you should immediately take the vehicle and key to your authorized HYUNDAI dealer to protect it from potential theft.

The smart key will not work if any of following occur: - The smart key is close to a radio

transmitter such as a radio sta- tion or an airport which can interfere with normal operation of the smart key.

- You keep the smart key near a mobile two-way radio system or a cellular phone.

- Another vehicles smart key is being operated close to your vehicle.

(Continued)

Features of your vehicle

84

(Continued) When the smart key does not work correctly, open and close the door with the mechanical key. If you have a problem with the smart key, contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

If the smart key is in close proxim- ity to your cell phone or smart phone, the signal from the smart key could be blocked by normal operation of your cell phone or smart phone. This is especially important when the phone is active such as making call, receiving calls, text messaging, and/or send- ing/receiving emails. Avoid placing the smart key and your cell phone or smart phone in the same pants or jacket pocket and maintain ade- quate distance between the two devices.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harm-

ful interference, and 2. This device must accept any inter-

ference received, including inter- ference that may cause undesired operation.

Battery replacement A smart key battery should last for several years, but if the smart key is not working properly, try replacing the battery with a new one. If you are unsure how to use your smart key or replace the battery, contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

CAUTION Keep the smart key away from water or any liquid. If the keyless entry system is inoperative due to exposure to water or liquids, it will not be covered by your man- ufacturers vehicle warranty.

CAUTION Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. If the keyless entry system is inopera- tive due to changes or modifica- tions not expressly approved by the party responsible for com- pliance, it will not be covered by your manufacturers vehicle warranty.

4 9

Features of your vehicle

1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and gently pry open the cover.

2. Replace the battery with a new battery (CR2032). When replacing the battery, make sure the battery position.

3. Install the battery in the reverse order of removal.

The smart key is designed to give you years of trouble-free use, how- ever it can malfunction if exposed to moisture or static electricity. If you are unsure how to use or replace the battery, contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Using the wrong battery can cause the smart key to malfunction. Be sure to use the correct battery.

If you suspect that your smart key might have sustained some dam- age, or you feel your smart key is not working correctly, contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

An inappropriately disposed bat- tery can be harmful to the environ- ment and human health. Dispose the battery according to your local law(s) or regulation.

OHG040009OHG041215A

Front Cover

Battery

Rear Cover

CAUTION - Smart key damage

Do not drop, get wet or expose the smart key to heat or sun- light, or it will be damaged.

Features of your vehicle

104

NOTICE Using the wrong battery can cause

the smart key to malfunction. Be sure to use the correct battery.

Circuits inside the smart key may develop problems when dropped, exposed to moisture or static elec- tricity.

If you suspect that your smart key might have sustained some dam- age, or you feel your smart key is not working correctly, contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Door lock/unlock in an emer- gency situation If the smart key does not operate normally, you can lock or unlock the doors by using the mechanical key. 1.Depress and hold the release but-

ton (1) and remove the mechanical key (2). To reinstall the mechanical key, put the key into the hole and push it until a click sound is heard.

2. Turn the key toward the rear of the vehicle to unlock and toward the front of the vehicle to lock.

OYF049212 OBK049003

WARNING An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environment and human health. Dispose the battery according to your local law(s) or regulation.

4 11

Features of your vehicle

Remote keyless entry system operations Lock (1) All doors are locked if the lock button is pressed. If all doors are closed, the hazard warning lights blink (and the chime sounds (if equipped)) once to indi- cate that all doors are locked.

However, if any door (or trunk) remains open, the hazard warning lights (and the chime (if equipped)) will not operate. If all doors (and trunk) are closed after the lock button is pressed, the hazard warning lights blink.

Unlock (2) The driver's door is unlocked if the unlock button is pressed once. The hazard warning lights will blink (and the chime sounds (if equipped)) twice to indicate that the driver's door is unlocked. All doors are unlocked if the unlock button is pressed once more within 4 seconds. The hazard warning lights will blink (and the chime will sound (if equipped)) twice again to indicate that all doors are unlocked. After depressing this button, the doors will be locked automatically unless you open any door within 30 seconds.

NOTICE You can change the system to unlock all doors by one pressing the unlock button (Central Door Unlock Mode). Unlock mode can be switched between Two Stage Unlock Mode and Central Door Unlock Mode as follows: Press the lock button (1) and unlock button (2) at the same time for 5 sec- onds or more. The hazard warning lights will blink four times.

Trunk unlock (3) The trunk is unlocked if the button is pressed for more than 1 second. Also, once the trunk is opened and then closed, the trunk will be locked automatically.

Panic (4) The horn sounds and hazard warn- ing lights flash for about 30 seconds if this button is pressed for more than 0.5 second. To stop the horn and lights, press any button on the trans- mitter (or the smart key).

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY

OBK049114N

OYF049213

Type A

Type B

Features of your vehicle

124

Transmitter precautions NOTICE The transmitter will not work if any of the following occur: The ignition key is in ignition

switch. You exceed the operating distance

limit (about 90 feet [30 m]). The battery in the transmitter is

weak. Other vehicles or objects may be

blocking the signal. The weather is extremely cold. The transmitter is close to a radio

transmitter such as a radio station or an airport which can interfere with normal operation of the transmitter.

When the transmitter does not work correctly, open and close the door with the ignition key. If you have a problem with the transmitter, contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

(Continued)

(Continued) If the transmitter is in close prox-

imity to your cell phone or smart phone, the signal from the trans- mitter could be blocked by normal operation of your cell phone or smart phone. This is especially important when the phone is active such as making call, receiving calls, text messaging, and/or send- ing/receiving emails. Avoid placing the transmitter and your cell phone or smart phone in the same pants or jacket pocket and main- tain adequate distance between the two devices.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harm-

ful interference, and 2. This device must accept any inter-

ference received, including inter- ference that may cause undesired operation.

CAUTION Keep the transmitter away from water or any liquid. If the key- less entry system is inoperative due to exposure to water or liq- uids, it will not be covered by your manufacturers vehicle warranty.

CAUTION Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. If the keyless entry system is inopera- tive due to changes or modifica- tions not expressly approved by the party responsible for com- pliance, it will not be covered by your manufacturers vehicle warranty.

4 13

Features of your vehicle

Battery replacement The transmitter uses a 3 volt lithium battery which will normally last for several years. When replacement is necessary, use the following proce- dure. 1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and

gently pry open the transmitter center cover.

2. Replace the battery with a new battery (CR2032). When replacing the battery, make sure the battery position.

3. Install the battery in the reverse order of removal.

For replacement transmitters, see an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for transmitter reprogramming.

CAUTION The keyless entry system

transmitter is designed to give you years of trouble-free use, however it can malfunction if exposed to moisture or static electricity. If you are unsure how to use your transmitter or replace the battery, contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Using the wrong battery can cause the transmitter to mal- function. Be sure to use the correct battery.

To avoid damaging the trans- mitter, don't drop it, get it wet, or expose it to heat or sunlight.

WARNING An inappropriately disposed bat- tery can be harmful to the envi- ronment and human health. Dispose the battery according to your local law(s) or regulation.

ONF048120 HNF2005

Features of your vehicle

144

This system is designed to provide protection from unauthorized entry into the car. This system is operated in three stages: the first is the "Armed" stage, the second is the "Theft-alarm" stage, and the third is the "Disarmed" stage. If triggered, the system provides an audible alarm with blinking of the hazard warning lights.

Armed stage Park the car and stop the engine. Arm the system as described below. 1. Remove the ignition key from the

ignition switch or turn off the engine.

2. Make sure that all doors, the engine hood and trunk lid are closed and latched.

3. Lock the doors by depressing the door lock button on the transmit- ter (or smart key). After completion of the steps above, the hazard warning lights will blink once to indicate that the system is armed. If any door, trunk lid or engine hood remains open, the hazard warning lights wont operate and theft-alarm will not arm. After this, if all doors, trunk lid and engine hood are closed, the hazard warning lights blink once.

Lock the doors by pressing the button in the front outside door handles with the smart key in your possession. After completion of the steps above, the hazard warning lights will blink once to indicate that the system is armed. If any door, trunk lid or engine hood remains open, the hazard warning lights wont operate and theft-alarm will not arm. To arm the system close all the doors, trunk lid and engine hood, and try again to lock the doors.

Do not arm the system until all passengers have left the vehicle. If the system is armed while a pas- senger(s) remains in the vehicle, the alarm may be activated when the remaining passenger(s) leave the vehicle. If any door (or trunk) or engine hood is opened within 30 seconds after the system enters the armed stage, the sys- tem is disarmed to prevent an unnecessary alarm.

THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM

Armed

stage

Theft-alarm

stage

Disarmed

stage

4 15

Features of your vehicle

Theft-alarm stage The alarm will be activated if any of the following occurs while the system is armed. A door is opened without using the

transmitter (or smart key). The trunk is opened without using

the transmitter (or smart key). The engine hood is opened. The horn will sound and the hazard warning lights will blink continuously for approximately 30 seconds, and the alarm will repeat once more unless the system is disarmed. To turn off the system, unlock the doors with the ignition key or transmitter.

NOTICE If the trunk is opened by using the transmitter (or smart key), the alarm will not be activated, but doors, hood, and ignition switch keep arming condition. Once the trunk is opened and then closed, the trunk will be locked and armed automatically.

Disarmed stage The system will be disarmed when the doors are unlocked with the transmitter (or smart key). After depressing the unlock button, the hazard warning lights will blink and the chime will sound twice to indicate that the system is disarmed. After depressing the unlock button, if any door is not opened within 30 seconds, the system will be rearmed.

NOTICE Avoid trying to start the engine

while the alarm is activated. The vehicle starter motor is disabled during the theft-alarm stage. If the system is not disarmed with the transmitter, insert the key into the ignition switch, turn the igni- tion switch to the ON position and wait for 30 seconds. Then the sys- tem will be disarmed. (if equipped)

If you lose your keys, consult your authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

CAUTION Do not change, alter or adjust the theft-alarm system because it could cause the theft-alarm system to malfunction. The sys- tem should only be serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. Malfunctions caused by improp- er alterations, adjustments or modifications to the theft-alarm system are not covered by your vehicle manufacturer warranty.

Features of your vehicle

164

Security indicator (if equipped) When you arm the system, the secu- rity indicator (1) turns on for about 30 seconds. After then, the security indi- cator blinks continuously. When you disarm the system and turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position, the security indicator turns off. Operating door locks from

outside the vehicle Turn the key toward the rear of the

vehicle to unlock and toward the front of the vehicle to lock.

If you lock the door with a key, all vehicle doors will lock automatically.

From the drivers door, turn the key to the right once to unlock the dri- vers door and once more within 4 seconds to unlock all doors.

Doors can also be locked and unlocked with the transmitter (or smart key).

If the smart key does not operate normally, you can lock or unlock the door by using the mechanical key. Depress and hold the release button(1) and remove the mechan- ical key(2).

Once the doors are unlocked, they may be opened by pulling the door handle.

When closing the door, push the door by hand. Make sure that doors are closed securely.

DOOR LOCKS

OBK049133N

OBK049003N

OYF049212

if equipped

Type A

Type B

Lock

Lock

Unlock

Unlock

4 17

Features of your vehicle

NOTICE In cold and wet climates, door

locks and door mechanisms may not work properly due to freezing conditions.

If the door is locked/unlocked multiple times in rapid succession with either the vehicle key or door lock switch, the system may stop operating temporarily in order to protect the circuit and prevent damage to system components.

If you open the door when the win- dow is closed completely, the win- dow will go down slightly. If you close the door when the window is closed completely, the window will go up slightly. It is to reduce the airflow noise and prevent water leakage by clos- ing the door completely. Mechanical noise may be heard when you close and open the door, but this condition is normal.

To lock a door without the key, push the inside door lock button (1) or central door lock switch (2) to the Lock position and close the door (3).

If you lock the door with the central door lock switch (2), all vehicle doors will lock automatically.

NOTICE Always remove the ignition key, firm- ly engage the parking brake, close all windows and lock all doors when leaving your vehicle unattended.

OBK042004

WARNING If you don't close the door

securely, the door may open again.

Be careful that someone's body and hands are not trapped when closing the door.

Features of your vehicle

184

Operating door locks from inside the vehicle With the door lock button To unlock a door, push the door

lock button (1) to the Unlock posi- tion. The red mark (2) on the door lock button will be visible.

To lock a door, push the door lock button (1) to the Lock position. If the door is locked properly, the red mark (2) on the door lock button will not be visible.

To open a door, pull the door han- dle (3) outward.

If the inner door handle of the dri- vers (or front passengers) door is pulled when the door lock button is in lock position, the button is unlocked and door opens.

Doors cannot be locked if the igni- tion key is in the ignition switch (or if the smart key is in the vehicle) and any door is open.

With central door lock switch Operate by depressing the central door lock switch. When pushing down on the right

portion (1) of the switch for the driver or the left portion (3) of the switch for the front passenger, all vehicle doors will lock.

OBK049005

Lock Unlock

WARNING - Door lock malfunction

If a power door lock ever fails to function while you are in the vehicle, try one or more of the following techniques to exit: Operate the door unlock fea-

ture repeatedly (both electron- ic and manual) while simulta- neously pulling on the door handle.

Operate the other door locks and handles.

Lower a front window and use the key to unlock the door from outside.

OBK049006N

Drivers door

OBK049136N

Passengers door

4 19

Features of your vehicle

When pushing down on the left portion (2) of the switch for the driver or the right portion (4) of the switch for the front passenger, all vehicle doors will unlock.

If the key is in the ignition switch or the smart key is in the vehicle, and any door is open, the doors will not lock when the central door lock switch is pressed.

Speed sensing door lock sys- tem (if equipped) Type A All doors will be automatically locked when the vehicle speed exceeds 24 mph.

Type B All doors will be automatically locked when the vehicle speed exceeds 9 mph.

And all doors will be automatically unlocked after you turn the engine off or when you remove the ignition key. (if equipped)

NOTICE An authorized HYUNDAI dealer can change the speed of the speed sensing door lock system from approximately 12 mph to approxi- mately 25 mph or disable the sys- tem.

WARNING - Unlocked vehicles

Leaving your vehicle unlocked can invite theft or possible harm to you or others from someone hiding in your vehicle while you are gone. Always remove the ignition key, engage the parking brake, close all windows and lock all doors when leaving your vehicle unattended.

WARNING - Unattended children

An enclosed vehicle can become extremely hot, causing death or severe injury to unat- tended children or animals who cannot escape the vehicle. Furthermore, children might operate features of the vehicle that could injure them, or they could encounter other harm, possibly from someone gaining entry to the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in your vehicle.

WARNING - Doors The doors should always be

fully closed and locked while the vehicle is in motion to pre- vent accidental opening of the door. Locked doors will also discourage potential intruders when the vehicle stops or slows.

Be careful when opening doors and watch for vehicles, motorcycles, bicycles or pedestrians approaching the vehicle in the path of the door. Opening a door when some- thing is approaching can cause damage or injury.

Features of your vehicle

204

TRUNK

Opening the trunk To open the trunk, press the trunk

unlock button on the transmitter for more than 1 second (or smart key).

To open the trunk from inside the vehicle, pull the trunk lid release lever.

If the trunk is unlocked, it can be opened by pulling the trunk lid up.

Once the trunk is opened and then closed, the trunk is locked auto- matically.

NOTICE In cold and wet climates, door locks and door mechanisms may not work properly due to freezing conditions.

Closing the trunk To close the trunk, lower and push down the trunk lid, until it locks. To be sure the trunk lid is securely fastened, always check by trying to pull it up.

OBK049007

CAUTION Make certain that you close the trunk before driving your vehi- cle. Possible damage may occur to the trunk lift cylinders and attached hardware if the trunk is not closed prior to driving.

WARNING Make sure no objects or people are near the rear of the vehicle when opening the trunk.

WARNING The trunk lid should be always kept completely closed while the vehicle is in motion. If it is left open or ajar, poisonous exhaust gases may enter the car and serious illness or death may result.

4 21

Features of your vehicle

Emergency trunk safety release Your vehicle is equipped with an emergency trunk release cable locat- ed inside the trunk. The lever glows in the dark when the trunk lid is closed. If someone is inadvertently locked in the trunk, pulling this han- dle will release the trunk latch mech- anism and open the trunk.

OBK042008

WARNING No one should be allowed to

occupy the trunk of the vehi- cle at any time. If the trunk is partially or totally latched and the person is unable to get out, severe injury or death could occur due to lack of ventilation, exhaust fumes and rapid heat build-up, or because of exposure to cold weather conditions. The trunk is also a highly dangerous location in the event of a crash because it is not a pro- tected occupant space but is a part of the vehicles crush zone.

Your vehicle should be kept locked and keys be kept out of the reach of children. Parents should teach their children about the dangers of playing in trunks.

Features of your vehicle

224

(1) Drivers door power window switch (2) Front passengers door power

window switch (3) Window opening and closing (4) Automatic power window

up/down

NOTICE In cold and wet climates, power win- dows may not work properly due to freezing conditions.

WINDOWS

OBK049009N

4 23

Features of your vehicle

Power windows The ignition switch must be in the ON position for power windows to oper- ate. Each door has a power window switch that controls the door's win- dow. The power windows can be operated for approximately 30 sec- onds after the ignition key is removed or turned to the ACC or LOCK posi- tion. However, if the doors open, the power windows cannot be operated within the 30 second period after ignition key is removed or turned to the ACC or LOCK position.

NOTICE While driving with the sunroof in an open (or partially open) position, your vehicle may demonstrate a wind buffeting or pulsation noise. This noise is a normal occurrence and can be reduced or eliminated by slightly reducing the size of the sun- roof opening.

Window opening and closing The drivers door has a master power window switch that controls all the windows in the vehicle. To open or close a window, press down or pull up the front portion of the corresponding switch to the first detent position (3).

Auto up/down window (if equipped) Depressing or pulling up the power window switch momentarily to the second detent position (4) complete- ly lowers or lifts the window even when the switch is released. To stop the window at the desired position while the window is in operation, momentarily pull the switch in the direction opposite of the windows movement.OBK049138N

Features of your vehicle

244

If the power window is not operated correctly, the automatic power win- dow system must be reset as follows: 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON

position. 2. Open the window fully by manual

down(press the front portion of the switch to the first detent position.).

3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and to the ON position again within 2 seconds.

4. Press the front portion of the switch 3 times within 5 seconds.

5. Close the window and continue pulling up on the power window switch for at least 1 second after the window is completely closed.

Automatic reversal

If the upward movement of the window is blocked by an object or part of the body, the window will detect the resist- ance and will stop upward movement. The window will then lower approxi- mately 11.8 in. (30 cm) to allow the object to be cleared. If the window detects the resistance while the power window switch is pulled up continuously, the window will stop upward movement then lower approximately 1 in. (2.5 cm). And if the power window switch is pulled up con- tinuously again within 5 seconds after the window is lowered by the automat- ic window reversal feature, the auto- matic window reversal will not operate.

NOTICE The automatic reverse feature for the drivers and front passengers windows are only active when the auto up feature is used by fully pulling up the switch. The automat- ic reverse feature will not operate if the window is raised using the halfway position on the power win- dow switch.

WARNING Always check for obstructions before raising any window to avoid injuries or vehicle damage. If an object less than 0.16 in. (4 mm) in diameter is caught between the window glass and the upper window channel, the automatic reverse window may not detect the resistance and will not stop and reverse direction.

OBK049095

4 25

Features of your vehicle

CAUTION To prevent possible damage

to the power window system, do not open or close two win- dows or more at the same time. This will also ensure the longevity of the fuse.

Never try to operate the main switch on the driver's door and the individual door win- dow switch in opposing direc- tions at the same time. If this is done, the window will stop and cannot be opened or closed.

WARNING - Windows Never leave the keys in your

vehicle with unsupervised children, when the Engine is running.

NEVER leave any child unat- tended in the vehicle. Even very young children may inad- vertently cause the vehicle to move, entangle themselves in the windows, or otherwise injure themselves or others.

Always double check to make sure all arms, hands, head and other obstructions are safely out of the way before closing a window.

Do not allow children to play with the power windows. Keep the drivers door power win- dow lock switch in the LOCK position (depressed). Serious injury can result from uninten- tional window operation by the child.

Do not extend a face or arms outside through the window opening while driving.

Features of your vehicle

264

Opening the hood 1. Pull the release lever to unlatch

the hood. The hood should pop open slightly.

2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise the hood slightly, push the second- ary latch (1) inside of the hood center and lift the hood (2).

3. Raise the hood. It will raise com- pletely by itself after it has been raised about halfway.

Closing the hood 1. Before closing the hood, check the

following: All filler caps in engine compart-

ment must be correctly installed. Gloves, rags or any other com-

bustible material must be removed from the engine com- partment.

2. Lower the hood halfway and push down to securely lock in place.

HOOD

WARNING Before closing the hood,

ensure that all obstructions are removed from the hood open- ing. Closing the hood with an obstruction present in the hood opening may result in property damage or severe personal injury.

Do not leave gloves, rags or any other combustible material in the engine compartment. Doing so may cause a heat- induced fire.

Always double check to be sure that the hood is firmly latched before driving away. If it is not latched, the hood could open while the vehicle is being driven, causing a total loss of visibility, which might result in an accident.

Do not move the vehicle with the hood in the raised position, as vision is obstructed and the hood could fall or be damaged.

OBK049010 OBK042011L

WARNING Open the hood after turning off the engine on a flat surface, shifting the shift lever to the P(Park) position for automatic transmission and R(Reverse) for manual transmission, and setting the parking brake.

4 27

Features of your vehicle

Opening the fuel filler door The fuel filler door must be opened from inside the vehicle by pushing the fuel filler door opener button located on the drivers door.

NOTICE If the fuel filler door will not open because ice has formed around it, tap lightly or push on the door to break the ice and release the door. Do not pry on the door. If necessary, spray around the door with an approved de-icer fluid (do not use radiator anti-freeze) or move the vehicle to a warm place and allow the ice to melt.

1. Stop the engine. 2. To open the fuel filler door, push

the fuel filler door opener button. 3. Pull the fuel filler door (1) out to

fully open. 4. To remove the cap, turn the fuel

tank cap (2) counterclockwise. 5. Refuel as needed.

Closing the fuel filler door 1. To install the cap, turn it clockwise

until it clicks once. This indicates that the cap is securely tightened.

2. Close the fuel filler door and push it lightly making sure that it is securely closed.

FUEL FILLER DOOR

WARNING - Refueling If pressurized fuel sprays out, it

can cover your clothes or skin and thus subject you to the risk of fire and burns. Always remove the fuel cap carefully and slowly. If the cap is venting fuel or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until the condition stops before completely removing the cap.

Do not "top off" after the nozzle automatically shuts off when refueling.

Tighten the cap until it clicks once, otherwise the Malfunction Indicator Light will illumi- nate.

Always check that the fuel cap is installed securely to prevent fuel spillage in the event of an accident.

OBK049012 OBK049013

Features of your vehicle

284

(Continued) When using an approved

portable fuel container, be sure to place the container on the ground prior to refueling. Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite fuel vapors causing a fire. Once refueling has begun, contact with the vehicle should be maintained until the filling is complete. Use only approved portable plastic fuel containers designed to carry and store gasoline.

Do not use cellular phones while refueling. Electric cur- rent and/or electronic interfer- ence from cellular phones can potentially ignite fuel vapors causing a fire.

(Continued)

(Continued) Do not get back into a vehicle

once you have begun refueling since you can generate static electricity by touching, rubbing or sliding against any item or fabric (polyester, satin, nylon, etc.) capable of producing stat- ic electricity. Static electricity discharge can ignite fuel vapors resulting in rapid burn- ing. If you must re-enter the vehicle, you should once again eliminate potentially dangerous static electricity discharge by touching a metal part of the vehicle, away from the fuel filler neck, nozzle or other gasoline source.

(Continued)

WARNING - Refueling dangers

Automotive fuels are flammable materials. When refueling, please note the following guide- lines carefully. Failure to follow these guidelines may result in severe personal injury, severe burns or death by fire or explo- sion. Read and follow all warnings

posted at the gas station facil- ity.

Before refueling, note the location of the Emergency Gasoline Shut-Off, if available, at the gas station facility.

Before touching the fuel noz- zle, you should eliminate potentially dangerous static electricity discharge by touch- ing another metal part of the vehicle, a safe distance away from the fuel filler neck, noz- zle, or other gas source.

(Continued)

4 29

Features of your vehicle

Emergency fuel filler lid release If the fuel filler lid does not open, use the fuel filler lid release located in the left trunk side wall. Pull on the release to manually release the fuel filler lid.

(Continued) When refueling, always shut

the engine off. Sparks pro- duced by electrical compo- nents related to the engine can ignite fuel vapors causing a fire. Once refueling is com- plete, check to make sure the filler cap and filler door are securely closed, before start- ing the engine.

DO NOT use matches or a lighter and DO NOT SMOKE or leave a lit cigarette in your vehicle while at a gas station especially during refueling. Automotive fuel is highly flammable and can, when ignited, result in fire.

If a fire breaks out during refu- eling, leave the vicinity of the vehicle, and immediately con- tact the manager of the gas station and then contact the local fire department or 911. Follow any safety instructions they provide.

CAUTION Make sure to refuel your vehi-

cle according to the Fuel requirements suggested in section 1.

If the fuel filler cap requires replacement, use only a gen- uine HYUNDAI cap or the equivalent specified for your vehicle. An incorrect fuel filler cap can result in a serious malfunction of the fuel system or emission control system.

Do not spill fuel on the exteri- or surfaces of the vehicle. Any type of fuel spilled on painted surfaces may damage the paint.

After refueling, make sure the fuel cap is installed securely to prevent fuel spillage in the event of an accident.

CAUTION Do not pull the handle exces- sively, otherwise the luggage area trim or release handle may be damaged.

OBK042014

Features of your vehicle

304

If your vehicle is equipped with a sunroof, you can slide or tilt your sunroof with the sunroof control lever located on the overhead console.

The sunroof can only be opened, closed, or tilted when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

NOTICE In cold and wet climates, the sun-

roof may not work properly due to freezing conditions.

After washing the car or after there is rain, be sure to wipe off any water that is on the sunroof before operating it.

NOTICE The sunroof cannot slide when it is in the tilt position nor can it be tilted while in an open or slide position. Sunroof open warning

(if equipped) If the driver removes the ignition key (smart key: turns off the engine) and opens the driver-side door when the sunroof is not fully closed, the warning chime will sound for a few seconds and a message "Sunroof Open" will appear on the LCD display. Close the sunroof securely when leaving your vehicle.

SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)

OBK049015N

CAUTION Do not continue to move the sunroof control lever after the sunroof is in the fully open, closed, or tilt position(s). Damage to the motor or system components could occur.

WARNING Never adjust the sunroof or sun- shade while driving. This could result in loss of control and an accident that may cause death, serious injury, or property dam- age.

OBK044280L

4 31

Features of your vehicle

Sliding the sunroof To open or close the sunroof (manual slide feature), pull or push the sunroof control lever backward or forward to the first detent position. Pulling the control lever downward also closes the sunroof. To open or close the sunroof com- pletely even when the lever is released (auto slide feature), pull or push the sunroof control lever backward or for- ward to the second detent position. The sunroof will slide all the way open or closed. To stop the sunroof sliding at any point, pull or push the sunroof control lever momentarily in the oppo- site direction of sunroof movement.

Automatic reversal If an object is detected while the sun- roof is closing automatically, it will reverse direction, and then stop. The auto reverse function may not function if a small obstacle is between the sliding glass and the sunroof sash. You should always check that all passengers and objects are away from the sunroof before closing it.

Tilting the sunroof To open or close the sunroof, push or pull the sunroof control lever upward or downward until the sunroof moves to the desired position. Pushing the control lever forward also closes the sunroof.

OBK049018 OBK049017OBK049016

Features of your vehicle

324

Sunshade The sunshade will automatically open with the glass panel when the glass panel moves. Close it manually if you want it closed.

Resetting the sunroof Whenever the vehicle battery is dis- connected or discharged, you must reset your sunroof system as follows:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.

2. Close the sunroof completely. 3. Release the sunroof control

switch. 4. Pull and hold the sunroof control

switch downward until the sunroof has returned to the original posi- tion of tilt after it is raised a little higher than the maximum tilt posi- tion. Then, release the switch.

5. Pull and hold the sunroof control switch downward until the sunroof is operated as follows;

TILT DOWN SLIDE OPEN SLIDE CLOSE

Then, release the switch.

When this is complete, the sunroof system is reset.

CAUTION The sunroof is made to slide together with the sunshade. Do not leave the sunshade closed while the sunroof is open.

OBK049019

WARNING - Sunroof Be careful that no heads,

hands and body parts are obstructing a closing sunroof.

Do not extend the face, neck, arms or body outside the sun- roof while driving.

Make sure your hands and head are safely out of the way before closing a sunroof.

CAUTION Periodically remove any dirt

that may accumulate on the guide rail.

If you try to open the sunroof when the temperature is below freezing or when the sunroof is covered with snow or ice, the glass or the motor could be damaged.

While using sunroof for a long time, a dust between sunroof and roof panel can make a noise. Open the sunroof and regularly remove the dust using clean cloth.

4 33

Features of your vehicle

For more detailed information, contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Power steering Power steering uses energy from the engine to assist you in steering the vehicle. If the engine is off or if the power steering system becomes inoperative, the vehicle may still be steered, but it will require increased steering effort. Should you notice any change in the effort required to steer during normal vehicle operation, have the power steering checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

NOTICE If the power steering drive belt breaks or if the power steering pump malfunctions, the steering effort will greatly increase.

NOTICE If the vehicle is parked for extended periods outside in cold weather (below -14F/10C), the power steer- ing may require increased effort when the engine is first started. This is caused by increased fluid viscosity due to the cold weather and does not indicate a malfunction. When this happens, increase the engine RPM by depressing accelera- tor until the RPM reaches 1,500 rpm then release or let the engine idle for two or three minutes to warm up the fluid.

CAUTION Never hold the steering wheel against a stop (extreme right or left turn) for more than 5 sec- onds with the engine running. Holding the steering wheel for more than 5 seconds in either position may cause damage to the power steering pump.

CAUTION If the sunroof is not reset when the vehicle battery is discon- nected or discharged, or related fuse is blown, the sunroof may operate improperly.

STEERING WHEEL

Features of your vehicle

344

Tilt and telescope steering Tilt and telescope steering allows you to adjust the steering wheel posi- tion before you drive. You can also raise or pull it to give your legs more room when you exit and enter the vehicle.

The steering wheel should be posi- tioned so that it is comfortable for you to drive, while permitting you to see the instrument panel warning lights and gauges. To change the steering wheel angle,

pull down the lock release lever (1), adjust the steering wheel to the desired angle (2) and height (3), then pull up the lock-release lever to lock the steering wheel in place. Be sure to adjust the steering wheel to the desired position before driving.

Horn To sound the horn, press the horn symbol on your steering wheel. Check the horn regularly to be sure it operates properly.

NOTICE To sound the horn, press the area indicated by the horn symbol on your steering wheel (see illustra- tion). The horn will operate only when this area is pressed.

CAUTION Do not strike the horn severely to operate it, or hit it with your fist. Do not press on the horn with a sharp-pointed object.

OBK049021OBK042020

WARNING Never adjust the angle of the

steering wheel while driving. You may lose steering control and cause severe personal injury, death or accidents.

After adjusting, push the steering wheel both up and down to be certain it is locked in position.

4 35

Features of your vehicle

MIRRORS Inside rearview mirror Adjust the rearview mirror to center on the view through the rear window. Make this adjustment before you start driving.

Day/night rearview mirror Make this adjustment before you start driving and while the day/night lever is in the day position. Pull the day/night lever toward you to reduce glare from the headlights of the vehicles behind you during night driving. Remember that you lose some rearview clarity in the night position.

Electric chromic mirror (ECM) with HomeLink system and com- pass (if equipped) Your vehicle may be equipped with a Gentex Automatic-Dimming Mirror with a Z-Nav Electronic Compass Display and an Integrated HomeLink

Wireless Control System. During nighttime driving, this feature will automatically detect and reduce rearview mirror glare while the com- pass indicates the direction the vehi- cle is pointed. The HomeLink

Universal Transceiver allows you to activate your garage door(s), electric gate, home lighting, etc. HomeLink

HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson controls, Inc.

WARNING - Rear visibility Do not place objects in the rear seat or cargo area which would interfere with your vision through the rear window. OBK049115N

Day

Night

WARNING Do not modify the inside mirror and do not install a wide mirror. It could result in injury, during an accident or deployment of the air bag.

Features of your vehicle

364

(1) Telematics button (2) Telematics button (3) Telematics button (4) Compass control button &

Dimming ON/OFF button (5) Status indicator LED (6) Channel 1 button (7) Channel 2 button (8) Channel 3 button (9) Compass display (10) Rear light sensor

Automatic-Dimming Night Vision Safety (NVS) Mirror

The NVS Mirror in your vehicle is the most advanced way to reduce annoying glare in the rearview mirror during any driving situation. For more information regarding NVS mirrors and other applications, please refer to the Gentex website: www.gentex.com

NOTICE The NVS Mirror automatically reduces glare during driving condi- tions based upon light levels moni- tored in front of the vehicle and from the rear of the vehicle. These light sensors are visible through openings in the front and rear of the mirror case. Any object that obstructs either light sensor will degrade the automatic dimming control feature.

Automatic-dimming function Your mirror will automatically dim upon detecting glare from the vehi- cles traveling behind you. The auto- dimming function can be controlled by the Dimming ON/OFF button:

1. Pressing and holding the button for 3 seconds turns the autodim- ming function OFF which is indi- cated by the green Status Indicator LED turning off.

2. Pressing and holding the button for 3 seconds again turns the auto-dimming function ON which is indicated by the green Status Indicator LED turning on.

The mirror defaults to the ON posi- tion each time the vehicle is started.

Z-Nav Compass Display

The NVS Mirror in your vehicle is also equipped with a Z-Nav Compass that shows the vehicle Compass heading in the Display Window using the 8 basic cardinal headings (N, NE, E, SE, etc.).

OYF042250N

4 37

Features of your vehicle

Compass function The Compass can be turned ON and OFF and will remember the last state when the ignition is cycled. To turn the display feature ON/OFF: 1. Press and release the button

within 1 second to turn the display feature OFF.

2. Press and release the button again within 1 second to turn the display back ON.

Additional options can be set with press and hold sequences of the button and are detailed below.

There is a difference between mag- netic north and true north. The com- pass in the mirror can compensate for this difference when it knows the Magnetic Zone in which it is operat- ing. This is set either by the dealer or by the user. The operating Zone Numbers for North America are shown in the figure on the following section.

B520C05NF

Features of your vehicle

384

To adjust the Zone setting: 1. Determine the desired Zone

Number based upon your current location on the Zone Map.

2. Press and hold the button for 6 seconds, the current Zone Number will appear on the display.

3. Pressing and holding the button again will cause the numbers to increment (Note: they will repeat 13, 14, 15, 1, 2, ). Releasing the button when the desired Zone Number appears on the display will set the new Zone.

4. Within about 5 seconds the com- pass will start displaying a com- pass heading again.

There are some conditions that can cause changes to the vehicle mag- nets, such as installing a ski rack or a CB antenna. Body repair work on the vehicle can also cause changes to the vehicle's magnetic field. In these situations, the compass will need to be re-calibrated to quickly correct these changes. To re-cali- brate the compass:

1. Press and hold the button for more than 9 seconds. When the compass memory is cleared a "C" will appear in the display.

2. To calibrate the compass, drive the vehicle in 2 complete circles at less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

Integrated HomeLink Wireless Control System

The HomeLink Wireless Control System provides a convenient way to replace up to three hand-held radio- frequency (RF) transmitters with a single built-in device. This innovative feature will learn the radio frequency codes of most current transmitters to operate devices such as gate opera- tors, garage door openers, entry door locks, security systems, even home lighting. Both standard and rolling code-equipped transmitters can be programmed by following the outlined procedures. Additional HomeLink information can be found at: www.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515.

4 39

Features of your vehicle

Retain the original transmitter of the RF device you are programming for use in other vehicles as well as for future HomeLink programming. It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink buttons be erased for security purposes.

NOTICE - Programming HomeLink

When programming a garage door opener, it is advised to park the vehicle outside of the garage.

It is recommended that a new bat- tery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device being pro- grammed to HomeLink for quick- er training and accurate transmis- sion of the radio-frequency signal.

Some vehicles may require the ignition switch to be turned to the second (or "accessories") position for programming and/or opera- tion of HomeLink.

In the event that there are still pro- gramming difficulties or questions after following the programming steps listed below, contact HomeLink at: www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.

WARNING Before programming HomeLink

to a garage door opener or gate operator, make sure that people and objects are out of the way of the device to prevent potential harm or damage. Do not use HomeLink with any garage door opener that lacks the safety stop and reverse features required by U.S. federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door that can- not detect an object - signaling the door to stop and reverse - does not meet current U.S. feder- al safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features increases the risk of seri- ous injury or death.

Features of your vehicle

404

Programming To train most devices, follow these instructions:

1. For first-time programming, press and hold the two outside buttons ( , ), HomeLink Channel 1 and Channel 3, until the indicator light begins to flash (after 10 sec- onds). Release both buttons. Do not hold the buttons for longer than 20 seconds.

2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 1-3 inches (2-8 cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the indicator light in view.

3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink and hand- held transmitter buttons until the HomeLink indicator light changes from a slow to a rapid blinking light. Now you may release both the HomeLink and hand-held trans- mitter buttons.

NOTICE Some devices may require you to replace this Programming step 3 with procedures noted in the "Gate Operator/Canadian Programming" section. If the HomeLink indicator light does not change to a rapidly blinking light after performing these steps, contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com.

OYF042252N

Flashing

OYF042251N

Flashing

4 41

Features of your vehicle

4. Firmly press, hold for 5 seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button up to two sepa- rate times to activate the door. If the door does not activate, press and hold the just-trained HomeLink

button and observe the indicator light. If the indicator light stays on con-

stantly, programming is complete and your device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed and released.

If the indicator light blinks rapidly for 2 seconds and then turns to a constant light, continue with "Programming" steps 5-7 to com- plete the programming of a rolling code equipped device (most com- monly a garage door opener).

5. At the garage door opener receiv- er (motor-head unit) in the garage, locate the "leam" or "smart" but- ton. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head unit.

6. Firmly press and release the "leam" or "smart" button. (The name and color of the button vary by manufacturer). There are 30 seconds to initiate step 7.

7. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for 2 seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button. Repeat the "press/hold/release" sequence a second time, and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener (or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming process.

HomeLink should now activate your rolling code equipped device.

Gate operator & Canadian programming During programming, your handheld transmitter may automatically stop transmitting. Continue to press the Integrated HomeLink Wireless Control System button (note steps 2 through 4 in the Standard Programming portion of this docu- ment) while you press and re-press ("cycle") your handheld transmitter every two seconds until the frequen- cy signal has been learned. The indi- cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly after several seconds upon successful training.

Operating HomeLink

To operate, simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the trained device (i.e. garage door open- er, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time.

Features of your vehicle

424

Reprogramming a single HomeLink button To program a device to HomeLink

using a HomeLink button previously trained, follow these steps: 1. Press and hold the desired

HomeLink button.DO NOT release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the HomeLink button, proceed with "Programming" step 2.

For questions or comments, contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.

Erasing HomeLink buttons Individual buttons cannot be erased. However, to erase all three pro- grammed buttons: 1. Press and hold the two outer

HomeLink buttons until the indi- cator light begins to flash after 10 seconds.

2. Release both buttons. Do not hold for longer than 20 seconds.

The Integrated HomeLink Wireless Control System is now in the training (learn) mode and can be pro- grammed at any time following the appropriate steps in the Programming sections above.

FCC ID: NZLTLMHL4 IC: 4112A-TLMHL4

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harm-

ful interference, and 2. This device must accept any inter-

ference received, including inter- ference that may cause undesired operation.

CAUTION The transceiver has been tested and complies with FCC and Industry Canada rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsi- ble for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device.

4 43

Features of your vehicle

NVS is a registered trademark and Z-Nav is a trademark of the Gentex Corporation, Zeeland, Michigan. HomeLink is a registered trademark owned by Johnson Controls, Incorporated, Milwaukee, Wisconsin.

Outside rearview mirror Be sure to adjust mirror angles before driving. Your vehicle is equipped with both left-hand and right-hand outside rearview mirrors. The mirrors can be adjusted remotely with the remote switch. The mirror heads can be fold- ed back to prevent damage during an automatic car wash or when passing in a narrow street.

WARNING - Rearview mirrors

The right outside rearview mirror is convex. Objects seen in the mirror are closer than they appear.

Use your interior rearview mirror or direct observation to determine the actual distance of following vehicles when changing lanes.

CAUTION Do not scrape ice off the mirror face; this may damage the sur- face of the glass. If ice should restrict movement of the mirror, do not force the mirror for adjustment. To remove ice, use a deicer spray, or a sponge or soft cloth with very warm water.

CAUTION If the mirror is jammed with ice, do not adjust the mirror by force. Use an approved spray de-icer (not radiator antifreeze) to release the frozen mechanism or move the vehicle to a warm place and allow the ice to melt.

WARNING Do not adjust or fold the outside rearview mirrors while the vehi- cle is moving.This could result in loss of control, and an accident which could cause death, seri- ous injury or property damage.

Features of your vehicle

444

Outside rearview mirrors The outside rearview mirrors control switch allows you to adjust the posi- tion of the left and right outside rearview mirrors. To adjust the posi- tion of either mirror, push the switch (1) to R or L to select the right side mirror or the left side mirror, then press a corresponding point on the mirror adjustment control to position the selected mirror up, down, left or right. After adjustment, put the switch into neutral (center) position to prevent the inadvertent adjustment.

Folding the outside rearview mirror To fold the outside rearview mirror, grasp the housing of the mirror and then fold it toward the rear of the vehicle.

CAUTION The mirrors stop moving when

they reach the maximum adjusting angles, but the motor continues to operate while the switch is depressed. Do not depress the switch longer than necessary, the motor may be damaged.

Do not attempt to adjust the outside rearview mirror by hand. Doing so may damage the parts.

OBK049024N OBK049137N

4 45

Features of your vehicle

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

OBK042026N/OBK042027N

1. Speedometer

2. Engine temperature gauge

3. Turn signal indicators

4. Odometer/Trip computer

5. Warning and indicator lights

6. Tachometer

7. Fuel gauge

Type A

The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ

from the illustration.

For more details refer to the "Gauges" in

the next pages.

Type B

For 2.0L Engine

Features of your vehicle

464

OBK042241N/OBK042243N

1. Speedometer

2. Engine temperature gauge

3. Turn signal indicators

4. Odometer/Trip computer

5. Warning and indicator lights

6. Tachometer

7. Fuel gauge

Type A

The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ

from the illustration.

For more details refer to the "Gauges" in

the next pages.

Type B

For 3.8L Engine

4 47

Features of your vehicle

Instrument panel illumination When the vehicles parking lights or headlights are on, rotate the illumi- nation control knob to adjust the brightness of the instrument panel illumination.

Gauges Speedometer The speedometer indicates the for- ward speed of the vehicle. The speedometer is calibrated in miles per hour and/or kilometers per hour.

OBK049028

For 2.0L Engine

For 3.8L Engine

OBK042029U/OBK042030U/OBK042242U/OBK042244U

Features of your vehicle

484

Tachometer The tachometer indicates the approximate number of engine revo- lutions per minute (rpm). Use the tachometer to select the cor- rect shift points and to prevent lug- ging and/or over-revving the engine. When the door is open, or if the engine is not started within 1 minute, the tachometer pointer may move slightly in ON position with the engine OFF. This movement is nor- mal and will not affect the accuracy of the tachometer once the engine is running.

Engine temperature gauge This gauge shows the temperature of the engine coolant when the igni- tion switch is ON. Do not continue driving with an over- heated engine. If your vehicle over- heats, refer to If the engine over- heats in section 6.

For 2.0L Engine

For 3.8L Engine

OBK042031/OBK042259L/OBK042258L/OBK042032

CAUTION Do not operate the engine with- in the tachometer's RED ZONE. This may cause severe engine damage.

CAUTION If the gauge pointer moves beyond the normal range area toward the H position, it indi- cates overheating that may damage the engine.

OBK042033

Type A Type B

4 49

Features of your vehicle

Fuel gauge The fuel gauge indicates the approx- imate amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank. The fuel tank capacity is given in section 8. The fuel gauge is supplemented by a low fuel warning light, which will illuminate when the fuel tank is near empty. On inclines or curves, the fuel gauge pointer may fluctuate or the low fuel warning light may come on earlier than usual due to the movement of fuel in the tank.

WARNING Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. The engine coolant is under pres- sure and could cause severe burns. Wait until the engine is cool before adding coolant to the reservoir.

OBK042034

Type A Type B

WARNING - Fuel gauge Running out of fuel can expose vehicle occupants to danger. You must stop and obtain addi- tional fuel as soon as possible after the warning light comes on or when the gauge indicator comes close to the E level.

CAUTION Avoid driving with a very low fuel level. If you run out of fuel, it could cause the engine to mis- fire and result in excessive load- ing of the catalytic converter.

Features of your vehicle

504

Odometer/Tripmeter (if equipped) Odometer

The odometer indicates the total dis- tance the vehicle has been driven. You will also find the odometer useful to determine when periodic mainte- nance should be performed.

NOTICE It is forbidden to alter the odometer of all vehicles with the intent to change the mileage registered on the odometer. The alteration may void your warranty coverage.

Tripmeter

TRIP A: Tripmeter A TRIP B: Tripmeter B The tripmeter indicates the distance of individual trips selected by the driver.

Tripmeter A or B can be selected by pressing the TRIP button for less than 1 second. Tripmeter A or B can be reset to 0.0 by pressing the RESET button for 1 second or more, and then releasing.

OBK049034OBK042035N

Type A Type B

OBK042036N

Type A Type B

4 51

Features of your vehicle

Trip computer (if equipped) The trip computer is a microcomput- er-controlled driver information sys- tem that displays information related to driving, including odometer, trip- meter, average speed, average fuel consumption (if equipped), instant fuel consumption (if equipped) and distance to empty on the display when the ignition switch is in the ON position. All stored driving informa- tion (except odometer) is reset if the battery is disconnected. The odometer is always displayed until the display is turned off.

Push the TRIP button for less than 1 second to change the function as fol- lows;

Odometer

The odometer indicates the total dis- tance the vehicle has been driven. You will also find the odometer useful to determine when periodic mainte- nance should be performed.

Average fuel economy

Average speed

TRIP A

TRIP B

Distance to empty

Elapsed time

User setting mode*

* : if equipped

OBK042035N

Type A Type B

Features of your vehicle

524

Tripmeter

TRIP A : Tripmeter A TRIP B : Tripmeter B This mode indicates the distance of individual trips selected since the last tripmeter reset. The meter's working range is from 0.0 to 999.9 miles (0.0 to 999.9 km). Pressing the RESET button for more than 1 second, when the tripmeter (TRIP A or TRIP B) is being dis- played, clears the tripmeter to zero (0.0).

Distance to empty

This mode indicates the estimated distance to empty based on the cur- rent fuel in the fuel tank and the amount of fuel delivered to the engine. When the remaining distance is below 30 miles (50 km), --- will be displayed and the distance to empty indicator will blink. The meters working range is from 30 to 999 miles (50 to 999 km).

Average fuel consumption (if equipped)

This mode calculates the average fuel consumption from the total fuel used and the distance since the last aver- age consumption reset. The total fuel used is calculated from the fuel con- sumption input. For an accurate cal- culation, drive more than 0.03 miles (50 m). Pressing the RESET button for more than 1 second, when the average fuel consumption is being displayed, clears the average fuel consumption to zero (----). If the vehicle speed exceeds 1.6 MPH (1 km/h) after refueled more than 1.6 gallons (6 l), the average fuel con- sumption will be cleared to zero (---).

OBK042036N

Type A Type B

OBK042037N

Type A Type B

OBK042039N

Type A Type B

4 53

Features of your vehicle

NOTICE If the vehicle is not on level ground

or the battery power has been interrupted, the Distance to empty function may not operate correctly. The trip computer may not register additional fuel if less than 1.6 gal- lons (6 liters) of fuel are added to the vehicle.

The fuel consumption and dis- tance to empty values may vary significantly based on driving con- ditions, driving habits, and condi- tion of the vehicle.

The distance to empty value is an estimate of the available driving distance. This value may differ from the actual driving distance available.

Average speed

This mode calculates the average speed of the vehicle since the last average speed reset. Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the average speed is calculated while the engine is running. Pressing the RESET button for more than 1 second, when the average speed is being displayed, clears the average speed to zero (---).

Elapsed time

This mode indicates the total time traveled since the last driving time reset. Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the driving time keeps increasing while the engine is running. The meters working range is from 00:00~99:59. Pressing the RESET button for more than 1 second, when the driving time is being displayed, clears the driving time to zero (00:00).

OBK042041N

Type A Type B

OBK042042N

Type A Type B

Features of your vehicle

544

User Settings Mode (Only for Type B cluster, if equipped) 1. Stop the vehicle with the ignition

switch in the ON position or engine running.

2. Press the TRIP button until the User setting is displayed.

3. With the User setting displayed, press the TRIP button for 2 sec- onds.

4. You can change the item by press- ing the TRIP button and select an item by pressing the RESET but- ton.

Auto Door Lock Off - The auto door lock operation will

be canceled.

Speed - All doors will be automatically locked when the vehicle speed exceeds 15km/h (9.3mph).

Shift Lever - All doors will be automatically locked if the shift lever is shifted from the P (Park) position to the R (Reverse), N (Neutral) or D (Drive) position. (for automatic transmission) :

Speed or Shift Lever - All doors will be automatically locked if One or more of the above two condi- tions are satisfied. (for automatic trans- mission)

OBK042201L OBK042203L

4 55

Features of your vehicle

Auto Door Unlock Off - The auto door unlock operation

will be canceled.

Key out or Power off *1 - All doors will be automatically unlocked when the ignition key is removed from ignition switch (or smart key is in the OFF position).

Shift Lever - All doors will be automatically unlocked if the shift lever is shifted to the P (Park) position. (for automatic transmission)

Key out (Power Off) or Shift lever - All doors will be automatically unlocked if One or more of the above two conditions are satisfied. (for automatic transmission)

*1 : Key out - For Normal Key Power off - For Smart Key

Disable Dual Unlock On - If you press the unlock button

on the transmitter or smart key, only the drivers door is unlocked. If you are press the unlock button once more with- in 4seconds on the transmitter or smart key, all door is unlocked.

Off - If you press the unlock button on the transmitter or smart key, all door is unlocked.

Door lock sound (only for normal key type)

On - The Alarm function on the transmitter will be activated.

Off - The Alarm function on the transmitter will be deactivated.

OBK042205LOBKR042255N

Features of your vehicle

564

Headlamp Escort On - The Headlamp Escort and

Escort Welcome function will be activated

Off - The Headlamp Escort and Escort Welcome function will be inactivated

For details, refer to Lighting in sec- tion 4.

One touch turn lamp On - The lane change signals will

blink 3, 5 o 7 times when the turn signal lever is moved slightly.

Off - The Auto Triple Turn function will be inactivated.

AVG fuel economy Reset Auto Reset - The average fuel econ-

omy will reset automat- ically when you drive after refueling.

Manual Reset - The average fuel economy will not reset automatically when you drive after refueling.

OBK044207L OBK042208LOBK042206L

4 57

Features of your vehicle

Key is not in vehicle If the smart key is not in the vehicle and if any door is opened or closed with the ENGINE START/STOP but- ton in the ACC, ON, or START posi- tion, the warning illuminates on the LCD display. Also, the chime sounds for 5 seconds when the smart key is not in the vehicle and the door is closed. Always have the smart key with you.

Key is not detected If the smart key is not in the vehicle or is not detected and you press the ENGINE START/STOP button, the warning illuminates on the LCD dis- play for 10 seconds. Also, the immo- bilizer indicator and the key holder light blinks for 10 seconds.

Low key battery If the engine start/stop button changes to the OFF position when the smart key in the vehicle dis- charges, the warning illuminates on the LCD display for about 10 sec- onds. Also, the warning chime sounds once. Replace the battery with a new one.

LCD display warning (for Type B cluster, if equipped) For vehicles equipped with smart key system

OBK042209L OBK042210L OBK042211L

Features of your vehicle

584

Remove key When you turn off the engine with the smart key in the smart key hold- er, the warning illuminates on the LCD display for about 10 seconds. Also, the smart key holder light blinks for about 10 seconds. To remove the smart key push the smart key once and pull it out from the smart key holder.

Insert key If you press the ENGINE START/ STOP button while "Key is not detected" illuminates on the LCD dis- play, the warning Insert key illumi- nates for about 10 seconds. Also, the immobilizer indicator and the key holder light blinks for about 10 sec- onds.

Press start button again If you can not operate the engine start/stop button when there is a prob- lem with the engine start/stop button system, the warning illuminates for 10 seconds and the chime sounds con- tinuously to indicate that you could start the engine by pressing the engine start/stop button once more. The chime will stop if the engine start/stop button system works nor- mally or the theft alarm system is armed. If the warning illuminates each time you press the engine start/stop button, we recommend that you contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

OBK042214L OBK042215L OBK042216L

For vehicles equipped with smart key system

4 59

Features of your vehicle

Press brake pedal to start engine (for automatic transmission)

If the engine start/stop button changes to the ACC position twice by pressing the button repeatedly without depressing the brake pedal, the warning illuminates on the LCD display for about 10 seconds to indi- cate that you should depress the brake pedal to start the engine.

Press clutch pedal to start engine (for manual transmission)

If the engine start/stop button turns to the ACC position twice by press- ing the button repeatedly without depressing the clutch pedal, the warning illuminates on the LCD dis- play for about 10 seconds to indicate that you should depress the clutch pedal to start the engine.

Shift to "P" or "N" to start the engine

If you try to start the engine with the shift lever not in the P(Park) or N(Neutral) position, the warning illu- minates for about 10 seconds on the LCD display. You can also start the engine with the shift lever in the N(Neutral) posi- tion, but for your safety start the engine with the shift lever in the P(Park) position.

OBK042236LOBK042212L OBK042217L

For vehicles equipped with smart key system

Features of your vehicle

604

Door/Trunk open The indicator appears to inform the driver which door or trunk is opened.

Parking assist warning (if equipped)

Displays the area an obstacle is detected while moving forward or rearward. For more details, refer to Parking assist system in section 4.

Turn on fuse switch The notice appears to inform the driver to turn on the fuse switch in the instrument panel under the steer- ing wheel. For more details, refer to Fuses in section 7.

OBK042220L

OBK042221L

OBK042222L

OBK042237L

Type A

Type B OBK042240L

4 61

Features of your vehicle

Shift to "P" or "N" to start the engine (for auto transmission)

If you try to start the engine with the shift lever not in the P(Park) or N(Neutral) position, the warning illu- minates for about 10 seconds on the LCD display. You can also start the engine with the shift lever in the N(Neutral) posi- tion, but for your safety start the engine with the shift lever in the P(Park) position.

Check stop lamp switch When the stop lamp switch fuse is disconnected, the warning illumi- nates for 10 seconds on the LCD dis- play. Replace the fuse with a new one. If that is not possible you can start the engine by pressing the engine start/stop button for 10 seconds in ACC.

Low tire pressure (if equipped) The low tire pressure position telltale will appear when one or more of your tires are under-inflated. It will indicate the corresponding under-inflated tire. For more details, refer to TPMS in section 6.

OBK042217L OBK042239L OBK042238L

Features of your vehicle

624

Warnings and indicators All warning lights are checked by turning the ignition switch ON (do not start the engine). Any light that does not illuminate should be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. After starting the engine, check to make sure that all warning lights are off. If any are still on, this indicates a situation that needs attention. When releasing the parking brake, the brake system warning light should go off. The fuel warning light will stay on if the fuel level is low.

Air bag warning light

This warning light will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position. This light also comes on when the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) is not working properly. If the SRS air bag warning light does not come on, or continuously remains on after operating for about 6 sec- onds when you turned the ignition switch to the ON position or started the engine, or if it comes on while driving, have the SRS inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) warning light

This light illuminates if the ignition switch is turned ON and goes off in approximately 3 seconds if the sys- tem is operating normally. If the ABS warning light remains on, comes on while driving, or does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, this indi- cates that there may be a malfunc- tion with the ABS. If this occurs, have your vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible. The nor- mal braking system will still be oper- ational, but without the assistance of the anti-lock brake system.

4 63

Features of your vehicle

Electronic brake force dis- tribution (EBD) system warning light

If these two warning lights shown illuminate at the same time while driving, your vehicle may have a malfunction with the ABS and EBD system. In this case, your ABS and regular brake system may not work normally. Have the vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

NOTICE If the ABS warning light or EBD warning light is on and stays on, the speedometer or odometer/tripmeter may not work. In this case, have your vehicle checked by an author- ized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

Seat belt warning

As a reminder to the driver, the seat belt warning light will blink for approximate- ly 6 seconds each time you turn the ignition switch to ON or START, regard- less of belt fastening. If the driver's seat belt is not fastened when the ignition switch is turned to ON or START, the seat belt warning light and the seat belt warning chime will operate for approximately 6 seconds. But if it is fastened within the 6 seconds, the warning light will blink for approxi- mately the 6 seconds and the warning chime will turn off immediately. If the driver's seat belt is disconnected after the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the seat belt warning light will blink for approximately 6 seconds until the belt is fastened. If the driver's seat belt is not fastened when the vehi- cle speed exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h), the seat belt warning light and chime will operate approximately 10 times with a pattern of 6 seconds on and 24 seconds off until the belt is fastened or the vehicle speed decreases below 3 mph (5 km/h).

WARNING If the both ABS and brake warn- ing lights are on and stay on, your vehicles brake system will not work normally during sudden braking. In this case, avoid high speed driving and abrupt brak- ing. Have your vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI deal- er as soon as possible.

Features of your vehicle

644

Turn signal indicator

The blinking green arrows on the instrument panel show the direction indicated by the turn signals. If the arrow comes on but does not blink, blinks more rapidly than normal, or does not illuminate at all, a malfunc- tion in the turn signal system is indi- cated.Your dealer should be consult- ed for repairs. This indicator also blinks when the hazard warning switch is turned on.

High beam indicator

This indicator illuminates when the headlights are on and in the high beam position or when the turn sig- nal lever is pulled into the Flash-to- Pass position.

Tail light indicator (if equipped)

This indicator illuminates when the tail lights are on.

Engine oil pressure warning light

This warning light indicates the engine oil pressure is low. If the warning light illuminates while driving: 1. Drive safely to the side of the road

and stop. 2. With the engine off, check the

engine oil level. If the level is low, add oil as required.

If the warning light remains on after adding oil or if oil is not available, call an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

CAUTION If the engine is not stopped immediately after the engine oil pressure warning light is illumi- nated, severe damage could result.

4 65

Features of your vehicle

Parking brake & brake fluid warning light

Parking brake warning

This light is illuminated when the parking brake is applied with the igni- tion switch in the START or ON posi- tion. The warning light should go off when the parking brake is released while an engine is running. The parking brake warning chime will sound to remind you that the parking brake is applied when you are driving above 6 mph (10 km/h). Always release the parking brake before you drive.

Low brake fluid level warning

If the warning light remains on, it may indicate that the brake fluid level in the reservoir is low. If the warning light remains on: 1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe

location and stop your vehicle. 2. With the engine stopped, check the

brake fluid level immediately and add fluid as required.Then check all brake components for fluid leaks.

3. Do not drive the vehicle if leaks are found, the warning light remains on or the brakes do not operate properly. Have the vehicle towed to any authorized HYUNDAI dealer for a brake system inspec- tion and necessary repairs.

CAUTION If the oil pressure warning light stays on while the engine is run- ning, serious engine damage may result. The oil pressure warning light comes on whenever there is insufficient oil pressure. In nor- mal operation, it should come on when the ignition switch is turned on, then go out when the engine is started. If the oil pressure warn- ing light stays on while the engine is running, there is a seri- ous malfunction. If this happens, stop the car as soon as it is safe to do so, turn off the engine and check the oil level. If the oil level is low, fill the engine oil to the proper level and start the engine again. If the light stays on with the engine running, turn the engine off immediately. In any instance where the oil light stays on when the engine is running, the engine should be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer before the car is driven again.

Features of your vehicle

664

WARNING - Low tire pres- sure

Significantly low tire pressure makes the vehicle unstable and can contribute to loss of vehicle control and increased braking distances. Continued driving on tires with low pressure will cause the tires to overheat and fail.

Your vehicle is equipped with dual- diagonal braking systems. This means you still have braking on two wheels even if one of the brake cir- cuits is damaged or malfunctions. With only one of the circuits working, more than normal pedal travel and greater pedal pressure are required to stop the car. Also, the car will not stop in as short a distance with only a portion of the brake system work- ing. If the brakes fail while you are driving, shift to a lower gear for addi- tional engine braking and stop the car as soon as it is safe to do so. To check bulb operation, check whether the parking brake and brake fluid warning light illuminates when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Low tire pressure telltale

The low tire pressure telltale illumi- nates when one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated. Inflate your tires to the correct infla- tion pressure. The low tire pressure telltale will illu- minate after it blinks for approximate- ly one minute when there is a prob- lem with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System. If this occurs, have the system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible. For details, refer to the TPMS on chap- ter 6.

WARNING Driving the vehicle with a warn- ing light on is dangerous. If the brake warning light remains on, have the brakes checked and repaired immediately by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

4 67

Features of your vehicle

Shift pattern indicator

The indicator displays which auto- matic transmission shift position is selected.

Charging system warn- ing light

This warning light indicates a mal- function of either the generator or electrical charging system. If the warning light comes on while the vehicle is in motion: 1. Drive to the nearest safe location. 2. With the engine off, check the gen-

erator drive belt for looseness or breakage.

3. If the belt is adjusted properly, a problem exists somewhere in the electrical charging system. Have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer correct the problem as soon as possible.

Front fog light indicator (if equipped)

This light comes on when the front fog lights are ON.

Trunk lid open warning light

This warning light illuminates when the trunk lid is not closed securely with the ignition in any position.

Door ajar warning light

This warning light illuminates when a door is not closed securely with the ignition switch in any position.

Immobilizer indicator

Without smart key system

This light illuminates when the immo- bilizer key is inserted and turned to the ON position to start the engine. At this time, you can start the engine. The light goes out after the engine is running. If this light blinks when the ignition switch is in the ON position before starting the engine, have the system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

With smart key system (if equipped)

If any of the following occurs in a vehicle equipped with the smart key, the immobilizer indicator illuminates, blinks or the light goes off.

Features of your vehicle

684

When the smart key is in the vehi- cle, if the engine start/stop button is turned to the ON position, the indicator will illuminate until the engine is started. However, when the smart key is not in the vehicle, if the engine start/stop button is depressed, the indicator will blink for a few minutes to indicate that you will not be able to start the engine.

When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and the indica- tor turns off after 2 seconds, the system may have a problem. Have the vehicle checked by an author- ized HYUNDAI dealer.

When the battery is weak, if the engine start/stop button is depressed, the indicator will blink and you will not be able to start the engine. However, you may still be able to start the engine by inserting the smart key in the smart key holder. If smart key system related parts have a problem, the indicator blinks.

Low fuel level warning light

This warning light indicates the fuel tank is nearly empty. When it comes on, you should add fuel as soon as possible. Driving with the fuel level warning light on or with the fuel level below E can cause the engine to misfire and damage the catalytic converter.

Engine coolant tempera- ture warning light

The warning light shows the temper- ature of the engine coolant when the ignition switch is ON. The warning light illuminates if the temperature of the engine coolant is above 1203C (2485.5F). Do not continue driving with an over- heated engine. If your vehicle over- heats, refer to Overheating in the section 6.

NOTICE If the engine coolant temperature warning light illuminates, it indi- cates overheating that may damage the engine.

4 69

Features of your vehicle

Low washer fluid level warning light (if equipped)

This warning light indicates the washer fluid reservoir is near empty. Refill the washer fluid as soon as possible.

Malfunction indicator light (MIL) (check engine light)

This indicator light is part of the Engine Control System which moni- tors various emission control system components. If this light illuminates while driving, it indicates that a potential malfunction has been detected somewhere in the emission control system. This light will also illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, and will go out in a few seconds after the engine is started. If it illuminates while driving, or does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have the system checked. Generally, your vehicle will continue to be drivable, but have the system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer promptly.

CAUTION Prolonged driving with the

Malfunction Indicator Light illuminated may cause dam- age to the emission control systems which could effect drivability and/or fuel econo- my.

If the Malfunction Indicator Light illuminates, potential cat- alytic converter damage is pos- sible which could result in loss of engine power. Have the Engine Control System inspect- ed as soon as possible by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Features of your vehicle

704

ESC indicator (Electronic Stability Control)

The ESC indicator will illuminate when the ignition switch is turned ON, but should go off after approxi- mately 3 seconds. When the ESC is on, it monitors the driving conditions. Under normal driving conditions, the ESC light will remain off. When a slippery or low traction condition is encountered, the ESC will operate, and the ESC indicator will blink to indicate the ESC is operating. The ESC indicator stays on when the ESC may have a malfunction. Take your car to an authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have the system checked.

ESC OFF indicator

The ESC OFF indicator will illumi- nate when the ignition switch is turned ON, but should go off after approximately 3 seconds. To switch to ESC OFF mode, press the ESC OFF button . The ESC OFF indica- tor will illuminate indicating the ESC is deactivated. With the ESC system in the stand by position, if you use the parking brake to stop the vehicle due abnormal brake operation, the ESC system may be stopped and ESC OFF indi- cator may illuminate for about 5 minutes.

Cruise indicator (if equipped)

CRUISE indicator

The indicator light illuminates when the cruise control system is enabled. The cruise indicator light in the instrument cluster is illuminated when the cruise control ON-OFF but- ton on the steering wheel is pushed. The indicator light turns off when the cruise control ON-OFF button is pushed again. For more information about the use of cruise control, refer to Cruise control system in section 5.

CAUTION Do not use the parking brake to stop the vehicle, except in an emergency situation.

CRUISE

4 71

Features of your vehicle

Cruise SET indicator

The indicator light illuminates when the cruise function switch (SET- or RES+) is ON. The cruise SET indicator light in the instrument cluster is illuminated when the cruise control switch (SET- or RES+) is pushed. The cruise SET indicator light does not illuminate when the cruise control switch (CAN- CEL) is pushed or the system is dis- engaged.

Key reminder warning chime Without smart key

If the drivers door is opened while the ignition key is left in the ignition switch (ACC or LOCK position), the key reminder warning chime will sound. This is to prevent you from locking your keys in the vehicle. The chime sounds until the key is removed from the ignition switch or the drivers door is closed.

With smart key

If the drivers door is opened while the smart key is in the vehicle with the engine start/stop button in ACC or the smart key is in the smart key holder with the engine start/stop but- ton in OFF, the key reminder warning chime will sound. The chime sounds until the smart key is removed from the smart key holder or the drivers door is closed.

KEY OUT indicator (if equipped)

When the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, if any door is open, the system checks for the smart key. If the smart key is not in the vehicle, the indicator will blink, and if all doors are closed, the chime will also sound for about 5 seconds. The indicator will turn off while the vehicle is moving. Keep the smart key in the vehicle.

KEY OUTSET

Features of your vehicle

724

Multi gauge consists of a Instant fuel consumption gauge, turbo boost pressure gauge (for 2.0L engine), engine torque gauge (for 3.8L engine) and engine oil temperature gauge.

MULTI GAUGE

1. Instant fuel consumption

2. Turbo boost pressure gauge

3. Engine torque gauge

4. Engine oil temperature gauge

OBK042245N/OBK042246N

2.0L engine

3.8L engine

4 73

Features of your vehicle

Instant fuel consumption It shows instantaneous change of the fuel consumption.

NOTICE You must drive more than 6 mph (10 km/h) for this gauge to display the instant fuel consumption.

Turbo boost pressure gauge (for 2.0L engine) It shows instantaneous change of the turbo boost pressure.

Engine torque gauge (for 3.8L engine) It shows instantaneous change of the Torque by rpm.

OBK042247N OBK042248N OBK042249N

Features of your vehicle

744

Engine oil temperature gauge It shows instantaneous change of the Engine oil temperature.

OBK042250N

4 75

Features of your vehicle

The rear parking assist system assists the driver during backward movement of the vehicle by chiming if any object is sensed within a dis- tance of 47 in. (120 cm) behind the vehicle. This system is a supplemen- tal system and it is not intended to nor does it replace the need for extreme care and attention of the driver. The sensing range and objects detectable by the back sen- sors are limited. Whenever backing- up, pay as much attention to what is behind you as you would in a vehicle without a rear parking assist system.

Operation of the rear parking assist system Operating condition This system will activate when back-

ing up with the ignition switch ON. If the vehicle is moving at a speed over 6.2 mph (10 km/h), the sys- tem may not be activated correctly.

The sensing distance while the rear parking assist system is in operation is approximately 47 in. (120 cm).

When more than two objects are sensed at the same time, the clos- est one will be recognized first.

Types of warning sound When an object is 47 in. to 24 in.

(120 cm to 60 cm) from the rear bumper: Buzzer beeps intermit- tently.

When an object is 24 in. to 12 in. (60 cm to 30 cm) from the rear bumper: Buzzer beeps more fre- quently.

When an object is within 12 in. (30 cm) of the rear bumper: Buzzer sounds continuously.

REAR PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING The rear parking assist system is a supplementary function only. The operation of the rear parking assist system can be affected by several factors (including environmental condi- tions). It is the responsibility of the driver to always check the area behind the vehicle before and while backing up.OBK042131

Sensors

Features of your vehicle

764

Non-operational conditions of rear parking assist system The rear parking assist system may not operate properly when: 1. Moisture is frozen to the sensor. (It

will operate normally when the moisture has been cleared.)

2. The sensor is covered with foreign matter, such as snow or water, or the sensor cover is blocked. (It will operate normally when the materi- al is removed or the sensor is no longer blocked.)

3. Driving on uneven road surfaces (unpaved roads, gravel, bumps, gradient).

4. Objects generating excessive noise (vehicle horns, loud motor- cycle engines, or truck air brakes) are within range of the sensor.

5. Heavy rain or water spray exists. 6. Wireless transmitters or mobile

phones are within range of the sensor.

7. The sensor is covered with snow.

The detecting range may decrease when: 1. The sensor is stained with foreign

matter such as snow or water. (The sensing range will return to normal when removed.)

2. Outside air temperature is extremely hot or cold.

The following objects may not be recognized by the sensor: 1. Sharp or slim objects such as

ropes, chains or small poles. 2. Objects which tend to absorb the

sensor frequency such as clothes, spongy material or snow.

3. Undetectable objects smaller than 40 in. (1 m) in height and narrower than 6 in. (14 cm) in diameter.

Rear parking assist system precautions The rear parking assist system

may not sound sequentially depending on the speed and shapes of the objects detected.

The rear parking assist system may malfunction if the vehicle bumper height or sensor installa- tion has been modified or dam- aged. Any non-factory installed equipment or accessories may also interfere with the sensor per- formance.

The sensor may not recognize objects less than 15 in. (40 cm) from the sensor, or it may sense an incorrect distance. Use caution.

When the sensor is frozen or stained with snow, dirt, or water, the sensor may be inoperative until the stains are removed using a soft cloth.

Do not push, scratch or strike the sensor. Sensor damage could occur.

4 77

Features of your vehicle

NOTICE This system can only sense objects within the range and location of the sensors; It can not detect objects in other areas where sensors are not installed. Also, small or slim objects, such as poles or objects located between sensors may not be detected by the sensors. Always visually check behind the vehicle when backing up. Be sure to inform any drivers of the vehicle that may be unfamiliar with the system regarding the systems capabilities and limitations.

Self-diagnosis If you dont hear an audible warning sound or if the buzzer sounds inter- mittently when shifting the gear to the R (Reverse) position, this may indi- cate a malfunction in the rear parking assist system. If this occurs, have your vehicle checked by an author- ized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

WARNING Pay close attention when the vehicle is driven close to objects on the road, particularly pedestrians, and especially children. Be aware that some objects may not be detected by the sensors, due to the objects distance, size or material, all of which can limit the effective- ness of the sensor. Always per- form a visual inspection to make sure the vehicle is clear of all obstructions before moving the vehicle in any direction.

WARNING Your new vehicle warranty does not cover any accidents or dam- age to the vehicle or injuries to its occupants due to a rear parking assist system malfunc- tion. Always drive safely and cautiously.

Features of your vehicle

784

PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

The parking assist system assists the driver during movement of the vehicle by chiming if any object is sensed within the distance of 24 in. (60 cm) in front and 47 in. (120 cm) behind the vehicle.This system is a supplemental system and it is not intended to nor does it replace the need for extreme care and attention of the driver.

The sensing range and objects detectable by the sensors are limit- ed. Whenever moving pay as much attention to what is in front and behind of you as you would in a vehi- cle without a parking assist system. The front parking assist system has 2 sensors on the front bumper.These 2 sensors can detect right and left side area. It means the front parking assist system can not detect the cen- ter area of the front bumper.

Operation of the parking assist system Operating condition This system activates when the

parking assist button is pressed with the ignition switch ON.

OBK042226

OBK042131

Type A

Type B

Sensor

Sensor

WARNING The parking assist system should only be considered as a supplementary function. The driver must check the front and rear view. The operational func- tion of the parking assist system can be affected by many factors and conditions of the surround- ings, so the responsibility rests always with the driver.

OBK042227

4 79

Features of your vehicle

The parking assist button turns on automatically and activates the parking assist system when you shift the gear to the R (Reverse) position. It will turn off automatical- ly when you shift out of R (Reverse) and drive above 6.2 mph (10 km/h).

The sensing distance while back- ing up is approximately 47 in. (120 cm) when you are driving less than 6.2 mph (10 km/h).

The sensing distance while moving forward is approximately 24 in. (60 cm) when you are driving less than 6.2 mph (10 km/h).

When more than two objects are sensed at the same time, the clos- est one will be recognized first.

NOTICE It may not operate if its distance from the object is already less than approximately 9.8 in (25 cm) when the system is ON.

Distance from object Warning indicator

Warning sound When driving

forward When driving

rearward

47 in.~24 in. (120 cm~60 cm)

Front - - -

Rear - Buzzer beeps intermittently

24 in.~12 in. (60 cm~30 cm)

Front -

Rear - Buzzer beeps

frequently

12 in. (30 cm)

Front Buzzer sounds continuously

Rear - Buzzer sounds continuously

NOTICE The actual warning sound and indicator may differ from the illustration

according to objects or sensor status. Do not wash the vehicle's sensor with high pressure water.

Type of warning indicator and sound : with Warning sound

: without Warning sound

Features of your vehicle

804

Non-operational conditions of parking assist system Parking assist system may not operate normally when: 1. Moisture is frozen to the sensor. (It

will operate normally when mois- ture melts.)

2. Sensor is covered with foreign matter, such as snow or water, or the sensor cover is blocked. (It will operate normally when the materi- al is removed or the sensor is no longer blocked.)

3. Sensor is stained with foreign mat- ter such as snow or water. (Sensing range will return to nor- mal when removed.)

4.The parking assist button is off.

There is a possibility of parking assist system malfunction when: 1. Driving on uneven road surfaces

such as unpaved roads, gravel, bumps, or gradient.

2. Objects generating excessive noise such as vehicle horns, loud motor- cycle engines, or truck air brakes can interfere with the sensor.

3. Heavy rain or water spray. 4. Wireless transmitters or mobile

phones present near the sensor. 5. Sensor is covered with snow.

CAUTION This system can only sense

objects within the range and location of the sensors; It can not detect objects in other areas where sensors are not installed. Also, small or slim objects, such as poles or objects located between sen- sors may not be detected by the sensors. Always visually check behind the vehicle when backing up.

Be sure to inform any drivers of the vehicle that may be unfamiliar with the system regarding the systems capa- bilities and limitations.

4 81

Features of your vehicle

Detecting range may decrease when: 1. Outside air temperature is

extremely hot or cold. 2. Undetectable objects smaller than

80 in. (1 m) and narrower than 6 in. (14 cm) in diameter.

The following objects may not be recognized by the sensor: 1. Sharp or slim objects such as

ropes, chains or small poles. 2. Objects, which tend to absorb sen-

sor frequency such as clothes, spongy material or snow.

NOTICE 1. The warning may not sound

sequentially depending on the speed and shapes of the objects detected.

2. The parking assist system may malfunction if the vehicle bumper height or sensor installation has been modified. Any non-factory installed equipment or accessories may also interfere with the sensor performance.

3. Sensor may not recognize objects less than 12 in. (30 cm) from the sensor, or it may sense an incor- rect distance. Use with caution.

4. When the sensor is frozen or stained with snow or water, the sensor may be inoperative until the stains are removed using a soft cloth.

5. Do not push, scratch or strike the sensor with any hard objects that could damage the surface of the sensor. Sensor damage could occur.

NOTICE This system can only sense objects within the range and location of the sensors, it can not detect objects in other areas where sensors are not installed. Also, small or slim objects, or objects located between sensors may not be detected. Always visually check in front and behind the vehicle when driving. Be sure to inform any drivers in the vehicle that may be unfamiliar with the system regarding the systems capabilities and limitations.

WARNING Pay close attention when the vehicle is driven close to objects on the road, particularly pedestri- ans, and especially children. Be aware that some objects may not be detected by the sensors, due to the objects distance, size or material, all of which can limit the effectiveness of the sensor. Always perform a visual inspec- tion to make sure the vehicle is clear of all obstructions before moving the vehicle in any direc- tion.

Features of your vehicle

824

Self-diagnosis When you shift the gear to the R (Reverse) position and if one or more of the below occurs you may have a malfunction in the rear parking assist system. You don't hear an audible warning

sound or if the buzzer sounds inter- mittently.

If this occurs, have your vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

The rear camera display will activate when the back-up light is ON with the ignition switch ON and the shift lever in the R (Reverse) position.

This system is a supplemental sys- tem that helps the driver by display- ing objects behind the vehicle when backing up. Always keep the camera lens clean. If lens is covered with foreign matter, the camera may not operate normally.

WARNING Your new vehicle warranty does not cover any accidents or dam- age to the vehicle or injuries to its occupants related to a park- ing assist system. Always drive safely and cautiously.

(blinks)

is displayed. (if equipped)

REAR CAMERA DISPLAY (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING - Rear camera display

The rear camera display is not a safety device. It only serves to assist the driver in identifying objects directly behind the mid- dle of the vehicle. The camera does NOT cover the complete area behind the vehicle. While the camera's display is general- ly accurate, objects can be much closer than they appear in the display screen and can be distorted in both size and pro- portion.

OBK044277

OBK044278

4 83

Features of your vehicle

The hazard warning flasher should be used whenever you find it neces- sary to stop the car in a hazardous location. When you must make such an emergency stop, always pull off the road as far as possible. The hazard warning lights are turned on by pushing in the hazard switch. This causes all turn signal lights to blink. The hazard warning lights will operate even though the key is not in the ignition switch. To turn the hazard warning lights off, push the switch a second time.

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER

OBK044044N

WARNING - Relying on the Rear-Camera Display

Never rely solely on the rear camera display when backing. You must always use methods of viewing the area behind you including looking over both shoulders as well as continu- ously checking all three rear view mirrors. Due to the difficul- ty of ensuring that the area behind you remains clear, always back slowly and stop immediately if you even suspect that a person, and especially a child, might be behind you.

Features of your vehicle

844

Battery saver function The purpose of this feature is to

prevent the battery from being dis- charged. The system automatically turns off the exterior lights when the driver removes the ignition key (smart key : turns off the engine) and opens the driver-side door. (in that order)

With this feature, the parking lights will be turned off automatically if the driver parks on the side of road at night. If necessary, to keep the lights on when the ignition key is removed (smart key : turns off the engine), perform the following: 1) Open the driver-side door. 2) Turn the parking lights OFF and

ON again using the light switch on the steering column.

Headlight escort function (if equipped) If you turn the ignition switch to the ACC or OFF position with the head- lights ON, the headlights (and/or tail lights) remain on for about 5 minutes. However, if the drivers door is opened and closed, the headlights are turned off after 15 seconds. The headlights can be turned off by pressing the lock button on the trans- mitter (or smart key) twice or turning the light switch to the OFF or Auto position. However, if you turn the light switch to the Auto position when it is dark outside, the headlights will not be turned off.

Headlamp welcome function (if equipped) When the headlight switch is in the ON or AUTO position and all doors (and trunk) are closed and locked, if you press the door unlock button on the transmitter (or the smart key), the parking light will come on for about 15 seconds. At this time, if you press the door lock button on the transmit- ter (or smart key) the parking light will turn off immediately.

LIGHTING

CAUTION If the driver gets out of the vehi- cle through other doors (except drivers door), the battery saver function does not operate and the headlight escort function does not turn off automatically. Therefore, it causes the battery to be discharged. In this case, make sure to turn off the lamp before getting out of the vehicle.

4 85

Features of your vehicle

Daytime running light (if equipped) Daytime Running Lights (DRL) can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions, and it is especially helpful after dawn and before sunset. The DRL system turns OFF when: 1. The multifunction switch is in the

OFF position. (if equipped) 2. The headlights are ON. 3. The turn signal is ON. (the blinking

side of the DRL will turn off) 4. The hazard warning light is ON. 5. The parking brake is applied. 6. Engine stops.

Lighting control The light switch has a Headlight and a Parking light position. To operate the lights, turn the knob at the end of the control lever to one of the following positions: (1) OFF position (2) Parking light position (3) Headlight position (4) Auto light position (if equipped)

Parking light position ( ) When the light switch is in the park- ing light position (1st position), the tail, license and instrument panel lights are ON.

OBK049046OBK049045

Features of your vehicle

864

Headlight position ( ) When the light switch is in the head- light position (2nd position), the head, tail, license and instrument panel lights are ON.

NOTICE The ignition switch must be in the ON position to turn on the head- lights.

Auto light position (if equipped) When the light switch is in the AUTO light position, the taillights and head- lights will be turned ON or OFF auto- matically depending on the amount of light outside the vehicle.

OBK049048

CAUTION Never place anything over

sensor (1) located on the instrument panel. This will ensure better auto-light sys- tem control.

Dont clean the sensor using a window cleaner. The cleaner may leave a light film which could interfere with sensor operation.

If your vehicle has window tint or other types of metallic coat- ing on the front windshield, the Auto light system may not work properly.

OBK049047

4 87

Features of your vehicle

High beam operation To turn on the high beam headlights, push the lever away from you. Pull it back for low beams. The high beam indicator will light when the headlight high beams are switched on. To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the lights on for a prolonged time while the engine is not running.

To flash the headlights, pull the lever towards you. It will return to the nor- mal (low beam) position when released. The headlight switch does not need to be on to use this flashing feature.

Turn signals and lane change signals The ignition switch must be on for the turn signals to function. To turn on the turn signals, move the lever up or down (A). Green arrow indicators on the instrument panel indicate which turn signal is operating. They will self-cancel after a turn is completed. If the indicator continues to flash after a turn, manually return the lever to the OFF position.

OBK049051OBK049049OBK049050

WARNING Do not use high beam when there are other vehicles. Using high beam could obstruct the other driver's vision.

Features of your vehicle

884

To signal a lane change, move the turn signal lever slightly and hold it in position (B). The lever will return to the OFF position when released. If an indicator stays on and does not flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of the turn signal bulbs may be burned out and will require replace- ment.

One-touch triple turn signal To activate an one-touch triple turn signal move the turn signal lever slightly for less than 1.8 seconds and then release it. The lane change sig- nals will blink 3 times.

NOTICE If an indicator flash is abnormally quick or slow, a bulb may be burned out or have a poor electrical connec- tion in the circuit.

Front fog light (if equipped) Fog lights are used to provide improved visibility and avoid acci- dents when visibility is poor due to fog, rain or snow etc. The fog lights will turn on when fog light switch (1) is turned to ON after the headlights are turned on. To turn off the fog lights, turn the switch to OFF.

OBK049052

CAUTION When in operation, the fog lights consume large amounts of vehicle electrical power. Only use the fog lights when visibility is poor.

4 89

Features of your vehicle

A : Wiper speed control MIST Single wipe OFF Off INT Intermittent wipe LO Low wiper speed HI High wiper speed

B : Intermittent wipe time adjust- ment

C : Wash with brief wipes*

* : if equipped

Windshield wipers Operates as follows when the igni- tion switch is turned ON. MIST : For a single wiping cycle,

push the lever upward and release it with the lever in the OFF position. The wipers will operate continuously if the lever is pushed upward and held.

OFF : Wiper is not in operation INT : Wiper operates intermittently at

the same wiping intervals. Use this mode in a light rain or mist. To vary the speed setting, turn the speed control knob(1).

LO : Normal wiper speed HI : Fast wiper speed

NOTICE If there is heavy accumulation of snow or ice on the windshield, defrost the windshield for about 10 minutes, or until the snow and/or ice is removed before using the wind- shield wipers to ensure proper oper- ation.

NOTICE When you operate the wipers, if

your vehicle has a problem in any part of the wiper operation sys- tem, the wiper may operate in the LO mode regardless of the wiper switch position. In this case, have your vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

When the ignition key is removed, the wiper blade sometimes may move slightly to be properly posi- tioned for reducing the deteriora- tion of the windshield wipers.

WIPERS AND WASHERS

OAM049100L

Features of your vehicle

904

Windshield washers In the OFF position, pull the lever gently toward you to spray washer fluid on the windshield and to run the wipers 1-3 cycles. Use this function when the wind- shield is dirty. The spray and wiper operation will continue until you release the lever. If the washer does not work, check the washer fluid level. If the fluid level is not sufficient, you will need to add appropriate non-abrasive windshield washer fluid to the washer reservoir. The reservoir filler neck is located in the front of the engine compartment on the passenger side.

CAUTION To prevent possible damage to the washer pump, do not oper- ate the washer when the fluid reservoir is empty.

WARNING Do not use the washer in freez- ing temperatures without first warming the windshield with the defrosters; the washer solution could freeze on contact with the windshield and obscure your vision.

CAUTION To prevent possible damage

to the wipers or windshield, do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry.

To prevent damage to the wiper blades, do not use gaso- line, kerosene, paint thinner, or other solvents on or near them.

To prevent damage to the wiper arms and other compo- nents, do not attempt to move the wipers manually.

4 91

Features of your vehicle

Map lamp Push the lens to turn the map lamp on or off. This light produces a spot beam for convenient use as a map lamp at night or as a personal lamp for the driver and the front passenger.

DOOR: The light comes on when any door (or trunk) is opened regardless of the ignition switch position. When doors are unlocked by the transmitter (or smart key), the light comes on for approximately 30 seconds as long as any door is not open. The light goes out gradually after approxi- mately 30 seconds if the door is closed. However, if the ignition switch is ON or all doors are locked, the light will turn off immediate- ly. If a door is opened with the ignition switch in the ACC or LOCK position, the light stays on for about 20 minutes. However, if a door is opened with the ignition switch in the ON position, the light stays on continu- ously.

INTERIOR LIGHT

CAUTION Do not use the interior lights for extended periods when the engine is not running. It may cause battery discharge.

OBK049055N

WARNING Do not use the interior lights when driving in the dark. Accidents could happen because the view may be obscured by interior lights.

Features of your vehicle

924

Trunk room lamp The trunk room lamp comes on when the trunk is opened.

Glove box lamp The glove box lamp comes on when the glove box is opened. The parking lights or headlights must be ON for the glove box lamp to func- tion.

Vanity mirror lamp Pull the sunvisor downward and you can turn the vanity mirror lamp ON or OFF by pushing the button. : To turn the lamp ON. O : To turn the lamp OFF.

OBK049056

CAUTION The trunk room lamp comes on as long as the trunk lid opens. To prevent unnecessary charg- ing system drain, close the trunk lid securely after using the trunk room.

OBK049057 OTD049088

CAUTION To prevent unnecessary charg- ing system drain, turn off the lamp by pushing the O button after using the lamp.

4 93

Features of your vehicle

NOTICE If you want to defrost and defog the front windshield, refer to Windshield defrosting and defog- ging in this section.

Rear window defroster The defroster heats the window to remove frost, fog and thin ice from the rear window, while the engine is running. To activate the rear window defroster, press the rear window defroster button located in the center facia switch panel. The indicator on the rear window defroster button illu- minates when the defroster is ON. If there is heavy accumulation of snow on the rear window, brush it off before operating the rear defroster.

The rear window defroster automati- cally turns off after approximately 20 minutes or when the ignition switch is turned off. To turn off the defroster, press the rear window defroster but- ton again.

Outside rearview mirror defroster (if equipped) If your vehicle is equipped with the outside rearview mirror defrosters, they will operate at the same time you turn on the rear window defroster.

Front windshield deicer (if equipped) If your vehicle is equipped with the front windshield deicer, it will be operating at the same time you oper- ate the rear window defroster.

CAUTION To prevent damage to the con- ductors bonded to the inside surface of the rear window, never use sharp instruments or window cleaners containing abrasives to clean the window.

DEFROSTER

OBK042100

Features of your vehicle

944

MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED

1. Temperature control knob 2. Max A/C (Max airconditioning) button 3. Off button 4. Mode selection button 5. Fan speed control knob 6. Air conditioning button 7. Front windshield defrost button 8. Rear window defroster button 9. Air intake control button

OBK042099/OBK042260L

Type A

Type B

4 95

Features of your vehicle

Heating and air conditioning 1. Start the engine. 2. Set the mode to the desired posi-

tion. For improving the effectiveness of heating and cooling; - Heating: - Cooling:

3. Set the temperature control to the desired position.

4. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position.

5. Set the fan speed control to the desired speed.

6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the air conditioning system on.

OBK042064N

Features of your vehicle

964

Mode selection The mode selection button controls the direction of the air flow through the ventilation system. The air flow outlet port is converted as follows: Press

Press

Face-Level (B, D, C)

Air flow is directed toward the upper body and face with a small amount of the air being directed to the floor. Additionally, each outlet can be con- trolled to direct the air discharged from the outlet.

Bi-Level (B, D, C)

Air flow is directed towards the face and the floor.

Floor-Level (C, A, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor, with a small amount of the air being directed to the windshield and side window defrosters.

Floor/Defrost-Level (A, C, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor and the windshield with a small amount directed to the side window defrosters.

Defrost-Level (A, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the windshield with a small amount of air directed to the side window defrosters.

OBK042101

4 97

Features of your vehicle

MAX A/C-Level (B,D)

The MAX A/C mode is used to cool the inside of the vehicle faster. Air flow is directed toward the upper body and face with a small amount of the air being directed to the floor. In this mode, the air conditioning and the recirculated air position will be selected automatically.

Instrument panel vents

The outlet vents can be opened or closed separately using the horizon- tal thumbwheel. To close the vent, rotate it to the fully down position. To open the vent, rotate it up to the desired position. Also, you can adjust the direction of air delivery from these vents using the vent control lever as shown. Temperature control

The temperature control knob allows you to control the temperature of the air flowing from the ventilation sys- tem.To change the air temperature in the passenger compartment, turn the knob to the right for warm air or left for cooler air.

OBK042102

OBK042268L

Type A

Type B OBK042066

OBK042103

OBK042263L

Type A

Type B

Features of your vehicle

984

Temperature unit conversion

You can switch the temperature mode between Centigrade to Fahrenheit as follows: While pressing the OFF button, press the MAX A/C button for 4 seconds or more. The display will change from Centigrade to Fahrenheit, or from Fahrenheit to Centigrade. If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, the temperature mode display will reset to Centigrade. Air intake control

This is used to select the outside (fresh) air position or recirculated air position. To change the air intake control posi- tion, push the control button.

Recirculated air position

The indicator light on the button is illuminated when the recirculated air position is selected. With the recirculated air position selected, air from the passenger compartment will be drawn through the heat- ing system and heated or cooled according to the function selected.

Outside (fresh) air position

The indicator light on the button is illuminated when the outside (fresh) air position is selected. With the outside (fresh) air position selected, air enters the vehicle from outside and is heated or cooled according to the function selected.

OBK042104

4 99

Features of your vehicle

NOTICE Prolonged operation of the heater in the recirculated air position (without air conditioning selected) may cause fogging of the windshield and side windows and the air within the pas- senger compartment may become stale. In addition, prolonged use of the air conditioning with the recirculated air position selected will result in excessively dry air in the passenger compartment.

Fan speed control The ignition switch must be in the ON position for fan operation. The fan speed control knob allows you to control the fan speed of the air flowing from the ventilation system. To change the fan speed, turn the knob to the right for higher speed or left for lower speed.

WARNING Continued use of the climate

control system in the recircu- lated air position may allow humidity to increase inside the vehicle which may fog the glass and obscure visibility.

Do not sleep in a vehicle with the air conditioning or heating system on. It may cause seri- ous harm or death due to a drop in the oxygen level and/or body temperature.

Continued use of the climate control system in the recircu- lated air position can cause drowsiness or sleepiness, and loss of vehicle control. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position as much as possible while driving.

OBK042105

OBK042264L

Type A

Type B

Features of your vehicle

1004

Air conditioning Press the A/C button to turn the air conditioning system on (indicator light will illuminate). Press the button again to turn the air conditioning sys- tem off.

OFF mode Press the OFF button to turn off the air climate control system. However, you can still operate the air intake buttons as long as the ignition switch is in the ON position.

System operation Ventilation 1. Set the mode to the position. 2. Set the air intake control to the

outside (fresh) air position. 3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position. 4. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

Heating 1. Set the mode to the position. 2. Set the air intake control to the

outside (fresh) air position. 3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position. 4. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed. 5. If dehumidified heating is desired,

turn the air conditioning system (if equipped) on.

If the windshield fogs up, set the mode to the or position.

OBK042251

OBK042106

OBK042266L

Type A

Type B

4 101

Features of your vehicle

Operation Tips

To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from entering the car through the ventilation system, temporarily set the air intake control to the recircu- lated air position. Be sure to return the control to the fresh air position when the irritation has passed to keep fresh air in the vehicle. This will help keep the driver alert and comfortable.

Air for the heating/cooling system is drawn in through the grilles just ahead of the windshield. Care should be taken that these are not blocked by leaves, snow, ice or other obstructions.

To prevent interior fog on the wind- shield, set the air intake control to the fresh air position and fan speed to the desired position, turn on the air conditioning system, and adjust the temperature control to desired temperature.

Air conditioning HYUNDAI Air Conditioning Systems are filled with environmentally friendly R-134a refrigerant. 1. Start the engine. Push the air con-

ditioning button. 2. Set the mode to the position. 3. Set the air intake control to the

outside air or recirculated air posi- tion.

4. Adjust the fan speed control and temperature control to maintain maximum comfort.

When maximum cooling is desired, set the temperature control to the extreme left position, set the mode control to the position, then set the fan speed control to the highest speed.

NOTICE When using the air conditioning

system, monitor the engine tem- perature gauge closely while driv- ing up hills or in heavy traffic when outside temperatures are high. Air conditioning system operation may cause engine over- heating. Continue to use the blow- er fan but turn the air condition- ing system off if the engine tem- perature gauge indicates engine overheating.

When opening the windows in humid weather air conditioning may create water droplets inside the vehicle. Since excessive water droplets may cause damage to electrical equipment, air condi- tioning should only be operated with the windows closed.

Features of your vehicle

1024

Air conditioning system operation tips

If the vehicle has been parked in direct sunlight during hot weather, open the windows for a short time to let the hot air inside the vehicle escape.

To help reduce moisture inside of the windows on rainy or humid days, decrease the humidity inside the vehicle by operating the air conditioning system.

During air conditioning system operation, you may occasionally notice a slight change in engine speed as the air conditioning com- pressor cycles. This is a normal system operation characteristic.

Use the air conditioning system every month, even if only for a few minutes, to ensure maximum sys- tem performance.

When using the air conditioning system, you may notice clear water dripping (or even puddling) on the ground under the passenger side of the vehicle. This is a normal sys- tem operation characteristic.

Operating the air conditioning sys- tem in the recirculated air position provides maximum cooling, how- ever, continual operation in this mode may cause the air inside the vehicle to become stale.

During cooling operation, you may occasionally notice a misty air flow because of rapid cooling and humid air intake. This is a normal system operation characteristic.

Climate control air filter (if equipped) The climate control air filter installed behind the glove box filters the dust or other pollutants that come into the vehicle from the outside through the heating and air conditioning system. If dust or other pollutants accumulate in the filter over a period of time, the air flow from the air vents may decrease, resulting in moisture accu- mulation on the inside of the wind- shield even when the outside (fresh) air position is selected. If this hap- pens, have the climate control air fil- ter replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

1LDA5047

Outside air

Recirculated air

Climate control air filter

Blower

Evaporator core

Heater core

4 103

Features of your vehicle

NOTICE Replace the filter according to the

Maintenance Schedule. If the car is being driven in severe conditions such as dusty or rough roads, more frequent air condi- tioner filter inspections and changes are required.

When the air flow rate suddenly decreases, the system should be checked at an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant and compressor lubricant When the amount of refrigerant is low, the performance of the air con- ditioning is reduced. Overfilling also has a negative impact on the air con- ditioning system. Therefore, if abnormal operation is found, have the system inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

NOTICE It is important when servicing the air conditioning system that the cor- rect type and amount of oil and refrigerant is used. Otherwise, dam- age to the compressor and abnormal system operation may occur.

WARNING The air conditioning system should be serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. Improper service may cause serious injury to the person per- forming the service.

Features of your vehicle

1044

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

1. Temperature control knob

2. AUTO (automatic control) button

3. OFF button

4. Mode selection button

5. Fan speed control button

6. Air conditioning button

7. Front windshield defrost button

8. Rear window defrost button

9. Air intake control button

10. Climate information screen selection

button

OBK042060/OBK042231

Type A

Type B

4 105

Features of your vehicle

1. Temperature control knob

2. AUTO (automatic control) button

3. OFF button

4. Mode selection button

5. Fan speed control button

6. Air conditioning button

7. Front windshield defrost button

8. Rear window defrost button

9. Air intake control button

10. Climate information screen selection

button

OBK042261L/OBK042262L

Type C

Type D

Features of your vehicle

1064

Automatic heating and air con- ditioning 1. Press the AUTO button. The modes, fan speeds, air intake and air-conditioning will be controlled automatically by temperature setting.

2. Set the temperature control knob to the desired position. If the temperature is set to the lowest setting (LO), the air condi- tioning system will operate contin- uously.

NOTICE To turn the automatic operation

off, select any button or switch of the following: - Mode selection button - Air conditioning button - Front windshield defroster but- ton - Air intake control button - Fan speed control switch The selected function will be con- trolled manually while other func- tions operate automatically.

For your convenience and to improve the effectiveness of the climate control, use the AUTO button and set the temperature to 73F (23C).

OBK042061

OBK042265L

Type A, B

Type C, D OBK042067

OBK042263L

Type A, B

Type C, D

4 107

Features of your vehicle

NOTICE Never place anything over the sen- sor located on the instrument panel to ensure better control of the heat- ing and cooling system.

Manual heating and air condi- tioning The heating and cooling system can be controlled manually by pushing buttons other than the AUTO button. In this case, the system works sequentially according to the order of buttons selected. When pressing any button except the AUTO button while using automatic operation, the functions not selected will be controlled automatically. 1. Start the engine. 2. Set the mode to the desired position.

For improving the effectiveness of heating and cooling; - Heating: - Cooling:

3. Set the temperature control to the desired position.

4. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position.

5. Set the fan speed control to the desired speed.

6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the air conditioning system on.

Press the AUTO button in order to convert to full automatic control of the system.

Mode selection The mode selection button controls the direction of the air flow through the ventilation system. The air flow outlet port is converted as follows:

OBK042232

Type A, C

Type B, D

OBK049062

Features of your vehicle

1084

Type A, C

Press

Press

Type B, D

Floor & Defrost (A, C, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor and the windshield with a small amount directed to the side window defrosters.

Floor-Level (C, A, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor, with a small amount of the air being directed to the windshield and side window defrosters.

Bi-Level (B, D, C)

Air flow is directed towards the face and the floor.

Face-Level (B, D, C)

Air flow is directed toward the upper body and face with a small amount of the air being directed to the floor. Additionally, each outlet can be con- trolled to direct the air discharged from the outlet.

Defrost-Level (A, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the windshield with a small amount of air directed to the side window defrosters.

OBK042065

4 109

Features of your vehicle

Instrument panel vents

The outlet vents can be opened or closed separately using the horizon- tal thumbwheel. To close the vent, rotate it to the fully down position. To open the vent, rotate it up to the desired position. Also, you can adjust the direction of air delivery from these vents using the vent control lever as shown. Temperature control

The temperature control knob allows you to control the temperature of the air flowing from the ventilation system. To change the air temperature in the passenger compartment, turn the knob to the right position for warm and hot air or left position for cooler air.

Temperature unit conversion

You can switch the temperature mode between Centigrade to Fahrenheit as follows; While pressing the OFF button, press the AUTO button for 4 seconds or more. The display will change from Centigrade to Fahrenheit, or from Fahrenheit to Centigrade. If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, the temperature mode display will reset to Centigrade.

OBK042067

OBK042263L

Type A, B

Type C, D OBK042066

Features of your vehicle

1104

Air intake control This is used to select the outside (fresh) air position or recirculated air position. To change the air intake control posi- tion, press the control button.

Recirculated air position

The indicator light on the button is illuminated when the recirculated air position is selected.

With the recirculated air position selected, air from the passenger compartment will be drawn through the heating system and heated or cooled according to the function selected.

Outside (fresh) air position

The indicator light on the button is illuminated when the outside (fresh) air position is selected.

With the outside (fresh) air position selected, air enters the vehicle from outside and is heated or cooled according to the function selected.

NOTICE Prolonged operation of the heater in the recirculated air position (without air conditioning selected) may cause fogging of the windshield and side windows and the air within the pas- senger compartment may become stale. In addition, prolonged use of the air conditioning with the recirculated air position selected will result in excessively dry air in the passenger compartment.

OBK042104

4 111

Features of your vehicle

Fan speed control The ignition switch must be in the ON position for fan operation. The fan speed control knob allows you to control the fan speed of the air flow- ing from the ventilation system. To change the fan speed, turn the knob to the right for higher speed or left for lower speed.

Air conditioning Press the A/C button to turn the air conditioning system on (indicator light will illuminate). Press the button again to turn the air conditioning system off.

OBK042106

OBK042266L

Type A, B

Type C, D OBK042105

OBK042264L

Type A, B

Type C, D

WARNING Continued use of the climate

control system operation in the recirculated air position may allow humidity to increase inside the vehicle which may fog the glass and obscure vis- ibility.

Do not sleep in a vehicle with the air conditioning or heating system on. It may cause seri- ous harm or death due to a drop in the oxygen level and/or body temperature.

Continued use of the climate control system operation in the recirculated air position can cause drowsiness or sleepiness, and loss of vehi- cle control. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position as much as possi- ble while driving.

Features of your vehicle

1124

OFF mode Press the OFF button to turn off the air climate control system. However, you can still operate the mode and air intake buttons as long as the igni- tion switch is in the ON position.

Climate information screen selec- tion (if equipped) Press the climate information screen selection button to display climate information on the screen.

System operation Ventilation 1. Set the mode to the position. 2. Set the air intake control to the

outside (fresh) air position. 3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position. 4. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

Heating 1. Set the mode to the position. 2. Set the air intake control to the

outside (fresh) air position. 3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position. 4. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed. 5. If dehumidified heating is desired,

turn the air conditioning system (if equipped) on.

If the windshield fogs up, set the mode to the or push the front defrost button ( ).

OBK042234

Type B, D

OBK042233

Type A, C

Type B, D

4 113

Features of your vehicle

Operation Tips

To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from entering the car through the ventilation system, temporarily set the air intake control to the recircu- lated air position. Be sure to return the control to the fresh air position when the irritation has passed to keep fresh air in the vehicle. This will help keep the driver alert and comfortable.

Air for the heating/cooling system is drawn in through the grilles just ahead of the windshield. Care should be taken that these are not blocked by leaves, snow, ice or other obstructions.

To prevent interior fog on the wind- shield, set the air intake control to the fresh air position and fan speed to the desired position, turn on the air conditioning system, and adjust the temperature control to desired temperature.

Air conditioning HYUNDAI Air Conditioning Systems are filled with environmentally friendly R-134a refrigerant. 1. Start the engine. Push the air con-

ditioning button. 2. Set the mode to the position. 3. Set the air intake control to the

outside air or recirculated air posi- tion.

4. Adjust the fan speed control and temperature control to maintain maximum comfort.

NOTICE When using the air conditioning

system, monitor the temperature gauge closely while driving up hills or in heavy traffic when out- side temperatures are high. Air conditioning system operation may cause engine overheating. Continue to use the blower fan but turn the air conditioning system off if the temperature gauge indi- cates engine overheating.

When opening the windows in humid weather air conditioning may create water droplets inside the vehicle. Since excessive water droplets may cause damage to electrical equipment, air condi- tioning should only be run with the windows closed.

Features of your vehicle

1144

Air conditioning system operation tips

If the vehicle has been parked in direct sunlight during hot weather, open the windows for a short time to let the hot air inside the vehicle escape.

To help reduce moisture inside of the windows on rainy or humid days, decrease the humidity inside the vehicle by operating the air conditioning system.

During air conditioning system operation, you may occasionally notice a slight change in engine speed as the air conditioning com- pressor cycles. This is a normal system operation characteristic.

Use the air conditioning system every month, even if only for a few minutes, to ensure maximum sys- tem performance.

When using the air conditioning system, you may notice clear water dripping (or even puddling) on the ground under the passenger side of the vehicle. This is a normal sys- tem operation characteristic.

Operating the air conditioning sys- tem in the recirculated air position provides maximum cooling, how- ever, continual operation in this mode may cause the air inside the vehicle to become stale.

During cooling operation, you may occasionally notice a misty air flow because of rapid cooling and humid air intake. This is a normal system operation characteristics.

Climate control air filter (if equipped) The climate control air filter installed behind the glove box filters the dust or other pollutants that come into the vehicle from the outside through the heating and air conditioning system. If dust or other pollutants accumulate in the filter over a period of time, the air flow from the air vents may decrease, resulting in moisture accu- mulation on the inside of the wind- shield even when the outside (fresh) air position is selected. If this hap- pens, have the climate control air fil- ter replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

1LDA5047

Outside air

Recirculated air

Climate control air filter

Blower

Evaporator core

Heater core

4 115

Features of your vehicle

NOTICE Replace the filter according to the

Maintenance Schedule. If the car is being driven in severe conditions such as dusty or rough roads, more frequent air condi- tioner filter inspections and changes are required.

When the air flow rate suddenly decreases, the system should be checked at an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant and compressor lubricant When the amount of refrigerant is low, the performance of the air con- ditioning is reduced. Overfilling also has a negative impact on the air con- ditioning system. Therefore, if abnormal operation is found, have the system inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

NOTICE It is important when servicing the air conditioning system that the cor- rect type and amount of oil and refrigerant is used. Otherwise, dam- age to the compressor and abnormal system operation may occur.

WARNING The air conditioning system should be serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. Improper service may cause serious injury to the person per- forming the service.

Features of your vehicle

1164

For maximum defrosting, set the temperature control to the extreme right/hot position and the fan speed control to the highest speed.

If warm air to the floor is desired while defrosting or defogging, set the mode to the floor-defrost posi- tion.

Before driving, clear all snow and ice from the windshield, rear win- dow, outside rear view mirrors, and all side windows.

Clear all snow and ice from the hood and air inlet in the cowl grill to improve heater and defroster effi- ciency and to reduce the probabili- ty of fogging up the inside of the windshield.

Manual climate control system To defog inside windshield 1. Set the fan speed to the desired

position. 2. Select desired temperature.

WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING

WARNING - Windshield heating

Do not use the or posi- tion during cooling operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temper- ature of the outside air and that of the windshield could cause the outer surface of the wind- shield to fog up, causing loss of visibility. In this case, set the mode selection button to the

position and fan speed con- trol knob to the lower speed.

OBK042107

OBK042269L

Type A, B

Type C, D

4 117

Features of your vehicle

3. Press the defrost button ( ). 4. The outside (fresh) air will be

selected automatically. If the position is selected, air condition- ing will also be selected automati- cally.

If the air conditioning and/or outside (fresh) air position are not selected automatically, press the correspon- ding button manually.

To defrost outside windshield 1. Set the fan speed to the highest

(extreme right) position. 2. Set the temperature to the

extreme hot position.

3. Press the defrost button ( ). 4. The outside (fresh) air and air con-

ditioning will be selected automat- ically.

If the position is selected, lower fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan speed.

OBK042108

OBK042270L

Type A, B

Type C, D

Features of your vehicle

1184

Automatic climate control sys- tem To defog inside windshield 1. Set the fan speed to the desired

position.

2. Select desired temperature. 3. Press the defrost button ( ). 4. The air conditioning will be turned

on according to the detected ambient temperature and outside (fresh) air position will be selected automatically.

If the air conditioning and outside (fresh) air position are not selected automatically, adjust the correspon- ding button manually. If the posi- tion is selected, lower fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan speed.

To defrost outside windshield 1. Set the fan speed to the highest

position. 2. Set the temperature to the

extreme hot position.

OBK042072

OBK042275L

Type A, B

Type C, D OBK042073

OBK042276L

Type A, B

Type C, D

4 119

Features of your vehicle

3. Press the defrost button ( ). 4. The air conditioning will be turned

on according to the detected ambient temperature and outside (fresh) air position will be selected automatically.

If the position is selected, lower fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan speed.

Defogging logic To reduce the possibility of fogging up the inside of the windshield, the air intake or air conditioning are con- trolled automatically according to certain conditions such as or position. To cancel or return the defogging logic, do the following.

Manual climate control system 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON

position. 2. Press the defrost button ( ).

OBK042109L

OBK042271L

Type A, B

Type C, D

Features of your vehicle

1204

3. While holding the air conditioning button (A/C) pressed, press the air intake control button at least 5 times within 3 seconds.

The A/C display blinks 3 times with 0.5 second of interval. It indicates that the defogging logic is canceled or returned to the programmed sta- tus.

If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, it resets to the defog logic status.

Automatic climate control system 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON

position. 2. Press the defrost button ( ).

3. While holding the air conditioning button (A/C) pressed, press the air intake control button at least 5 times within 3 seconds.

The A/C display blinks 3 times with 0.5 second of interval. It indicates that the defogging logic is canceled or returned to the programmed sta- tus.

If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, it resets to the defog logic status.

OBK042109L

OBK042274L

Type A, B

Type C, D

4 121

Features of your vehicle

Auto defogging system (Only for automatic climate con- trol system, if equipped) Auto defogging reduces the possibil- ity of fogging up the inside of the windshield by automatically sensing the moisture of inside the windshield. The auto defogging system operates when the climate control system is on.

This indicator illuminates when the auto defogging system senses the mois- ture of inside the wind- shield and operates.

If more moisture is in the vehicle, higher steps operate as follow.

Step 1 : Operating the air condition- ing

Step 2 : Outside air position Step 3 : Blowing air flow toward the

windshield Step 4 : Increasing air flow toward

the windshield

If your vehicle is equipped with the auto defogging system, it is automat- ically activated when the conditions are met. However, if you would like to cancel the auto defogging system, press the front defroster button 4 times within 2 seconds while press- ing the AUTO button. The indicator will blink 3 times to notify you that the system is cancelled. To use the auto defogging system again, follow the procedures mentioned above.

If the battery has been disconnected or discharged, it resets to the auto defogging status.

NOTICE If the A/C off is manually selected while the auto defogging system is on, the auto defogging indicator will blink 3 times to give notice that the A/C off can not be selected.

OBK042235

CAUTION Do not remove the sensor cover located on the upper end of the driver side windshield glass. Damage to the system parts could occur and may not be cov- ered by your vehicle warranty.

Features of your vehicle

1224

Center console storage These compartments can be used to store small items required by the driver or front passenger. To open the center console storage, pull up the lever.

Glove box To open the glove box, push the but- ton (1) and the glove box will auto- matically open (2). Close the glove box after use.

STORAGE COMPARTMENTS

WARNING - Flammable materials

Do not store cigarette lighters, propane cylinders, or other flammable/explosive materials in the vehicle. These items may catch fire and/or explode if the vehicle is exposed to hot tem- peratures for extended periods.

CAUTION To avoid possible theft, do not

leave valuables in the storage compartments.

Always keep the storage com- partment covers closed while driving. Do not attempt to place so many items in the storage compartment that the storage compartment cover cannot close securely. OBK049076OBK049075

WARNING To reduce the risk of injury in an accident or sudden stop, always keep the glove box door closed while driving.

CAUTION Do not keep food in the glove box for a long time.

4 123

Features of your vehicle

Sunglass holder To open the sunglass holder, press the cover and the holder will slowly open. Place your sunglasses in the compartment door with the lenses facing out. Push to close.

OBK049077N

WARNING Do not keep objects except

sunglasses inside the sun- glass holder. Such objects can be thrown from the holder in the event of a sudden stop or an accident, possibly injur- ing the passengers in the vehicle.

Do not open the sunglass holder while the vehicle is moving. The rear view mirror of the vehicle can be blocked by an open sunglass holder.

Do not put the glasses forcibly into a sunglass holder to prevent breakage or defor- mation of glasses. It may cause personal injury if you try to open it forcibly when the glasses are jammed in holder.

Features of your vehicle

1244

Cigarette lighter (if equipped) For the cigarette lighter to work, the ignition switch must be in the ACC position or the ON position. To open the cover, push the cover forward. (if equipped) To use the cigarette lighter, push it all the way into its socket. When the ele- ment has heated, the lighter will pop out to the ready position. If it is necessary to replace the ciga- rette lighter, use only a genuine HYUNDAI replacement or its approved equivalent.

Ashtray (if equipped)

To open the cover, pull up the cover. To clean the ashtray, remove the cover by turning it clockwise.

INTERIOR FEATURES

OBK042078 CAUTION Only a genuine HYUNDAI lighter should be used in the cigarette lighter socket. The use of plug- in accessories (shavers, hand- held vacuums, and coffee pots, etc.) may damage the socket or cause electrical failure.

WARNING Do not hold the lighter in after

it is already heated because it will overheat.

If the lighter does not pop out within 30 seconds, remove it to prevent overheating.

WARNING - Ashtray use Do not use the vehicles ash-

trays as waste receptacles. Putting lit cigarettes or match-

es in an ashtray with other combustible materials may cause a fire.

OBK049110

4 125

Features of your vehicle

Cup holder

Cups or small beverage cans may be placed in the cup holders.

Sunvisor Use the sunvisor to shield direct light through the front or side windows. To use the sunvisor, pull it down- ward. To use the sunvisor for the side win- dow, pull it downward, unsnap it from the bracket (1) and swing it to the side (2). To use the vanity mirror, pull down the visor and slide the mirror cover (3). Adjust the sunvisor extension for- ward or backward (4). (if equipped) The ticket holder (5) is provided for holding a tollgate ticket.

WARNING - Hot liquids Do not place uncovered cups

of hot liquid in the cup holder while the vehicle is in motion. If the hot liquid spills, you could be burned. Such a burn to the driver could lead to loss of control of the vehicle.

To reduce the risk of personal injury in the event of sudden stop or collision, do not place uncovered or unsecured bot- tles, glasses, cans, etc., in the cup holder while the vehicle is in motion.

WARNING Keep cans or bottles out of direct sun light and do not put them in a vehicle that is heated up. It may explode.

CAUTION When cleaning spilled liquid, do not dry the cup holder at high temperatures. This may damage the chrome part of the cup holder.

OBK049079 OEN046157

Features of your vehicle

1264

Power outlet The power outlet is designed to pro- vide power for mobile telephones or other devices designed to operate with vehicle electrical systems. The devices should draw less than 10 amps with the engine running.

WARNING Close the vanity mirror cover

securely and return the sunvi- sor to its original position after use.

For your safety, don't obstruct your field of vision when using the sunvisor.

OBK049080

CAUTION Use the power outlet only when

the engine is running and remove the accessory plug after use. Using the accessory plug for prolonged periods of time with the engine off could cause the battery to discharge.

(Continued)

(Continued) Only use 12V electric acces-

sories which are less than 10A in electric capacity.

Adjust the air-conditioner or heater to the lowest operating level when using the power outlet.

Close the cover when not in use.

Some electronic devices can cause electronic interference when plugged into a vehicles power outlet. These devices may cause excessive audio static and malfunctions in other electronic systems or devices used in your vehicle.

WARNING Do not put a finger or a foreign element (pin, etc.) into a power outlet and do not touch with a wet hand. You may get an elec- tric shock.

4 127

Features of your vehicle

Digital clock Whenever the battery terminals or related fuses are disconnected, you must reset the time.

Setup the clock With audio off

1. Press the [SETUP] or [Clock] but- ton(1) until the clock of the display blinks.

2. Set the clock by turning the knob(2) and press it.

With audio on

1. Press the [SETUP] or [Clock] but- ton (1).

2. Select the clock menu by turning the knob (2).

3. Set the clock by turning the knob(2) and press it.

Outside thermometer The current outside temperature is displayed in 1F (1C) increments. The temperature range is between - 30F~140F (-30C ~ 60C). The outside temperature on the dis- play may not change immediately like a general thermometer to pre- vent the driver from being inattentive.

WARNING Do not adjust the clock while driving. You may lose your steering control and cause an accident that results in severe personal injury or death.

OBK042111 OBK049112N

Features of your vehicle

1284

Floor mat anchor(s) When using a floor mat on the front floor carpet, make sure it attaches to the floor mat anchor(s) in your vehi- cle. This keeps the floor mat from sliding forward.

Luggage net (holder) (if equipped) To keep items from shifting in the cargo area, you can use the 4 hold- ers located in the cargo area to attach the luggage net. If necessary, contact your authorized HYUNDAI dealer to obtain a luggage net.

OXM049228

Type A Type B

WARNING The following must be observed when installing ANY floor mat to the vehicle. Ensure that the floor mats are securely attached to the vehi- cle's floor mat anchor(s) before driving the vehicle. Do not use ANY floor mat that

cannot be firmly attached to the vehicle's floor mat anchors.

Do not stack floor mats on top of one another (e.g. all-weath- er rubber mat on top of a car- peted floor mat). Only a single floor mat should be installed in each position.

IMPORTANT - Your vehicle was manufactured with driver's side floor mat anchors that are designed to securely hold the floor mat in place. To avoid any interference with pedal opera- tion, HYUNDAI recommends that only the HYUNDAI floor mat designed for use in your vehicle be installed.

OBK049132

4 129

Features of your vehicle

Aux, USB and iPod * port (if equipped) If your vehicle has an aux and/or USB(universal serial bus) port or iPod port, you can: - use an aux cable to connect audio

devices to the aux port or - connect a USB to the USB port or - use a Hyundai iPod cable to con-

nect your iPod.

NOTICE When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet, noise may occur during playback. If this happens, use the power source of the portable audio device.

* iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc.

Navigation (if equipped) For detail, refer to the Navigation manual.

CAUTION To prevent damage to the goods or the vehicle, care should be taken when carrying fragile or bulky objects in the luggage compartment.

WARNING Avoid eye injury. DO NOT over- stretch the luggage net, ALWAYS keep your face and body out of the luggage nets recoil path. DO NOT use when the strap has visible signs of wear or damage.

OBK042092 OBK042252

Features of your vehicle

1304

NOTICE If you install an after market HID

head lamp, your vehicle's audio and electronic device may mal- function.

Prevent chemicals such as per- fume, cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand cleaner, and air freshener from contacting the interior parts because they may cause damage or discoloration.

Antenna Glass antenna (if equipped) When the radio power switch is turned on while the ignition switch is in either the ON or ACC position, your car will receive both AM and FM broadcast signals through the anten- na in the rear window glass.

Shark fin antenna (if equipped) The shark fin antenna will receive the transmit data.

CAUTION Do not clean the inside of the

rear window glass with a cleaner or use a scraper to remove foreign deposits as this may cause damage to the antenna elements.

Avoid adding metallic coating (such as Ni, Cd, and so on). These can disturb receiving broadcast signals.

AUDIO SYSTEM

OBK042090

OBH048206

Type A

Type B

4 131

Features of your vehicle

Steering wheel audio controls (if equipped) The steering wheel may incorporate audio control buttons.

VOLUME (VOL +/-) (1) Push the lever upward (+) to

increase the volume. Push the lever downward (-) to

decrease the volume.

SEEK/PRESET ( / ) (2) If the SEEK/PRESET button is pressed for 0.8 second or more, it will work as follows in each mode.

RADIO mode

It will function as the AUTO SEEK select button. It will SEEK until you release the button.

CD/USB/iPod mode

It will function as the FF/REW button.

If the SEEK/PRESET button is pressed for less than 0.8 second, it will work as follows in each mode.

RADIO mode

It will function as the PRESET STA- TION select buttons.

CD/USB/iPod mode

It will function as the TRACK UP/DOWN button.

MODE (3) Press the MODE button to select Radio, CD (Compact Disc).

MUTE ( ) (4, if equipped) Press the button to mute the

sound. Press the button to turn off the

microphone during a telephone call.

Detailed information for audio control buttons is included in the following pages in this section.

CAUTION Do not operate audio remote control buttons simultaneously.

OBK042091L

Features of your vehicle

1324

How vehicle audio works AM and FM radio signals are broad- cast from transmitter towers located around your city. They are intercept- ed by the radio antenna on your vehi- cle. This signal is then received by the radio and sent to your vehicle speakers.

When a strong radio signal has reached your vehicle, the precise engineering of your audio system ensures the best possible quality reproduction. However, in some cases the signal coming to your vehi- cle may not be strong and clear. This can be due to factors such as the distance from the radio station, closeness of other strong radio sta- tions or the presence of buildings, bridges or other large obstructions in the area.

AM broadcasts can be received at greater distances than FM broad- casts. This is because AM radio waves are transmitted at low fre- quencies. These long, low frequency radio waves can follow the curvature of the earth rather than travelling straight out into the atmosphere. In addition, they curve around obstruc- tions so that they can provide better signal coverage.

JBM002

AM radio reception

JBM001

FM radio reception

4 133

Features of your vehicle

FM broadcasts are transmitted at high frequencies and do not bend to follow the earth's surface. Because of this, FM broadcasts generally begin to fade at short distances from the station. Also, FM signals are eas- ily affected by buildings, mountains, or other obstructions. These can result in certain listening conditions which might lead you to believe a problem exists with your radio. The following conditions are normal and do not indicate radio trouble:

Fading - As your car moves away from the radio station, the signal will weaken and sound will begin to fade. When this occurs, we sug- gest that you select another stronger station.

Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or large obstructions between the transmitter and your radio can dis- turb the signal causing static or fluttering noises to occur. Reducing the treble level may lessen this effect until the disturbance clears.

Station Swapping - As a FM signal weakens, another more powerful signal near the same frequency may begin to play. This is because your radio is designed to lock onto the clearest signal. If this occurs, select another station with a stronger signal.

Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals being received from sever- al directions can cause distortion or fluttering. This can be caused by a direct and reflected signal from the same station, or by signals from two stations with close fre- quencies. If this occurs, select another station until the condition has passed.

JBM005JBM003

FM radio station

JBM004

Features of your vehicle

1344

Satellite radio reception You may experience difficulties in receiving XM satellite radio signals in the following situations.

If you are driving in a tunnel or a covered parking area.

If you are driving beneath the top level of a multi-level freeway.

If you drive under a bridge. If you are driving next to a tall vehi-

cle (such as a truck or a bus) that blocks the signal.

If you are driving in a valley where the surrounding hills or peaks block the signal from the satellite.

If you are driving on a mountain road where is the signal blocked by mountains.

If you are driving in an area with tall trees that block the signal (10m or more), for example on an road that goes through a dense forest.

The signal can become weak in some areas that are not covered by the XM repeater network.

NOTE: There may be other unforeseen circumstances leading to recep- tion problems with the XM satel- lite radio signal.

SATELITE2 SATELITE1

4 135

Features of your vehicle

Using a cellular phone or a two- way radio When a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle, noise may be produced from the audio equipment. This does not mean that something is wrong with the audio equipment. In such a case, use the cellular phone at a place as far as possible from the audio equipment.

Care of discs If the temperature inside the car is

too high, open the car windows for ventilation before using your car audio.

It is illegal to copy and use MP3/WMA/WAVE files without per- mission. Use CDs that are created only by lawful means.

Do not apply volatile agents such as benzene and thinner, normal clean- ers and magnetic sprays made for analogue disc onto CDs.

To prevent the disc surface from getting damaged. Hold and carry CDs by the edges or the edges of the center hole only.

Clean the disc surface with a piece of soft cloth before playback (wipe it from the center to the outside edge).

Do not damage the disc surface or attach pieces of sticky tape or paper onto it.

Make sure on undesirable matter other than CDs are inserted into the CD player (Do not insert more than one CD at a time).

Keep CDs in their cases after use to protect them from scratches or dirt.

Depending on the type of CD- R/CD-RW CDs, certain CDs may not operate normally according to manufacturing companies or mak- ing and recording methods. In such circumstances, if you still continue to use those CDs, they may cause the malfunction of your car audio system.

NOTICE - Playing an Incompatible Copy Protected Audio CD

Some copy protected CDs, which do not comply with the international audio CD standards (Red Book), may not play on your car audio. Please note that if you try to play copy protected CDs and the CD player does not perform correctly the CDs maybe defective, not the CD player.

WARNING Do not use a cellular phone while driving. Stop at a safe location to use a cellular phone.

WARNING When using a communication system such a cellular phone or a radio set inside the vehicle, a separate external antenna must be fitted. When a cellular phone or a radio set is used with an internal antenna alone, it may interfere with the vehicle's elec- trical system and adversely affect safe operation of the vehi- cle.

Features of your vehicle

1364

CAUTION Operating the device while

driving could lead to acci- dents due to a lack of atten- tion to external surroundings. First park the vehicle before operating the device.

Adjust the volume to levels that allow the driver to hear sounds from outside of the vehicle. Driving in a state where external sounds cannot be heard may lead to acci- dents.

Pay attention to the volume setting when turning the device on. A sudden output of extreme volume upon turning the device on could lead to hearing impairment. (Adjust the volume to a suitable levels before turning off the device.)

(Continued)

WARNING Do not stare at the screen while

driving. Staring at the screen for prolonged periods of time could lead to traffic accidents.

Do not disassemble, assemble, or modify the audio system. Such acts could result in acci- dents, fire, or electric shock.

Using the phone while driving may lead to a lack of attention of traffic conditions and increase the likelihood of acci- dents. Use the phone feature after parking the vehicle.

Heed caution not to spill water or introduce foreign objects into the device. Such acts could lead to smoke, fire, or product malfunction.

(Continued)

(Continued) Please refrain from use if the

screen is blank or no sound can be heard as these signs may indicate product malfunc- tion. Continued use in such conditions could lead to acci- dents(fires, electric shock) or product malfunctions.

Do not touch the antenna dur- ing thunder or lightening as such acts may lead to light- ning induced electric shock.

Do not stop or park in parking- restricted areas to operate the product. Such acts could lead to traffic accidents.

Use the system with the vehi- cle ignition turned on. Prolonged use with the igni- tion turned off could result in battery discharge.

4 137

Features of your vehicle

(Continued) Turn on the car ignition before

using this device. Do not oper- ate the audio system for long periods of time with the igni- tion turned off as such opera- tions may lead to battery dis- charge.

Do not subject the device to severe shock or impact. Direct pressure onto the front side of the monitor may cause dam- age to the LCD or touch screen.

When cleaning the device, make sure to turn off the device and use a dry and smooth cloth. Never use tough materials, chemical cloths, or solvents (alcohol, benzene, thinners, etc.) as such materials may damage the device panel or cause color/quality deterioration

(Continued)

(Continued) When cleaning the device,

make sure to turn off the device and use a dry and smooth cloth. Never use tough materials, chemical cloths, or solvents (alcohol, benzene, thinners, etc.) as such materials may damage the device panel or cause color/quality deterioration

Do not place beverages close to the audio system. Spilling beverages may lead to system malfunction.

In case of product malfunc- tion, please contact your place of purchase or After Service center.

Placing the audio system within an electromagnetic environment may result in noise interference.

(Continued)

(Continued) If the air freshener gets on to

audio system or plastics, then it could cause the crack due to its chemical reaction. Please be careful when you use air fresheners near those prod- ucts. Especially be careful when you have attached air freshener on the air vents.The liquid can be flow down.

Features of your vehicle

1384

CD Changer : AC6B0DKKN

4 139

Features of your vehicle

---

NO Iogo will be shown if the Bluetooth Wireless Technology feature is not supported.

CD Player : AC180DKAN / AC1B0DKAN / AC180DKKN / AC1B0DKKN / AC1B1DKAN

Features of your vehicle

1404

Using RADIO, SETUP, VOLUME and AUDIO CONTROL

1. Button The FM/AM button toggles between FM and AM. Listed below are the paths as the system switches from FM to AM and back to FM. FM/AM : FM1FM2AMFM1...

2. Button & Knob Turns the audio system on/off when

the ignition switch is on ACC or ON. If the knob is turned clockwise/

counterclockwise, the volume will increase /decrease.

3. Button When the button is

pressed, it increases the band fre- quency to automatically select channel. Stops at the previous fre- quency if no channel is found.

When the button is press- ed, it reduces the band frequency to automatically select channel. Stops at the previous frequency if no channel is found.

4. Button Turn ON/OFF the displayed data and light on LCD. When LCD Display is turned OFF, Press any button to turn ON display.

5. Button When the button is pressed, it auto-

matically scans the radio stations upwards.

The SCAN feature steps through eachstation, starting from the initial station, for 5 seconds.

Press the button again to stop the scan feature and to listen to the currently selected channel.

6. Button Press this button to turn to the SETUP adjustment mode.

AC180DKAN/AC1B0DKAN

If no action is taken for 8 seconds after pressing the button, it will return to the play mode. (After entering SETUP mode)

The setup changes in the order of Scroll SDVC Media Clock XM AC180DKAN/ AC1B0DKAN/

AC6B0DKKN/AC1B1DKAN

The setup Change in the order of Scroll SDVC Media XM

Clock Phone

SETUP CLOCK

SCAN

SCAN

DISP

SEEK TRACK

SEEK TRACK

SEEK

VOLPWR

FM/AM

4 141

Features of your vehicle

SCROLL Select whether long file names are scrolled continuously (On) or just once (Off).

SDVC (Speed Dependent Volume Control)

Select this item to turn the SDVC fea- ture On or Off. If it is turned ON, vol- ume level is adjusted automatically according to the vehicle speed.

Media Select default display of MP3 play information. Folder/File or Artist/Title can be selected.

XM Select default display of XM mode. Cat./Ch. or Artist/Title can be selected

PHONE (if available) Select this item to enter SETUP mode. Refer to PHONE OPERA- TION section for detailed information.

PHONE menu is not available if the audio does not support Bluetooth Wireless Technology features.

Clock Select this item to enter Clock setup mode. Adjust the hour and press the

button to set. Adjust the minute and press the button to complete and exit from clock adjustment mode. Pressing the button while in power off, screen will allow the user to make immediately adjustments to the clock.

SETUP CLOCK

ENTER

ENTER

Features of your vehicle

1424

Press the button for more than 3 seconds while in power off/on, you can enter the time setup screen directly.

7. PRESET Buttons Push ~ buttons less than 0.8 second to play the channel saved in each button. Push Preset button for 0.8 second or longer to save cur- rent channel to the respective button with a beep.

8. & Knob Rotate the knob clockwise or coun- terclock wise to increase or decrease from current frequency. (AM 10 kHz, FM 200 MHz) Pressing the knob changes the BASS, MIDDLE, TREBLE, FADER and BALANCE TUNE mode. The mode selected is shown on the dis- play. After selecting each mode, rotate the Audio control knob clock- wise or counterclockwise.

BASS Control To increase the BASS, rotate the knob clockwise, while to decrease the BASS, rotate the knob counter- clockwise.

MIDDLE Control To increase the MIDDLE, rotate the knob clockwise, while to decrease the MIDDLE, rotate the knob coun- terclockwise.

TREBLE Control To increase the TREBLE, rotate the knob clockwise, while to decrease the TREBLE, rotate the knob coun- terclockwise.

FADER Control Turn the control knob clockwise to emphasize rear speaker sound(front speaker sound will be attenuated). When the control knob is turned counterclockwise, front speaker sound will be emphasized(rear speaker sound will be attenuated).

BALANCE Control Rotate the knob clockwise to empha- size right speaker sound(left speaker sound will be attenuated). When the control knob is turned counter clockwise, left speaker sound will be emphasized(right speaker sound will be attenuated).

AUDIOTUNE

61

SETUP CLOCK

4 143

Features of your vehicle

Using CD Player

1. Button If the CD is loaded, turns to CD mode. If no CD, it displays No Media for 3 seconds and returns to the previous mode.

2. Button Press button for less than

0.8 seconds to play from the begin- ning of current song.

Press button for less than 0.8 seconds and press again within 1 second to play the previous song.

Press button for 0.8 sec- onds or longer to initiate reverse direction high speed sound search of current song.

Press button for less than 0.8 seconds to play the next song.

Press button for 0.8 sec- onds or longer to initiate forward direction high speed sound search of current song.

3. Button Play each song in the CD for 10 sec- onds. To cancel SCAN Play, press this but- ton again.

4. Button Displays the information of the cur- rent CD TRACK(FILE) as below when the button is pressed each time. Audio CD(CDDA) : Disc Title, Disc

Artist, Track Title, Track Artist, Total Track.

MP3 CD(MP3/WMA) : File Name, Title, Artist, Album, Folder, Total File. (not displayed if the informa- tion is not available on the DISC.)

INFO

SCAN

SEEK TRACK

SEEK TRACK

SEEK TRACK

SEEK TRACK

SEEK TRACK

TRACK

CD

Features of your vehicle

1444

5. Button (REPEAT) Press this button for less than 0.8 second to activate RPT mode and more than 0.8 seconds to activate FLD.RPT mode. RPT : Only a track(file) is repeated-

ly played back. FLD.RPT (MP3/WMA Only) : Only

files in a folder are repeatedly played back.

6. Button (RANDOM) Press this button for less than 0.8 seconds to activate RDM mode and more than 0.8 seconds to activate ALL RDM mode. RDM : Only files/tracks in a

folder/disc are played back in a random sequence.

ALL RDM (MP3/WMA Only) : All files in a disc are played back in the random sequence.

7. Button (CD Changer Model)

Preset Change Button Changes disc to the previous disc.

Preset Change Button Changes disc to the next disc.

8. CD Indicator icon When car ignition switch is ACC or ON and if the CD is loaded, this indi- cator icon is on. If the CD is ejected the icon is off. CD Changer Model

6 DISC

5 DISC

DISC

2 RDM

1 RPT

CAUTION Do not insert a CD if CD indica- tor is lit.

4 145

Features of your vehicle

9. Button (CD Eject) Push button for less than 0.8 seconds to eject the CD during CD playback. This button is enabled when ignition switch is off.

ALL EJECT Press this button for more than 0.8 seconds to eject all discs inside the deck in respective order. CD Changer Model

10. CD Slot Please face printed side upward and gently push in. When the ignition switch is on ACC or ON and power is off, power is automatically turned on if the CD is loaded. This CDP sup- ports only 12cm CD. If VCD, Data CD are loaded, "Reading Error" mes- sage will appear and CD will be ejected.

11. Button Push button to load CDs to available CDC deck (from 1~6). Push

button for more than 2 sec- onds to load into all available decks. The last CD will play. 10 seconds idle status will disable loading process. CD Changer Model

12. Button

Press button to move to child folder of the current folder and display the first song in the folder.

Press knob to move to the folder displayed. It will play the first song in the folder.

Press button to move to parent folder of the current folder and display the first song in the folder. Press knob to move to the folder displayed.

CAT FOLDER

CAT FOLDER

FOLDER

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

Features of your vehicle

1464

13. & Knob Turn this knob clockwise to browse

songs after current song, or coun- terclockwise to browse songs before current song. To play the displayed song, press the knob.

Pressing this knob without turning enters to AUDIO CONTROL mode.

NOTE: Order of playing files (folders) : 1. Song playing order : to

sequentially.

2. Folder playing order : If no song file is contained in

the folder, that folder is not dis- played.

ENTERTUNE

4 147

Features of your vehicle

CAUTION IN USING USB DEVICE

To use an external USB device, make sure the device is not connected when start- ing up the vehicle. Connect the device after starting up.

If you start the engine when the USB device is connected, it may damage the USB device. (USB flashdrives are very sensitive to electric shock.)

If the engine is started up or turned off while the external USB device is connected, the external USB device may not work.

It may not play inauthentic MP3 or WMA files. 1) It can only play MP3 files

with the compression rate between 8Kbps~320Kbps.

2) It can only play WMA music files with the compression rate between 8Kbps ~ 320Kbps.

(Continued)

(Continued) Take precautions for static

electricity when connecting or disconnecting the external USB device.

An encrypted MP3 PLAYER is not recognizable.

Depending on the condition of the external USB device, the connected external USB device can be unrecognizable.

When the formatted byte/sec- tor setting of External USB device is not either 512BYTE or 2048BYTE, then the device will not be recognized.

Use only a USB device format- ted to FAT 12/16/32.

USB devices without USB I/F authentication may not be rec- ognizable.

Make sure the USB connec- tion terminal does not come in contact with the human body or other objects.

(Continued)

(Continued) If you repeatedly connect or

disconnect the USB device in a short period of time, it may break the device.

You may hear a strange noise when connecting or discon- necting a USB device.

If you disconnect the external USB device during playback in USB mode, the external USB device can be damaged or may malfunction.Therefore, discon- nect the external USB device when the audio is turned off or in another mode. (e.g, Radio or CD)

Depending on the type and capacity of the external USB device or the type of the files stored in the device, there is a difference in the time taken for recognition of the device.

Do not use the USB device for purposes other than playing music files.

(Continued)

Features of your vehicle

1484

(Continued) Charging through the USB

may not be supported in some mobile devices.

A car exclusive cable (Provided or sold separately) is required to use the iPod.

Some non-standard USB devices (METAL COVER TYPE USB) can be unrecognizable.

Some USB flash memory readers (such as CF, SD, microSD, etc.) or external-HDD type devices can be unrecog- nizable.

Music files protected by DRM (DIGITAL RIGHTS MANAGE- MENT) are not recognizable.

The data in the USB memory may be lost while using this audio. Always back up impor- tant data on a personal stor- age device.

(Continued)

(Continued) Playing videos through the USB

is not supported. Use of USB accessories such

as rechargers or heaters using USB I/F may lower per- formance or cause trouble.

If you use devices such as a USB hub purchased separate- ly, the vehicles audio system may not recognize the USB device. In that case, connect the USB device directly to the multimedia terminal of the vehicle.

If the USB device is divided by logical drives, only the music files on the highest-priority drive are recognized by car audio.

Devices such as MP3 Player/ Cellular phone/Digital camera can be unrecognizable by standard USB I/F can be unrecognizable.

(Continued)

(Continued) A SD-to-USB adapter may not

work with the car audio sys- tem.

Please avoid using USB mem- ory products which can be used as key chains or cellular phone accessories as they could cause damage to the USB jack. Please make certain only to use plug type connec- tor products as shown below.

4 149

Features of your vehicle

Using USB device

1. Button (USB or AUX) If the auxiliary device is connected, it switches to AUX or USB mode to play the sound from the auxiliary player. If there is no auxiliary device, then the message No Media will become displayed on the LCD for 3 seconds and returns to previous mode.

2. Button Press button for less than

0.8 seconds to play from the begin- ning of current song.

Press button for less than 0.8 seconds and press again with- in 1 second to play the previous song.

Press button for 0.8 sec- onds or longer to initiate reverse direction high speed sound search of current song.

Press button for less than 0.8 seconds to play the next song.

Press button for 0.8 sec- onds or longer to initiate forward direction high speed sound search of current song.

3. Button Plays each song in the USB device for 10 seconds. To cancel SCAN Play, press this but- ton again.

4. Button Displays the information of the file currently played in the order of File Name, Title, Artist, Album, Folder, Total File, Normal Display. (Displays no information if the file has no song information.)

INFO

SCAN

SEEK TRACK

SEEK TRACK

SEEK TRACK

SEEK TRACK

SEEK TRACK

TRACK

MEDIA

Features of your vehicle

1504

5. Button (REPEAT) Press this button for less than 0.8 seconds to activate RPT mode and more than 0.8 seconds to activate FLD.RPT mode. RPT : Only a file is repeatedly

playedback. FLD.RPT : Only files in a folder are

repeatedly played back.

6. Button (RANDOM) Press this button for less than 0.8 seconds to activate RDM mode and more than 0.8 seconds to activate ALL RDM mode. FLD.RDM : Only files in a folder are

played back in a random sequence.

ALL RDM : All files in a USB mem- ory are played back in the random sequence.

7. Button Press button to move to

child folder of the current folder and display the first song in the folder.

Press knob to move to the folder displayed. It will play the first song in the folder.

Press button to move to parent folder display the first song in the folder. Press knob to move to the folder displayed.

8. & Knob Turn this knob clockwise to browse

songs after current song, or count- er clockwise to browse songs before current song. To play the displayed song, press the knob.

Pressing this knob without turning enters to AUDIO CONTROL mode.

ENTERFILE

CAT FOLDER

CAT FOLDER

FOLDER

2 RDM

1 RPT

4 151

Features of your vehicle

NOTICE FOR USING THE iPod DEVICE

Some iPod models might not support the communication protocol and the files will not be played. Supported iPod models: - iPod Mini - iPod 4th(Photo) ~ 6th(Classic)

generation - iPod Nano 1st~4th generation - iPod Touch 1st~2nd generation

The order of search or playback of songs in the iPod can be dif- ferent from the order searched in the audio system.

If the iPod disabled due to its own malfunction, reset the iPod. (Reset: Refer to iPod manual)

An iPod may not operate nor- mally on low battery.

(Continued)

(Continued) Some iPod devices, such as the

iPhone, can be connected through the Bluetooth

Wireless Technology interface. The device must have audio Bluetooth Wireless Technology capability (such as for stereo headphone Bluetooth Wireless Technology). The device can play, but it will not be controlled by the audio system.

CAUTION IN USING THE iPod DEVICE

The Hyundai iPod Power Cable is needed in order to operate iPod with the audio buttons on the audio system. The USB cable provided by Apple may cause malfunction and should not be used for Hyundai vehicles. The Hyundai iPod Power

Cable may be purchased through your Hyundai Dealership.

When connecting iPod with the iPod Power Cable, insert the connector to the multime- dia socket completely. If not inserted completely, commu- nications between iPod and audio may be interrupted.

(Continued)

Features of your vehicle

1524

(Continued) When adjusting the sound

effects of the iPod and the audio system, the sound effects of both devices will overlap and might reduce or distort the quality of the sound.

Deactivate (turn off) the equal- izer function of an iPod when adjusting the audio systems volume, and turn off the equal- izer of the audio system when using the equalizer of an iPod.

When the iPod cable is con- nected, the system can be switched to AUX mode even without iPod device and may cause noise. Disconnect the iPod cable when you are not using the iPod device.

(Continued)

(Continued) When not using iPod with car

audio, detach the iPod cable from iPod. Otherwise, iPod may remain in accessory mode, and may not work prop- erly.

When connecting the iPod, use the USB/AUX terminals.

When disconnecting the iPod, disconnect both the USB/AUX terminal.

The iPod exclusive cable must be connected to both the USB/AUX terminals for iPod charging and operations to be supported.

Detachable USB/AUX All-in-one USB/AUX

4 153

Features of your vehicle

Using iPod

iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc.

1. Button If iPod is connected, it switches to the iPod mode from the previous mode to play the song files stored in the iPod. If there is no iPod connected, then it displays the message "No Media" for 3 seconds and returns to the previ- ous mode.

2. Button Press button for less than

0.8 seconds to play from the begin- ning of current song.

Press button for less than 0.8 seconds and press again within 1 second to play the previous song.

Press button for 0.8 sec- onds or longer to initiate reverse direction high speed sound search of current song.

Press button for less than 0.8 seconds to play the next song.

Press button for 0.8 sec- onds or longer to initiate forward direction high speed sound search of current song.

3. Button Displays the information of the file currently played in the order of Title, Artist, Album, Normal Display. (Displays no information if the file has no song information.)

INFO

SEEK TRACK

SEEK TRACK

SEEK TRACK

SEEK TRACK

SEEK TRACK

TRACK

MEDIA

Features of your vehicle

1544

4. Button (REPEAT) Repeats the song currently played.

5. Button (RANDOM) Press this button for less than 0.8

seconds to shuffle order of all songs in current category. (Song Random)

Press this button for 0.8 seconds or longer to shuffle order of albums in current category. (Album Random)

To cancel RANDOM Play, press this button again.

6. Category Button Moves to the upper category from currently played category of the iPod.

To move to (play) the category (song) displayed, press

button. You will be able to search through the lower category of the selected category.

7. & Knob When you rotate the knob clockwise, it will display the songs (category) aheadof the song currently played (category in the same level). Also, when you rotate the knob coun- terclockwise, it will display the songs (category) before the song currently played (category in the same level). To listen to the song displayed in the song category, press the knob to skip to and play the selected song.

ENTERFILE

CAT FOLDER

CAT FOLDER

2 RDM

1 RPT

4 155

Features of your vehicle

Using XM satellite Radio Your vehicle is equipped with 3 months complimentary period of XM Satellite Radio. XM provides access to over 130 channels of music, infor- mation, and entertainment program- ming.

1. Button Turns to XM Satellite Radio Mode. XM mode toggles in order to XM1XM2 XM3XM1... when the button is pressed each time.

2. Button Push button for less than

0.8 second to select previous channel.

Push button for 0.8 sec- ond or longer to continuously move to previous channel.

Push button for less than 0.8 second to select next channel.

Push button for 0.8 sec- ond or longer to continuously move to next channel.

Radio ID : Seek or Tune to XM channel 0 to display the Radio ID.

3. Button Press to hear a brief sampling of all channel. To cancel the scan mode, press the button once again.

4. Button Displays the information of the cur- rent channel in the order of Artist/Song title Category/Channel name Current Play Channel Artist/Song title Category/ Channel name... when the button is pressed each time.The complete text informa- tion is not displayed, rotate the tune button to see the next page.

INFO

SCAN

SEEK TRACK

SEEK TRACK

SEEK TRACK

SEEK TRACK

SEEK

XM

Features of your vehicle

1564

5. PRESET Buttons Push ~ buttons less than 0.8 second to play the channel saved in each button. Push Preset button for 0.8 second or longer to save current channel to the respec- tive button with a beep.

6. Category Button Push button to search

previous category. Push button to search

next category.To listen to the dis- played category, press the / knob. To scan channel in displayed category, press the

button. To search channel in displayed category, press buttons or turn the knob clockwise/counterclockwise.(CAT- EGORY icon is will be turned on in Category mode)

7. Knob & Button

When you turn the button clockwise, it will display the songs(category) next to the song currently played(cat- egory in the same level). Also, when you turn the button counterclock- wise, it will display the songs(catego- ry) before the song currently played (category in the same level). If you want to listen to the song dis- played in the song category, press the button, then it will skip to the selected song and play.

TUNEFILE

TUNE SEEK

SCAN

TUNE FILE

CAT FOLDER

CAT FOLDER

61

4 157

Features of your vehicle

CAUTION IN USING Bluetooth Wireless Technology CELLULAR PHONE

Do not use a cellular phone or perform Bluetooth Wireless Technology settings (e.g. pairing a phone) while driving.

Some Bluetooth Wireless Technology-enabled phones may not be recognized by the system or fully compatible with the system.

Before using Bluetooth

Wireless Technology related fea- tures of the audio system, refer your phones Users Manual for phone-side Bluetooth Wireless Technology operations.

The phone must be paired to the audio system to use Bluetooth Wireless Technology related features.

(Continued)

(continued) You will not be able to use the

hands-free feature when your phone (in the car) is outside of the cellular service area (e.g. in a tunnel, in a underground, in a mountainous area, etc.).

If the cellular phone signal is poor or the vehicles interior noise is too loud, it may be diffi- cult to hear the other persons voice during a call.

Do not place the phone near or inside metallic objects, oth- erwise communications with Bluetooth Wireless Technology system or cellular service sta- tions can be disturbed.

While a phone is connected through Bluetooth Wireless Technology your phone may discharge quicker than usual for additional Bluetooth

Wireless Technology-related operations.

(Continued)

(continued) Some cellular phones or other

devices may cause interfer- ence noise or malfunction to audio system. In this case, storing the device in a differ- ent location may resolve the situation.

Please save your phone name in English, or your phone name may not be displayed correctly.

If Priority is set upon vehicle ignition(IGN/ACC ON), the Bluetooth Wireless Technology phone will be automatically connected. Even if you are outside, the Bluetooth Wireless Technology phone will be automatically connected once you are in the vicinity of the vehicle. If you do not want automatic Bluetooth Wireless Technology power off.

(Continued)

Features of your vehicle

1584

NOTE: Bluetooth Wirelss Technology

phone compatibility can be checked by visiting www. hyundaiusa.com and under the SERVICE & PARTS

BLUETOOTH COMPATIBILITY menu.

The website provides types of Pairing, Connection, HandsFree Calling, HUC (Hang Up Call),Transfer To Privacy, Caller ID, Redial, Multiple Call Handling, IBS (lndicator Battery Symbol), Auto Phonebook Downloading, Streaming, and more.

(continued) Bluetooth Wireless Technology

connection may become inter- mittently disconnected in some mobile phones. Follow the following steps to try again. 1) Turn the Bluetooth Wireless

Technology Function within the mobile phone ON/OFF and try to connect again.

2) Turn the mobile phone power ON/OFF and try to connect again.

3) Completely remove the mobile phone battery, reboot, and then try to con- nect again.

4) Reboot the Audio and try to connect again.

5) Delete all paired devices from the mobile phone and Audio and re-pair for use.

The hands-free call volume and quality may differ depend- ing on the mobile phone.

4 159

Features of your vehicle

Bluetooth Wireless Technology PHONE OPERATION (if equipped)

1. VOLUME button : Raises or lowers speaker volume.

2. MUTE button : Mute the micro- phone during a call.

3. button : Activates voice recog- nition.

4. button : Places and transfers calls.

5. button : Ends calls or cancels functions.

What is Bluetooth Wireless Technology?

Bluetooth Wireless Technology is a wireless technology that allows multiple devices to be connected in a short range, low-powered devices like hands- free, stereo headset, wireless remo- con, etc. For more information, visit the Bluetooth Wireless Technology web- site at www.Bluetooth.com

General Features This audio system supports

Bluetooth Wireless Technology hands-free and stereo-headset features.

- HANDS-FREE feature: Making or receiving calls wirelessly through voice recognition.

- STEREO-HEADSET feature: Playing music from cellular phones (that supports A2DP fea- ture) wirelessly.

Voice recognition engine of the Bluetooth Wireless Technology system supports 3 types of lan- guages:

English Canadian French US Spanish

NOTICE The phone must be paired to the

system before using Bluetooth Wireless Technology features.

Only one selected (linked) cellular phone can be used with the system at a time.

Some phones are not fully compat- ible with this system.

The Bluetooth Wireless Technology word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth Wireless Technology SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Hyundai is under license. ABluetooth Wireless Technology enabled cell phone is required to use Bluetooth Wireless Technology.

3

1 2

4 5

Features of your vehicle

1604

Receiving a Phone Call When receiving a phone call, a ring- tone is audible from speakers and the audio system changes into tele- phone mode. When receiving a phone call, Incoming call message and incom- ing phone number (if available) are displayed on the audio.

To Answer a Call: - Press button on the steering

wheel. To Reject a Call: - Press button on the steering

wheel. To Adjust Ring Volume: - Use VOLUME buttons on the steer-

ing wheel. To Transfer a Call to the Phone

(Secret Call): - Press and hold button on the

steering wheel until the audio sys- tem transfers a call to the phone.

Talking on the Phone When talking on the phone, Active Call message and the other partys phone number (if available) are dis- played on the audio.

To Finish a Call - Press button on the steering

wheel.

NOTICE In the following situations, you or the other party may have difficulty hearing each other: 1. Speaking at the same time, your

voice may not reach each other parties. (This is not a malfunction.) Speak alternately with the other party on the phone.

2. Keep the Bluetooth Wireless Technology volume to a low level. High-level volume may result in distortion and echo.

3. When driving on a rough road. 4. When driving at high speeds. 5. When the window is open. 6. When the air conditioning vents

are facing the microphone. 7. When the sound of the air condi-

tioning fan is loud.

4 161

Features of your vehicle

Bluetooth Wireless Technology Audio Music Streaming

The audio system supports Bluetooth Wireless Technology A2DP (Audio Advanced Distribution Profile) and AVRCP (Audio Video Remote Control Profile) technolo- gies. Both profiles provide streaming of music via compatible PAIRED Bluetooth Wireless Technology Cellular phone. To stream music from the Bluetooth

Wireless Technology cellular phone, play your music files on your cellular phone according to your cellular phone users manual and press the

button on the audio system until MP3 play is displayed on the LCD. The audio system head unit displays MP3 MODE.

NOTE: In addition to streaming MP3

files, all music and sound files your cellular phone supports can be played by the audio system.

Bluetooth Wireless Technology compatible cellular phones must include A2DP and AVRCP capa- bilities.

Some A2DP and AVRCP compat- ible Bluetooth Wireless Technology cellular phones may not play music through the audio system initially. These cellular phones may need to have the Bluetooth Wireless Technology streaming enabled, for example; i.e :Menu Filemanager Music Option Play via Bluetooth

Wireless Technology Please refer to Users Guide for

your cellular phone for more information.To cancel Bluetooth

Wireless Technology cellular phone music streaming, stop music playback on the cellular phone or change the audio mode to AM/FM, XM, CD, iPod, ect.

Phone Setup All Bluetooth Wireless Technology related operations can be performed in PHONE menu. 1) Push the button to enter

SETUP mode. 2) Select Phone item by rotating

the knob, then push the button.

3) Select desired item by rotating the knob, then push the

button.ENTER TUNE

ENTER TUNE

SETUP

MEDIA

Features of your vehicle

1624

Pairing a phone Before using Bluetooth Wireless Technology features, the phone must be paired (registered) with the audio system. Up to 5 phones can be paired with the system.

NOTE: The pairing procedure of the

phone varies according to each phone model. Before attempting to pair phone, please see your phones Users Guide for instructions.

Once pairing with the phone is completed, there is no need to pair with that phone again unless the phone is deleted manually from the audio system (refer Deleting a Phone sec- tion) or the vehicles information is removed from the phone.

Press button to enter SETUP mode.

Select Phone, then Pair in PHONE menu.

The audio displays Device : [Name] passkey: 0000

Search and select the device name in your mobile phone to starting the pairing process.

NOTE: If the phone is paired to two or more vehicles of the same model, i.e. both vehicles are HYUNDAI GENESIS COUPE, some phones may not handle Bluetooth

Wireless Technology devices of that name correctly. In this case, you may need to change the name displayed on your phone from GENESIS COUPE to GENESIS COUPE1 and GENESIS COUPE2. Refer to your phones Users Guide, or contact your cellular carrier or phone manufacturer for instructions.

SETUP

4 163

Features of your vehicle

Connecting a phone When the Bluetooth Wireless Technology system is enabled, the phone previously used is automati- cally selected and re-connected. If you want to select different phone previously paired, the phone can be selected through Select Phone menu. Only a selected phone can be used with the hands-free system at a time.

Press button to enter SETUP mode.

Select Phone, then Select in PHONE menu.

Select desired phone name from the list shown.

The Bluetooth Wireless Technology icon appears on the upper side of audio display when a phone is connected.

Changing Priority If several phones are paired with the audio system, the system attempts to connect following order when the Bluetooth Wireless Technology system is enabled: 1) Priority checked phone. 2) Previously connected phone 3) Gives up auto connection.

Press button to enter SETUP mode.

Select Phone, then Priority in PHONE menu.

Select desired phone name from the list shown.

SETUP

SETUP

Features of your vehicle

1644

Deleting a Phone The paired phone can be deleted. - When the phone is deleted, all the

information associated with that phone is also deleted (including phonebook).

- If you want to use the deleted phone with the audio system again, pairing procedure must be completed once more.

Press button to enter SETUP mode.

Select Phone, then Delete in PHONE menu.

Select desired phone name from the list shown.

ADVANCED Menu After pressing the button, select Phone menu. while in PHONE menu, select the Advanced menu to make Bluetooth Wireless Technology Phone settings. (The ADVANCED menu may differ according to audio specifications.)

Incoming Volume (Bluetooth

Wireless Technology call volume adjustments) While in ADVANCED menu, select In Vol. Use the knob key to set the desired volume and press the button.

Contacts Sync (Automatic Phonebook download setting) While in ADVANCED menu, select Contacts To automatically save the contacts and call history in your mobile phone each time you connect a mobile device, select ON. If you do not wish for automatic download, select OFF. Its not available to make a phone call by Bluetooth Wireless Technology audio system while the phonebook is being downloaded.

Language of Bluetooth Wireless Technology voice recognition While in ADVANCED menu, press Language. To change the lan- guage, select the desired language and press the button.

Bluetooth Wireless Technology system off While in ADVANCED menu, select BT Off to turn off the Bluetooth

Wireless Technology System.

ENTER ENTER

SETUP

SETUP

4 165

Features of your vehicle

Voice Recognition Activation The voice recognition engine con-

tained in the Bluetooth Wireless Technology System can be activat- ed in the following conditions: - Button Activation The voice recognition system will be active when the button is pressed and after the sound of a Beep. - Active Listening The voice recognition system will be active for a period of time when the Voice Recognition system has asked for a customer response.

The system can recognize single digits from zero to nine while num- ber greater than ten will not be rec- ognized.

The system shall cancel voice recognition mode in following cases : When pressing the but- ton and saying cancel following the beep. When not making a call and pressing the button. When voice recognition has failed 3 con- secutive times.

At any time if you say help, the system will announce what com- mands are available.

Menu tree The menu tree identifies available voice recognition Bluetooth

Wireless Technology functions.

Tip Voice Operation

To get the best performance out of the Voice Recognition System, observe the followings: - Keep the interior of the vehicle

as quiet as possible. Close the window to eliminate surround- ing noise (traffic noise, vibra- tion sounds, etc), which may disturb recognizing the voice command correctly.

- Speak a command after a beep sound within 5 seconds. Otherwise the command will not be received properly.

- Speak in a natural voice with- out pausing between words.

- While receiving voice com- mands, press the button on the steering wheel remote con- troller to terminate guidance. Voice command will convert back to waiting mode to allow the user to say a new voice com- mand.

Call [Name] Ex) Call John(at Home)

Ex) Dial 911Dial [Number]

Redial

Call Back

Add entryPhonebook

Change name

Delete name

By phone

By voice

Call By name

By number

Features of your vehicle

1664

Making a Phone Call Direct Calling Press button. Say the following command.

- Call : Connects the call to John.

- Call on : Connects the call to Johns mobile phone number.

- Call at : Connects the call to johns home number.

- Call in : Connects the call to Johns office number.

Note: Calls can be immediately connect- ed to contacts who name or voice tag are saved in the phonebook(or contacts).

Calling by Name A phone call can be made by speak- ing names registered in the audio system.

Press button. Say Call. Say By name when prompted. Say desired name (in Phonebook

or voice tag). Say desired location (phone num-

ber type). Only stored locations can be selected.

Say Yes to confirm and make a call.

Tip A shortcut to each of the following functions is available: 1. Say Call Name

Dialing by Number A phone call can be made by dialing the spoken numbers. The system can recognize single digits from zero to nine.

Press button. Say Call. Say By number when prompted. Say desired phone numbers. Say Dial to complete the number

and make a call.

Tip A shortcut to each of the following functions is available: Say Dial Number

Say Dial

4 167

Features of your vehicle

Phone Book (In-Vehicle) Adding entry by voice Phone numbers and voice tags can be registered. Entries registered in the phone can also be transferred.

Press button. Say "Phonebook".

- The system replies with all avail- able commands.

- To skip the information message, press again and then a beep is heard.

Say Add Entry. Say By Voice to proceed. Say the name of the entry when

prompted. Say Yes to confirm. Say the phone number of that

entry when prompted. Say Store if phone number input

is finished. Say a phone number type.

Home, Work, Mobile, Other or Default is available.

Say Yes to complete adding entry. Say Yes to store additional loca- tion for this contact, or say Cancel to finish the process.

NOTICE - The system can recognize single

digits from zero to nine. Numbers that are ten or greater cannot be recognized.

- You can enter each digit individu- ally or group digits together in preferred string lengths.

- To speed up input, it is a good idea to group all digits into a continuous string.

- Recommend to enter the numbers constituted an grouping within all digit numbers to dial 995 / 734 / 0000

- The display corresponding to each operation appears on the screen as follows: Input operation example: 1. Say: Nine, nine, five

Display: 995

2. And say: Seven, three, four Display: 995734

Adding Entry by Phone Press button. Say "Phonebook". Say "Add Entry" after prompt. Say "By Phone" to proceed. Say Yes to confirm. Your phone will start to transfer

phone/contact list to the audio system. This process may take over 10 minutes depending on the phone model and number of entries.

Wait till the audio displays Transfer Complete message.

11

Features of your vehicle

1684

Changing Name The registered names can be modi- fied.

Press button. Say Phonebook. Say Change Name after prompt. Say the name of the entry (voice

tag). Say Yes to confirm. Say new desired name.

Deleting Name The registered names can be deleted.

Press button. Say Phonebook. Say Delete Name after prompt. Say the name of the entry (voice

tag). Say Yes to confirm.

Bluetooth Wireless Technology Audio Speaker Adaptation

Speaker adaptation will improve per- formance of voice recognition sys- tem to a particular user voice. This will degrade the performance for other users.

Record Press button for 10sec. Say Record profile. Say Yes. Say the word displayed on Radio.

Delete Press button for 10sec. Say Delete profile. Say Yes.

4 169

Features of your vehicle

Key matrix

No.

Disconnected(BT Icon off) Connected (BT Icon On)

Paired H/P Empty

Paired H/P Exist

1

SHORT

LONG

SHORT

LONG

STEERING

MODE KEY

AUDIO POWER KEY

Incoming Call Outgoing Call Active Call TRANSFER CALLConnected

KEY

- - Reject Call End Call End Call End Call

- - - - - - -

No phone paired Please pair a phone

No phone connected Please connect phone

Please say a command

Call/Dial/Redial/Help - - - -

- - - - - - -

- - - - - - -

- - - - - - -

No phone paired Please pair a phone

No phone connected Please connect phone

Please say a command

Accept Call - - -

4

5

2

3

SHORT

LONG

- - Transfer Call

(Handsfree <->Phone)

Driving your vehicle

Before driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Engine start/stop button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Automatic transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Automatic transmission operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

Power brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Parking brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29 Electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31

Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37 Economical operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41 Special driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43

Hazardous driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43 Rocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43 Smooth cornering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44 Driving at night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44 Driving in the rain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45 Driving in flooded areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46 Driving off-road. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46 Highway driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46

Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48 Vehicle load limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52

Tire and loading information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52 Certification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55

Vehicle weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57 Base curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57 Vehicle curb weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57 Cargo weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57 GAW (Gross axle weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57 GAWR (Gross axle weight rating). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57 GVW (Gross vehicle weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57 GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57

Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58 5

Driving your vehicle

25

WARNING - ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS! Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle, open the windows immediately.

Do not inhale exhaust fumes. Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death by asphyxiation.

Be sure the exhaust system does not leak. The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If you hear a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the car, have the exhaust system checked as soon as possible by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Do not run the engine in an enclosed area. Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run the engine in your garage any longer than it takes to start the engine and back the car out.

Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the car. If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the car, be sure to do so only in an open area with the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn into the interior.

If you must drive with the trunk lid open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary: 1. Close all windows. 2. Open side vents. 3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at " " or " " and the fan at one of the higher speeds.

To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of the windshield are kept clear of snow, ice, leaves or other obstructions.

5 3

Driving your vehicle

Before entering vehicle Be sure that all windows, outside

mirror(s), and outside lights are clean.

Check the condition of the tires. Check under the vehicle for any

sign of leaks. Be sure there are no obstacles

behind you if you intend to back up.

Necessary inspections Fluid levels, such as engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid, and washer fluid should be checked on a regular basis, with the exact interval depending on the fluid. Further details are provided in section 7, Maintenance.

CALIFORNIA PROPO- SITION 65 WARNING

Engine exhaust and a wide vari- ety of automobile components and parts, including compo- nents found in the interior fur- nishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause can- cer and birth defects and repro- ductive harm. In addition, cer- tain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of compo- nent wear contain or emit chem- icals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproduc- tive harm.

BEFORE DRIVING

WARNING Driving while distracted can result in a loss of vehicle con- trol, that may lead to an acci- dent, severe personal injury, and death. The drivers primary responsibility is in the safe and legal operation of a vehicle, and use of any handheld devices, other equipment, or vehicle sys- tems which take the drivers eyes, attention and focus away from the safe operation of a vehicle or which are not permis- sible by law should never be used during operation of the vehicle.

Driving your vehicle

45

WARNING When you intend to park or

stop the vehicle with the engine on, be careful not to depress the accelerator pedal for a long period of time. It may overheat the engine or exhaust system and cause fire.

When you make a sudden stop or turn the steering wheel rap- idly, loose objects may drop on the floor and it could interfere with the operation of the foot pedals, possibly causing an accident. Keep all things in the vehicle safely stored.

If you do not focus on driving, it may cause an accident. Be careful when operating what may disturb driving such as audio or heater. It is the responsibility of the driver to always drive safely.

Before starting Close and lock all doors. Position the seat so that all con-

trols are easily reached. Adjust the inside and outside

rearview mirrors. Be sure that all lights work. Check all gauges. Check the operation of warning

lights when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.

Release the parking brake and make sure the brake warning light goes out.

For safe operation, be sure you are familiar with your vehicle and its equipment.

WARNING All passengers must be proper- ly belted whenever the vehicle is moving. Refer to Seat belts in section 3 for more informa- tion on their proper use.

WARNING - Driving under the influence of alcohol or drugs

Drinking and driving is danger- ous. Drunk driving is the num- ber one contributor to the high- way death toll each year. Even a small amount of alcohol will affect your reflexes, percep- tions and judgment. Driving while under the influence of drugs is as dangerous or more dangerous than driving drunk. You are much more likely to have a serious accident if you drink or take drugs and drive. If you are drinking or taking drugs, dont drive. Do not ride with a driver who has been drink- ing or taking drugs. Choose a designated driver or call a cab.

WARNING Always check the surrounding areas near your vehicle for peo- ple, especially children, before putting a car into D (Drive) or R (Reverse).

5 5

Driving your vehicle

Illuminated ignition switch Whenever a front door is opened, the ignition switch will be illuminated for your convenience, provided the igni- tion switch is not in the ON position. The light will go off immediately when the ignition switch is turned on or go off after about 30 seconds when the door is closed.

Ignition switch position LOCK The steering wheel locks to protect against theft. The ignition key can be removed only in the LOCK position. When turning the ignition switch to the LOCK position, push the key inward at the ACC position and turn the key toward the LOCK position.

ACC (Accessory) The steering wheel is unlocked and electrical accessories are operative.

NOTICE If difficulty is experienced turning the ignition switch to the ACC posi- tion, turn the key while turning the steering wheel right and left to release the tension.

ON The warning lights can be checked before the engine is started. This is the normal running position after the engine is started. Do not leave the ignition switch ON if the engine is not running to prevent the battery from discharging.

KEY

OBK059001N OUN036002

Driving your vehicle

65

START Turn the ignition switch to the START position to start the engine. The engine will crank until you release the key; then it returns to the ON position. The brake warning lamp can be checked in this position.

WARNING - Ignition switch

Never turn the ignition switch to LOCK or ACC while the vehi- cle is moving.This would result in loss of directional control and braking function, which could cause an accident.

The anti-theft steering column lock is not a substitute for the parking brake. Before leaving the drivers seat, always make sure the shift lever is engaged in 1st gear for the manual transmission or P (Park) for the automatic transmission, set the parking brake fully and shut the engine off. Unexpected and sudden vehi- cle movement may occur if these precautions are not taken.

(Continued)

(Continued) Never reach for the ignition

switch, or any other controls through the steering wheel while the vehicle is in motion. The presence of your hand or arm in this area could cause a loss of vehicle control, an accident and serious bodily injury or death.

Do not place any movable objects around the drivers seat as they may move while driving, interfere with the driv- er and lead to an accident.

5 7

Driving your vehicle

Starting the engine

1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.

2. Manual Transmission - Depress the clutch pedal fully and shift the transmission into Neutral. Depress the brake and clutch pedal fully. Automatic Transmission - Place the transmission shift lever in P (Park). Depress the brake pedal fully. You can also start the engine when the shift lever is in the N (Neutral) position.

3. Turn the ignition switch to START and hold it there until the engine starts (a maximum of 10 seconds), then release the key.

4. In extremely cold weather (below -18C / 0F) or after the vehicle has not been operated for several days, let the engine warm up with- out depressing the accelerator.

Whether the engine is cold or warm, it should be started without depressing the accelerator.

WARNING Always wear appropriate shoes when operating your vehicle. Unsuitable shoes (high heels, ski boots,etc.) may interfere with your ability to use the brake, accelerator and the clutch pedal (if equipped). CAUTION

If the engine stalls while you are in motion, do not attempt to move the shift lever to the P (Park) position. If traffic and road conditions permit, you may put the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position while the vehicle is still moving and turn the ignition switch to the START position in an attempt to restart the engine.

CAUTION Do not engage the starter for more than 10 seconds. If the engine stalls or fails to start, wait 5 to 10 seconds before re-engag- ing the starter. Improper use of the starter may damage it.

Driving your vehicle

85

Illuminated engine start/stop button (if equipped) Whenever the front door is opened, the engine start/stop button will illu- minate for your convenience. The light will go off immediately when the engine start/stop button is turned on or go off after about 30 seconds when the door is closed.

Engine start/stop button posi- tion OFF with manual transmission

To turn off the engine, stop the vehi- cle then press the engine start/stop button with the engine start/stop but- ton ON.

with automatic transmission

To turn off the engine, press the engine start/stop button with the engine start/stop button ON and the shift lever in P(Park). When you press the engine start/stop button without the shift lever in P(Park), the engine start/stop button does not turn to the OFF position, but turns to the ACC position.

Steering lock system (if equipped)

Also, the steering wheel locks when the engine start/stop button is in the OFF position to protect against theft. It locks when the door is opened, when you pull out the smart key from the smart key holder, or when you lock the doors using the transmit- ter(or the smart key).

NOTICE If difficulty is experienced turning

the engine start/stop button to the ACC position, turn the steering wheel right and left to release the tension while pressing the engine start/stop button. (if equipped with steering lock)

When you turn off the engine, the vehicle should be stopped.

ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON (IF EQUIPPED)

OBK059001 WARNING

In an emergency situation while the vehicle is moving, you can turn off the engine and turn the engine start/stop button to the ACC position by pressing the engine start/stop button for more than 2 seconds or 3 times successively within 3 seconds. If the vehicle is moving, you can restart the engine without pressing the brake pedal by pressing the engine start/stop button with the shift lever in N(Neutral).

5 9

Driving your vehicle

ACC(Accessory) with manual transmission

Press the engine start/stop button when the button is in the OFF posi- tion without depressing the clutch pedal.

with automatic transmission

Press the engine start/stop button when the button is in the OFF posi- tion without depressing the brake pedal.

The steering wheel is unlocked and electrical accessories are operative (if equipped with steering lock). If you leave the engine start/stop but- ton in the ACC position for more than 1 hour, the engine is off automatical- ly to prevent the battery from dis- charging.

ON with manual transmission

Press the engine start/stop button when the button is in the ACC posi- tion without depressing the clutch pedal.

with automatic transmission

Press the engine start/stop button when the button is in the ACC posi- tion without depressing the brake pedal.

The warning lights can be checked before the engine is started. Do not leave the button in the ON position if the engine is not running to prevent the battery from discharging.

START with manual transmission

To start the engine, depress the clutch pedal and brake pedal, then press the engine start/stop button with the shift lever in the N(Neutral) position.

with automatic transmission

To start the engine, depress the brake pedal and press the engine start/stop button with the shift lever in the P(Park) or the N (Neutral) position.

NOTICE If you press the engine start/stop

button without depressing the clutch pedal on manual transmis- sion vehicles or without depressing the brake pedal on automatic transmission vehicles, the engine will not start and the engine start/stop button changes as fol- lows: OFF ACC ON OFF

If you leave the engine start/stop button in the ACC or the ON posi- tion for a long time, the battery may be discharged.

Driving your vehicle

105

Starting the engine WARNING

Never press the ENGINE START/STOP button while the vehicle is in motion. This would result in loss of direc- tional control and braking function, which could cause an accident.

The anti-theft steering column lock (if equipped) is not a sub- stitute for the parking brake. Before leaving the drivers seat, always make sure the shift lever is engaged in 1st gear for the manual transmis- sion or P (Park) for the auto- matic transmission, set the parking brake fully and shut the engine off. Unexpected and sudden vehicle move- ment may occur if these pre- cautions are not taken.

(Continued)

(Continued) Never reach for the engine

start/stop button, or any other controls through the steering wheel while the vehicle is in motion. The presence of your hand or arm in this area could cause a loss of vehicle con- trol, an accident and serious bodily injury or death.

Do not place any movable objects around the drivers seat as they may move while driving, interfere with the driv- er and lead to an accident.

WARNING Always wear appropriate shoes when operating your vehicle. Unsuitable shoes (high heels, ski boots, etc.) may interfere with your ability to use the brake, accelerator and clutch pedal (if equipped).

5 11

Driving your vehicle

1. Carry the smart key or leave it inside the vehicle.

2. Make sure the parking brake is firmly applied.

3. Manual Transmission - Depress the clutch pedal fully and shift the transmission into Neutral. Depress the brake and clutch pedal fully. Automatic Transmission - Place the transmission shift lever in P (Park). Depress the brake pedal fully. You can also start the engine when the shift lever is in the N (Neutral) position.

4. Press the engine start/stop button. 5. In extremely cold weather (below -

18C / 0F) or after the vehicle has not been operated for several days, let the engine warm up with- out depressing the accelerator. Whether the engine is cold or warm, it should be started without depressing the accelerator.

Even if the smart key is in the vehi- cle, if it is far away from you, the engine may not start.

When the engine start/stop button is in the ACC or ON position, if any door is open, the system checks for the smart key. If the smart key is not in the vehicle, and if all doors are closed, the chime will sound for about 5 seconds. Keep the smart key in the vehicle, when using the ACC position or if the vehicle engine is on.

WARNING The engine will start by press- ing the engine start/stop button, only when the smart key is in the vehicle. Never allow chil- dren or any person who is unfa- miliar with the vehicle to touch the engine start/stop button or related parts.

CAUTION If the engine stalls while you are in motion, do not attempt to move the shift lever to the P (Park) position. If traffic and road conditions permit, you may put the shift lever in the N(Neutral) position while the vehicle is still moving and press the engine start/stop button in an attempt to restart the engine.

Driving your vehicle

125

NOTICE If the battery is weak or the smart

key does not work correctly, you can start the engine by inserting the smart key into the smart key holder. Push the cover to open the cover. To eject the smart key from the smart key holder, press the smart key inward past the detent and then pull the key outward. When you dont use the smart key holder, close the cover.

(Continued)

(Continued) When the stop lamp fuse is blown

on automatic transmission vehi- cles, you can't start the engine normally. Replace the fuse with a new one. If you are not able to replace the fuse, you can start the engine by pressing the engine start/stop button for 10 seconds with the engine start/stop button in the ACC.

CAUTION Do not press the engine

start/stop button for more than 5 seconds except when the stop lamp fuse is blown.

When you eject the smart key from the smart key holder, press the smart key inward and pull it out. If you pull out the smart key forcibly without pushing the smart key, the smart key holder may be damaged and will not operate normally.

OBK052002

5 13

Driving your vehicle

Manual transmission operation The manual transmission has 6 for- ward gears. This shift pattern is imprinted on the shift knob. The transmission is fully synchronized in all forward gears so shifting to either a higher or a lower gear is easily accomplished. Press the clutch pedal down fully while shifting, then release it slowly. If your vehicle is equipped with an ignition lock switch, the engine will not start when starting the engine without depressing the clutch pedal. (if equipped)

The gearshift lever must be returned to the neutral position before shifting into R (Reverse).

Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped before shifting into R (Reverse). Never operate the engine with the tachometer (rpm) in the red zone.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED)

CAUTION When downshifting from fifth

gear to fourth gear, caution should be taken not to inad- vertently press the gear shift lever sideways in such a man- ner that second gear is engaged. Such a drastic downshift may cause the engine speed to increase to the point that the tachometer will enter the red-zone. Such over-revving of the engine may possibly cause engine damage.

Do not downshift more than 2 gears or downshift the gear when the engine is running at high speed (5,000 RPM or higher). Such a downshifting may damage the engine.

When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, press the shift lever to the right. Otherwise, the engine could be damaged by accidentally engaging 3rd or 4th gear.

OBK052005

Driving your vehicle

145

During cold weather, shifting may be difficult until the transmission lubricant has warmed up. This is normal and not harmful to the transmission.

If you've come to a complete stop and it's hard to shift into 1st or R(Reverse), put the shift lever in N(Neutral) position and release the clutch. Press the clutch pedal back down, and then shift into 1st or R(Reverse) gear position.

Using the clutch The clutch should be pressed all the way to the floor before shifting, then released slowly. The clutch pedal should always be fully released while driving. Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving. This can cause unnecessary wear. Do not partially engage the clutch to hold the car on an incline. This causes unnecessary wear. Use the foot brake or parking brake to hold the car on an incline. Do not operate the clutch pedal rapidly and repeatedly.CAUTION

To avoid premature clutch wear and damage, do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal. Also, dont use the clutch to hold the vehicle stopped on an uphill grade, while waiting for a traf- fic light, etc.

Do not use the shift lever as a handrest during driving, as this can result in premature wear of the transmission shift forks.

WARNING Before leaving the drivers seat, always set the parking brake fully and shut the engine off. Then make sure the transmis- sion is shifted into 1st gear when the vehicle is parked on a level or uphill grade, and shifted into R (Reverse) on a downhill grade. Unexpected and sudden vehicle movement can occur if these precautions are not fol- lowed in the order identified.

5 15

Driving your vehicle

Shifting to R (Reverse) This manual transmission is designed with a detent to differenti- ate 1st and R (Reverse) gear. To shift into reverse, you must shift past 1st gear and the detent in order to get into the R (Reverse) gear gate. R(Reverse) is located to the left

side of the 1st gear. After the vehicle is stoped, push the

shift lever to the left side of the 1st gear past the detent then push the shift lever upward. The warning chime operates once.

Downshifting When you must slow down in heavy traffic or while driving up steep hills, downshift before the engine starts to labor. Downshifting reduces the chance of stalling and gives better acceleration when you again need to increase your speed. When the vehi- cle is traveling down steep hills, downshifting helps maintain safe speed and prolongs brake life. This vehicle is geared for improved fuel economy and may need to be driven in a lower gear when driving up hills or into high winds. Using top gear is best for fuel economy, but you should use the best gear for the road conditions.

CAUTION If you try to shift to the 1st

gear too quickly, it is possible to shift to R (Reverse) instead of 1st gear.

Before driving, check that the warning chime operates once, when you press the brake pedal and shift to R (Reverse). If the warning chime does not operate when you shift to R (Reverse), contact an author- ized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

Before driving you should learn how to shift to R (Reverse), to 1st gear or 2nd gear.

Shift to R only when the vehi- cle is stationary. When the shift lever is pressed to the left, a slight resistance has to be overcome.

OBK059013

Driving your vehicle

165

Good driving practices Never take the car out of gear and

coast down a hill. This is extremely hazardous. Always leave the car in gear.

Don't "ride" the brakes. This can cause them to overheat and mal- function. Instead, when you are driving down a long hill, slow down and shift to a lower gear. When you do this, engine braking will help slow the car.

Slow down before shifting to a lower gear. This will help avoid over-revving the engine, which can cause damage.

Slow down when you encounter cross winds. This gives you much better control of your car.

Be sure the car is completely stopped before you attempt to shift into reverse. The transmission can be damaged if you do not. To shift into reverse, depress the clutch, move the shift lever to neutral, wait 3 seconds, then shift to the reverse position.

Exercise extreme caution when driving on slippery surfaces. Be especially careful when braking, accelerating or shifting gears. On a slippery surface, an abrupt change in vehicle speed can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle to go out of control.

WARNING Always buckle-up! In a colli-

sion, an unbelted occupant is significantly more likely to be seriously injured or killed than a properly belted occupant.

Avoid high speeds when cor- nering or turning.

Do not make quick steering wheel movements, such as sharp lane changes or fast, sharp turns.

The risk of rollover is greatly increased if you lose control of your vehicle at highway speeds.

Loss of control often occurs if two or more wheels drop off the roadway and the driver over- steers to reenter the roadway.

In the event your vehicle leaves the roadway, do not steer sharply. Instead, slow down before pulling back into the travel lanes.

Never exceed posted speed limits.

5 17

Driving your vehicle

Automatic transmission opera- tion The automatic transmission has 8 forward speeds and one reverse speed. The individual speeds are selected automatically, depending on the position of the shift lever.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

OBK054006

Depress the brake pedal and the lock release button when shifting. (If the shift lock system is not equipped, it is not necessary to depress the brake pedal. However, it is recommended to depress the brake pedal to avoid inadvertent movement of the vehicle.)

The shift lever can be shifted freely.

Press the lock release button when shifting.

+ (UP)

Lock release button

- (DOWN)

Driving your vehicle

185

NOTICE The first few shifts on a new vehicle, if the battery has been disconnected, may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and the shifting sequence will adjust after shifts are cycled a few times by the TCM (Transmission Control Module) or PCM (Powertrain Control Module).

For smooth operation, depress the brake pedal when shifting from N (Neutral) to a forward or reverse gear.

WARNING - Automatic transmission

Always check the surrounding areas near your vehicle for people, especially children, before shifting a car into D (Drive) or R (Reverse).

Before leaving the drivers seat, always make sure the shift lever is in the P (Park) position; then set the parking brake fully and shut the engine off. Unexpected and sudden vehicle movement can occur if these precautions are not followed in the order identified.

CAUTION To avoid damage to your

transmission, do not acceler- ate the engine in R (Reverse) or any forward gear position with the brakes on.

When stopped on an incline, do not hold the vehicle sta- tionary with engine power. Use the service brake or the parking brake.

Do not shift from N (Neutral) or P (Park) into D (Drive), or R (Reverse) when the engine is above idle speed.

5 19

Driving your vehicle

Transmission ranges The indicator in the instrument cluster displays the shift lever position when the ignition switch is in the ON posi- tion.

P (Park)

Always come to a complete stop before shifting into P (Park). This posi- tion locks the transmission and pre- vents the drive wheels from rotating.

R (Reverse)

Use this position to drive the vehicle backward.

N (Neutral)

The wheels and transmission are not engaged. The vehicle will roll freely even on the slightest incline unless the parking brake or service brakes are applied.

(Continued) Before leaving the drivers

seat, always make sure the shift lever is in the P (Park) position. Set the parking brake fully, shut the engine off and take the key with you. Unexpected and sudden vehi- cle movement can occur if you do not follow these pre- cautions in the order speci- fied.

WARNING Shifting into P (Park) while the

vehicle is in motion will cause the drive wheels to lock which will cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

Do not use the P (Park) posi- tion in place of the parking brake. Always make sure the shift lever is latched in the P (Park) position and set the parking brake fully.

Never leave a child unattend- ed in a vehicle.

(Continued)

CAUTION The transmission may be dam- aged if you shift into P (Park) while the vehicle is in motion.

CAUTION Always come to a complete stop before shifting into or out of R (Reverse); you may damage the transmission if you shift into R while the vehicle is in motion, except as explained in Rocking the vehicle in this section.

Driving your vehicle

205

D (Drive)

This is the normal forward driving position. The transmission will auto- matically shift through a 8-gear sequence, providing the best fuel economy and power.

For extra power when passing anoth- er vehicle or climbing grades, depress the accelerator fully, at which time the transmission will automatically downshift to the next lower gear (or gears, as appropri- ate).

NOTICE Always come to a complete stop before shifting into D (Drive).

Sports mode

Whether the vehicle is stationary or in motion, sports mode is selected by pushing the shift lever from the D (Drive) position into the manual gate. To return to D (Drive) range opera- tion, push the shift lever back into the main gate.

In sport mode, it is possible to shift the gear by using either the shift lever or the steering wheel shift pad- dles (dynamic shift).

OBK054007

+ (UP)

- (DOWN)

Sports mode

OBK052036

5 21

Driving your vehicle

Using the shift lever

Up (+) : Push the lever forward once to shift up one gear (1).

Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards once to shift down one gear (2).

Using the steering wheel shift paddles

Up(+) : Pull the right-hand shift pad- dle once to shift up one gear (3).

Down(-) : Pull the left-hand shift pad- dle once to shift down one gear (4).

NOTICE When the shift lever is in the P, N or R position, you can't shift the gear by using the steering wheel shift paddles. In sports mode, if you pull the left and right hand shift paddles at the same time, you can't shift the gear.

NOTICE In sports mode, the driver must

execute upshifts in accordance with road conditions, taking care to keep the engine speed below the red zone.

In sports mode, only the 8 forward gears can be selected. To reverse or park the vehicle, move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) or P (Park) position as required.

In sports mode, downshifts are made automatically when the vehicle slows down. When the vehicle stops, 1st gear is automati- cally selected.

In sports mode, when the engine rpm approaches the red zone the transmission will upshift automat- ically.

If the driver presses the lever to +(up) or -(Down) position, the transmission may not make the requested gear change if the next gear is outside of the allowable engine rpm range.

(Continued)

(Continued) When starting from a stop on a

slippery road, push the shift lever forward into the +(up) position or pull the right-hand shift paddle. This causes the transmission to shift into the 2nd gear which is better for smooth driving on a slippery road. Push the shift lever to the -(down) side or pull the left- hand shift paddle to shift back to the 1st gear.

Driving your vehicle

225

Shift lock system For your safety, the automatic trans- mission has a shift lock system which prevents shifting the transmis- sion from P (Park) or N (Neutral) into R (Reverse) unless the brake pedal is depressed. To shift the transmission from P (Park) or N (Neutral) into R (Reverse): 1. Depress and hold the brake pedal. 2. Start the engine or turn the ignition

switch to the ON position. 3. Move the shift lever. If the brake pedal is repeatedly depressed and released with the shift lever in the P (Park) position, a chat- tering noise near the shift lever may be heard. This is a normal condition.

Shift-lock override

If the shift lever cannot be moved from the P (Park) or N (Neutral) posi- tion into R (Reverse) position with the brake pedal depressed, continue depressing the brake, then do the fol- lowing: 1. Carefully remove the cap covering

the shift-lock override access hole. 2. Insert a screwdriver into the

access hole and press down on the screwdriver.

3. Move the shift lever. 4. Have your vehicle inspected by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer immediately.

Ignition key interlock system The ignition key cannot be removed unless the shift lever is in the P (Park) position. If the ignition switch is in any other position, the key can- not be removed.

WARNING Always fully depress the brake pedal before and while shifting out of the P (Park) position into another position to avoid inad- vertent motion of the vehicle which could injure persons in or around the car.

OBK054008N

5 23

Driving your vehicle

Good driving practices Never move the shift lever from P

(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other position with the accelerator pedal depressed.

Never move the shift lever into P (Park) when the vehicle is in motion.

Be sure the car is completely stopped before you attempt to shift into R (Reverse) or D (Drive).

Never take the car out of gear and coast down a hill. This may be extremely hazardous. Always leave the car in gear when moving.

Do not "ride" the brakes. This can cause them to overheat and mal- function. Instead, when you are driving down a long hill, slow down, move the shift lever to the manual gate and shift to a lower gear. When you do this, engine braking will help slow the car.

Slow down before shifting to a lower gear. Otherwise, the lower gear may not be engaged.

Always use the parking brake. Do not depend on placing the trans- mission in P (Park) to keep the car from moving.

Exercise extreme caution when driving on a slippery surface. Be especially careful when braking, accelerating or shifting gears. On a slippery surface, an abrupt change in vehicle speed can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle to go out of control.

Optimum vehicle performance and economy is obtained by smoothly depressing and releasing the accelerator pedal.

WARNING Always buckle-up! In a colli-

sion, an unbelted occupant is significantly more likely to be seriously injured or killed than a properly belted occupant.

Avoid high speeds when cor- nering or turning.

Do not make quick steering wheel movements, such as sharp lane changes or fast, sharp turns.

The risk of rollover is greatly increased if you lose control of your vehicle at highway speeds.

Loss of control often occurs if two or more wheels drop off the roadway and the driver over- steers to reenter the roadway.

In the event your vehicle leaves the roadway, do not steer sharply. Instead, slow down before pulling back into the travel lanes.

Never exceed posted speed limits.

Driving your vehicle

245

Moving up a steep grade from a standing start To move up a steep grade from a standing start, press the brake pedal, shift the shift lever to D (Drive) and release the parking brake. Depress the accelerator gradually while releasing the brake pedal. When accelerating from a stop on a steep hill, the vehicle may have a tendency to roll backwards.

WARNING If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., then you may attempt to rock the vehicle free by moving it forward and backward. Do not attempt this procedure if people or objects are anywhere near the vehicle. During the rocking operation the vehicle may suddenly move forward or backward as it becomes unstuck, causing injury or damage to nearby peo- ple or objects.

5 25

Driving your vehicle

Power brakes Your vehicle has power-assisted brakes that adjust automatically through normal usage. In the event that the power-assisted brakes lose power because of a stalled engine or some other reason, you can still stop your vehicle by applying greater force to the brake pedal than you normally would. The stopping distance, however, will be longer. When the engine is not running, the reserve brake power is partially depleted each time the brake pedal is applied. Do not pump the brake pedal when the power assist has been interrupted. Pump the brake pedal only when necessary to maintain steering con- trol on slippery surfaces.

BRAKE SYSTEM

WARNING - Brakes Do not drive with your foot

resting on the brake pedal. This will create abnormal high brake temperatures, exces- sive brake lining and pad wear, and increased stopping distances.

When descending a long or steep hill, shift to a lower gear and avoid continuous applica- tion of the brakes. Continuous brake application will cause the brakes to overheat and could result in a temporary loss of braking performance.

Wet brakes may impair the vehicles ability to safely slow down; the vehicle may also pull to one side when the brakes are applied. Applying the brakes lightly will indicate whether they have been affected in this way. Always test your brakes in this fash- ion after driving through deep water.

(Continued)

(Continued) To dry the brakes, apply them lightly while maintaining a safe forward speed until brake per- formance returns to normal.

Always, confirm the position of the brake and accelerator pedal before driving. If you don't check the position of the accelerator and brake pedal before driving, you may depress the accelerator instead of the brake pedal. It may cause a serious accident.

Driving your vehicle

265

In the event of brake failure If service brakes fail to operate while the vehicle is in motion, you can make an emergency stop with the parking brake. The stopping dis- tance, however, will be much greater than normal.

Disc brakes wear indicator Your vehicle has disc brakes. When your brake pads are worn and new pads are required, you will hear a high-pitched warning sound from your front brakes or rear brakes. You may hear this sound come and go or it may occur whenever you depress the brake pedal. Please remember that some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when you first apply (or lightly apply) the brakes. This is nor- mal and does not indicate a problem with your brakes.

WARNING - Brake wear This brake wear warning sound means your vehicle needs serv- ice. If you ignore this audible warning, you will eventually lose braking performance, which could lead to a serious accident.

CAUTION To avoid costly brake repairs,

do not continue to drive with worn brake pads.

Always replace brake pads as complete front or rear axle sets.

WARNING - Parking brake Applying the parking brake while the vehicle is moving at normal speeds can cause a sudden loss of control of the vehicle. If you must use the parking brake to stop the vehi- cle, use great caution in apply- ing the brake.

5 27

Driving your vehicle

Parking brake Applying the parking brake To engage the parking brake, first apply the foot brake and then without pressing the release button in, pull the parking brake lever up as far as possible. In addition it is recommend- ed that when parking the vehicle on a gradient, the shift lever should be positioned in the appropriate low gear on manual transmission vehi- cles or in the P (Park) position on automatic transmission vehicles.

Releasing the parking brake To release the parking brake, first apply the foot brake and pull up the parking brake lever slightly. Secondly depress the release button (1) and lower the parking brake lever (2) while holding the button.

OBK059010

CAUTION Driving with the parking brake applied will cause excessive brake pad and brake rotor wear.

OBK059009

Driving your vehicle

285

Check the brake warning light by turn- ing the ignition switch ON (do not start the engine).This light will be illuminat- ed when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the START or ON position. Before driving, be sure the parking brake is fully released and the brake warning light is off. If the brake warning light remains on after the parking brake is released while engine is running, there may be a malfunction in the brake system. Immediate attention is necessary.

WARNING To prevent unintentional move-

ment when stopped and leav- ing the vehicle, do not use the gearshift lever in place of the parking brake. Set the parking brake AND make sure the gearshift lever is securely posi- tioned in 1st (First) gear or R (Reverse) for manual transmis- sion equipped vehicles and in P (Park) for automatic trans- mission equipped vehicles.

Never allow anyone who is unfamiliar with the vehicle to touch the parking brake. If the parking brake is released unin- tentionally, serious injury may occur.

All vehicles should always have the parking brake fully engaged when parking to avoid inadvertent movement of the car which can injure occupants or pedestrians.

W-75

CAUTION Do not operate the parking brake while the vehicle is mov- ing except in an emergency sit- uation. It could damage the vehicle system and make endanger driving safety.

5 29

Driving your vehicle

If at all possible, cease driving the vehicle immediately. If that is not pos- sible, use extreme caution while operating the vehicle and only con- tinue to drive the vehicle until you can reach a safe location or repair shop.

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

The ABS continuously senses the speed of the wheels. If the wheels are going to lock, the ABS system repeatedly modulates the hydraulic brake pressure to the wheels. When you apply your brakes under conditions which may lock the wheels, you may hear a tik-tik sound from the brakes, or feel a cor- responding sensation in the brake pedal. This is normal and it means your ABS is active. In order to obtain the maximum ben- efit from your ABS in an emergency situation, do not attempt to modulate your brake pressure and do not try to pump your brakes. Press your brake pedal as hard as possible or as hard as the situation warrants and allow the ABS to control the force being delivered to the brakes.

WARNING ABS (or ESC) will not prevent accidents due to improper or dangerous driving maneuvers. Even though vehicle control is improved during emergency braking, always maintain a safe distance between you and objects ahead. Vehicle speeds should always be reduced during extreme road conditions. The braking distance for cars equipped with an anti-lock brak- ing system (or Electronic Stability Control system) may be longer than for those without it in the following road conditions. During these conditions the vehicle should be driven at reduced speeds: Rough, gravel or snow-cov-

ered roads. With tire chains installed. On roads where the road sur-

face is pitted or has different surface height.

(Continued)

(Continued) The safety features of an ABS (or ESC) equipped vehicle should not be tested by high speed driving or cornering. This could endanger the safety of yourself or others.

Driving your vehicle

305

NOTICE A click sound may be heard in the engine compartment when the vehi- cle begins to move after the engine is started. These conditions are normal and indicate that the anti-lock brake system is functioning properly.

Even with the anti-lock brake sys- tem, your vehicle still requires suf- ficient stopping distance. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you.

Always slow down when cornering. The anti-lock brake system cannot prevent accidents resulting from excessive speeds.

On loose or uneven road surfaces, operation of the anti-lock brake system may result in a longer stop- ping distance than for vehicles equipped with a conventional brake system.

NOTICE When you jump start your vehicle because of a drained battery, the engine may not run as smoothly and the ABS warning light may turn on at the same time. This happens because of the low battery voltage. It does not mean your ABS is malfunc- tioning. Do not pump your brakes! Have the battery recharged before

driving the vehicle.

W-78

CAUTION If the ABS warning light is on

and stays on, you may have a problem with the ABS. In this case, however, your regular brakes will work normally.

The ABS warning light will stay on for approximately 3 seconds after the ignition switch is ON. During that time, the ABS will go through self-diagnosis and the light will go off if everything is normal. If the light stays on, you may have a problem with your ABS. Contact an author- ized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

CAUTION When you drive on a road hav-

ing poor traction, such as an icy road, and operate your brakes continuously, the ABS will be active continuously and the ABS warning light may illu- minate. Pull your car over to a safe place and stop the engine.

Restart the engine. If the ABS warning light is off, then your ABS system is normal. Otherwise, you may have a problem with the ABS. Contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

5 31

Driving your vehicle

Electronic stability control (ESC) The Electronic Stability control (ESC) system is designed to stabilize the vehicle during cornering maneuvers. ESC checks where you are steering and where the vehicle is actually going. ESC applies the brakes at individual wheels and intervenes in the engine management system to stabilize the vehicle.

The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system is an electronic system designed to help the driver maintain vehicle control under adverse conditions. It is not a substitute for safe driving practices. Factors including speed, road conditions and driver steering input can all affect whether ESC will be effective in preventing a loss of control. It is still your responsibility to drive and corner at reasonable speeds and to leave a sufficient margin of safety. When you apply your brakes under conditions which may lock the wheels, you may hear a tik-tik sound from the brakes, or feel a cor- responding sensation in the brake pedal. This is normal and it means your ESC is active.

NOTICE A click sound may be heard in the engine compartment when the vehi- cle begins to move after the engine is started. These conditions are normal and indicate that the Electronic Stability Control System is function- ing properly.

WARNING Never drive too fast for the road conditions or too quickly when cornering. Electronic stability control (ESC) will not prevent accidents. Excessive speed in turns, abrupt maneuvers and hydroplaning on wet surfaces can still result in serious acci- dents. Only a safe and attentive driver can prevent accidents by avoiding maneuvers that cause the vehicle to lose traction. Even with ESC installed, always follow all the normal precau- tions for driving - including driv- ing at safe speeds for the condi- tions.

OBK059011

Driving your vehicle

325

ESC operation ESC ON condition

When the ignition is turned ON, ESC and ESC OFF indicator lights illuminate for approximately 3 sec- onds, then ESC is turned on.

Press the ESC OFF button for at least half a sec-

ond after turning the igni- tion ON to turn ESC off. (ESC OFF indicator will illuminate). To turn the ESC on, press the ESC OFF button (ESC OFF indicator light will go off).

When starting the engine, you may hear a slight tick- ing sound. This is the ESC performing an automatic system self-check and does not indicate a prob- lem.

When operating

When the ESC is in opera- tion, the ESC indicator light

blinks. When the Electronic

Stability Control is operat- ing properly, you can feel a slight pulsation in the vehi- cle. This is only the effect of brake control and indi- cates nothing unusual.

When moving out of the mud or driving on a slip- pery road, pressing the accelerator pedal may not cause the engine rpm (revolutions per minute) to increase.

ESC operation off ESC OFF state

This vehicle has 2 kinds of ESC off states. If the engine stops when ESC is off, ESC remains off. Upon restarting the engine, the ESC will automatically turn on again.

-

5 33

Driving your vehicle

ESC off state 1 To cancel ESC operation, press the ESC OFF button (ESC OFF ) shortly (ESC OFF indicator light (ESC OFF ) illuminates). At this state, the engine control function does not operate. It means the trac- tion control function does not oper- ate. Brake control function only operates.

ESC off state 2 To cancel ESC operation, press the ESC OFF button (ESC OFF ) for more than 3 seconds. ESC OFF indicator light (ESP OFF ) illumi- nates and ESP OFF warning chime will sound. At this state, the engine control function and brake control function do not operate. It means the vehicle stability control function does not operate any more.

ESC indicator (Electronic Stability Control)

The ESC indicator will illuminate when the ignition switch is turned ON, but should go off after approxi- mately 3 seconds. When the ESC is on, it monitors the driving conditions and under normal driving conditions, the ESC indicator will remain off. When a slippery or low traction con- dition is encountered, the ESC will operate, and the ESC indicator will blink to indicate the ESC is oper- ating. If ESC indicator illuminates while ESC is operating, the ESC may have a malfunction. Take your car to an authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have the system checked.

OBK052037L OBK052038L

For supervision cluster For supervision cluster

Driving your vehicle

345

ESC OFF indicator

The ESC OFF indicator will illumi- nate when the ignition switch is turned ON, but should go off after approximately 3 seconds. To switch to ESC OFF mode, press the ESC OFF button . The ESC OFF indica- tor will illuminate indicating the ESC is deactivated. If this indicator stays on when ESC OFF is not selected, the ESC may have a malfunction. Take your car to an authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have the system checked. With the ESC system in the stand by position, if you use the parking brake to stop the vehicle due abnormal brake operation, the ESC system may be stopped and ESC OFF indi- cator may illuminate for about 5 minutes.

ESC OFF usage When driving

ESC should be turned on for daily driving whenever possible. If ESC is turned off, it may be difficult to make a turn or drive up a hill.

To turn ESC off while driving, press the ESC OFF button while driv- ing on a flat road surface.

Never press the ESC OFF button while ESC is operating (ESC indica- tor light blinks). If ESC is turned off while ESC is operating, it may be very dangerous because of unexpected vehicle slip.

NOTICE When operating the vehicle on a

dynamometer, ensure that the ESC is turned off (ESC OFF light

illuminated). If the ESC is left on, it may prevent the vehicle speed from increasing, and result in false diagnosis.

Turning the ESC off does not affect ABS or brake system opera- tion.

CAUTION Driving with varying tire or wheel sizes may cause the ESC system to malfunction. When replacing tires, make sure they are the same size as your origi- nal tires.

WARNING The Electronic Stability Control system is only a driving aid; use precautions for safe driving by slowing down on curved, snowy, or icy roads. Drive slowly and dont attempt to accelerate whenever the ESC indicator light is blinking, or when the road surface is slippery.

CAUTION Do not use the parking brake to stop the vehicle, except in an emergency situation.

5 35

Driving your vehicle

Hill-start assist control (HAC) (if equipped) A vehicle has the tendency to slip back on a steep hill when it starts to go after stopping. The Hill-start Assist Control (HAC) prevents the vehicle from slipping back by operating the brakes automatically for about 2 sec- onds. The brakes are released when the accelerator pedal is depressed or after about 2 seconds.

NOTICE The HAC does not operate when

the transaxle shift lever is in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position.

The HAC activates even though the ESP is off but it does not acti- vate when the ESP has malfunc- tioned.

The HAC applies only to vehicles with manual transmission.

Good braking practices WARNING

Never press the ESC OFF but- ton while ESC is operating. If the ESC is turned off while ESC is operating, the vehicle may go out of control. To turn ESC off while driving, press the ESC OFF button while driving on a flat road sur- face.

WARNING Whenever leaving vehicle or

parking, always set the park- ing brake as far as possible and fully engage the vehicle's transmission into the park position. Vehicles not fully engaged in park with the park- ing brake set are at risk for moving inadvertently and injuring yourself or others.

All vehicles should always have the parking brake fully engaged when parking to avoid inadvertent movement of the car which can injure occupants or pedestrians.

WARNING The HAC is activated only for about 2 seconds, so when the vehicle is starting off always depress the accelerator pedal.

Driving your vehicle

365

After parking the vehicle, check to be sure the parking brake is not engaged and that the parking brake indicator light is out before driving away.

Driving through water may get the brakes wet. They can also get wet when the car is washed. Wet brakes can be dangerous! Your car will not stop as quickly if the brakes are wet. Wet brakes may cause the car to pull to one side. To dry the brakes, apply the brakes lightly until the braking action returns to normal, taking care to keep the car under control at all times. If the braking action does not return to normal, stop as soon as it is safe to do so and call an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.

Don't coast down hills with the car out of gear. This is extremely haz- ardous. Keep the car in gear at all times, use the brakes to slow down, then shift to a lower gear so that engine braking will help you maintain a safe speed.

Don't "ride" the brake pedal. Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving can be danger- ous because it can result in the brakes overheating and losing their effectiveness. It also increases the wear of the brake components.

If a tire goes flat while you are driv- ing, apply the brakes gently and keep the car pointed straight ahead while you slow down. When you are moving slowly enough for it to be safe to do so, pull off the road and stop in a safe place.

If your car is equipped with an automatic transmission, don't let your car creep forward. To avoid creeping forward, keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when the car is stopped.

Use caution when parking on a hill. Firmly engage the parking brake and place the shift lever in P. If your car is facing downhill, turn the front wheels into the curb to help keep the car from rolling. If your car is facing uphill, turn the front wheels away from the curb to help keep the car from rolling. If there is no curb or if it is required by other con- ditions to keep the car from rolling, block the wheels.

Under some conditions your park- ing brake can freeze in the engaged position. This is most like- ly to happen when there is an accumulation of snow or ice around or near the rear brakes or if the brakes are wet. If there is a risk that the parking brake may freeze, apply it only temporarily while you put the shift lever in P (automatic transmission) and block the rear wheels so the car cannot roll. Then release the parking brake.

Do not hold the vehicle on the upgrade with the accelerator pedal. This can cause the trans- mission to overheat. Always use the brake pedal or parking brake.

5 37

Driving your vehicle

The cruise control system allows you to program the vehicle to maintain a constant speed without pressing the accelerator pedal. This system is designed to function above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

NOTICE During normal cruise control opera- tion, when the SET switch is activat- ed or reactivated after applying the brakes, the cruise control will ener- gize after approximately 3 seconds. This delay is normal.

NOTICE To activate cruise control, depress the brake pedal at least once after turning the ignition switch to the ON position or starting the engine. This is to check if the brake switch which is important part to cancel cruise control is in normal condition.

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING If the cruise control is left on,

(CRUISE indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminat- ed) the cruise control can be switched on accidentally. Keep the cruise control sys- tem off (CRUISE indicator light OFF) when the cruise control is not in use, to avoid inadvertently setting a speed.

Use the cruise control system only when traveling on open highways in good weather.

(Continued)

(Continued) Do not use the cruise control

when it may not be safe to keep the car at a constant speed, for instance, driving in heavy or varying traffic, or on slippery (rainy, icy or snow- covered) or winding roads or over 6% up-hill or down-hill roads.

Pay particular attention to the driving conditions whenever using the cruise control sys- tem.

Be careful when driving down- hill using the cruise control system, which may increase the vehicle speed.

WARNING - Misuse cruise control

Do not use cruise control if the traffic situation does not allow you to drive safely at a constant speed and with sufficient dis- tance to the vehicle in front.

Driving your vehicle

385

To set cruise control speed: 1. Push the cruise switch on the

steering wheel to turn the system on. The CRUISE indicator light in the instrument cluster will illumi- nate.

2. Accelerate to the desired speed, which must be more than 25 mph (40 km/h) and less than 113 mph (180 km/h).

3. Move the lever (1) down (to SET-), and release it at the desired speed. The SET indicator light in the instrument cluster will illumi- nate. Release the accelerator pedal. The desired speed will automatically be maintained.

On a steep grade, the vehicle may slow down or speed up slightly while going uphill or downhill.

To increase cruise control set speed: Follow either of these procedures: Move the lever (1) up (to RES+)

and hold it. Your vehicle will accel- erate. Release the lever at the speed you want.

Move the lever (1) up (to RES+) and release it immediately. The cruising speed will increase by 1.0 mph (1.6 km/h) each time you move the lever up (to RES+) in this manner.

OBK052031 OBK052030OBK052029

5 39

Driving your vehicle

To decrease the cruising speed: Follow either of these procedures: Move the lever (1) down (to SET-)

and hold it. Your vehicle will gradu- ally slow down. Release the lever at the speed you want to maintain.

Move the lever (1) down (to SET-) and release it immediately. The cruising speed will decrease by 1.0 mph (1.6 km/h) each time you move the lever down (to SET-) in this manner.

To temporarily accelerate with the cruise control on: If you want to speed up temporarily when the cruise control is on, depress the accelerator pedal. Increased speed will not interfere with cruise control operation or change the set speed. To return to the set speed, take your foot off the accelerator. If you move the lever down (to SET-) at increased speed, the cruising speed will be set again. To cancel cruise control, do

one of the following: Press the brake pedal. Shift the shift lever into N (Neutral)

with an automatic transmission. Press the CANCEL switch located

on the steering wheel. Decrease the vehicle speed lower

than the memory speed by 9 mph (15 km/h).

Decrease the vehicle speed to less than approximately 20 mph (32 km/h).

Increase the vehicle speed to more than approximately 125 mph (200 km/h).

OBK052032OBK052031

Driving your vehicle

405

Operate the parking brake. Do not operate the parking brake while driving except in an emergency sit- uation.

Each of these actions will cancel cruise control operation (the SET indicator light in the instrument clus- ter will go off), but it will not turn the system off. If you wish to resume cruise control operation, move the lever up (to RES+). You will return to your previously preset speed. To resume cruising speed at

more than approximately 40 km/h (25 mph): If any method other than the cruise switch was used to cancel cruising speed and the system is still activat- ed, the most recent set speed will automatically resume when you move the lever (1) up (to RES+). It will not resume, however, if the vehicle speed has dropped below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

To turn cruise control off, do one of the following: Push the cruise switch (the

CRUISE indicator light in the instrument cluster will go off).

Turn the engine off. Both of these actions cancel cruise control operation. If you want to resume cruise control operation, repeat the steps provided in To set cruise control speed on the previous page.

OBK052030

5 41

Driving your vehicle

Your vehicle's fuel economy depends mainly on your style of driving, where you drive and when you drive. Each of these factors affects how many miles (kilometers) you can get from a gallon (liter) of fuel. To operate your vehicle as economically as possi- ble, use the following driving sugges- tions to help save money in both fuel and repairs: Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a mod-

erate rate. Don't make "jack-rabbit" starts or full-throttle shifts and main- tain a steady cruising speed. Don't race between stoplights.Try to adjust your speed to that of the other traffic so you don't have to change speeds unnecessarily. Avoid heavy traffic whenever possible. Always maintain a safe distance from other vehicles so you can avoid unnecessary brak- ing. This also reduces brake wear.

Drive at a moderate speed. The faster you drive the more fuel your vehicle uses. Driving at a moderate speed, in the highest gear appropri- ate for the conditions, especially on the highway, is one of the most effec- tive ways to reduce fuel consump- tion.

Don't "ride" the brake or clutch pedal. This can increase fuel con- sumption and also increase wear on these components. In addition, driving with your foot resting on the brake pedal may cause the brakes to overheat, which reduces their effectiveness and may lead to more serious consequences.

Take care of your tires. Keep them inflated to the recommended pres- sure. Incorrect inflation, either too much or too little, results in unnec- essary tire wear. Check the tire pressures at least once a month.

Be sure that the wheels are aligned correctly. Improper align- ment can result from hitting curbs or driving too fast over irregular surfaces. Poor alignment causes faster tire wear and may also result in other problems as well as greater fuel consumption.

Keep your car in good condition. For better fuel economy and reduced maintenance costs, main- tain your car in accordance with the maintenance schedule in sec- tion 7. If you drive your car in severe conditions, more frequent maintenance is required (see sec- tion 7 for details).

Keep your car clean. For maximum service, your vehicle should be kept clean and free of corrosive materials. It is especially important that mud, dirt, ice, etc. not be allowed to accumulate on the underside of the car. This extra weight can result in increased fuel consumption and also contribute to corrosion.

Travel lightly. Don't carry unneces- sary weight in your car. Weight reduces fuel economy.

Don't let the engine idle longer than necessary. If you are waiting (and not in traffic), turn off your engine and restart only when you're ready to go.

ECONOMICAL OPERATION

Driving your vehicle

425

Remember, your vehicle does not require extended warm-up. After the engine has started, allow the engine to run for 10 to 20 seconds prior to placing the vehicle in gear. In very cold weather, however, give your engine a slightly longer warm- up period.

Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine. Lugging is driving too slowly in too high a gear resulting in the engine bucking. If this happens, shift to a lower gear. Over-revving is racing the engine beyond its safe limit. This can be avoided by shifting at the recommended speeds.

Use your air conditioning sparingly. The air conditioning system is operated by engine power so your fuel economy is reduced when you use it.

Open windows at high speeds can reduce fuel economy.

Fuel economy is less in crosswinds and headwinds. To help offset some of this loss, slow down when driving in these conditions.

Keeping a vehicle in good operating condition is important both for econ- omy and safety. Therefore, have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer perform scheduled inspections and mainte- nance.

WARNING - Engine off during motion

Never turn the engine off to coast down hills or anytime the vehicle is in motion. The power steering and power brakes will not function properly without the engine running. Instead, keep the engine on and down- shift to an appropriate gear for engine braking effect. In addi- tion, turning off the ignition while driving could engage the steering wheel lock resulting in loss of vehicle steering which could cause serious injury or death.

5 43

Driving your vehicle

Hazardous driving conditions When hazardous driving conditions are encountered such as water, snow, ice, mud, sand, or similar haz- ards, follow these suggestions: Drive cautiously and allow extra

distance for braking. Avoid sudden movements in brak-

ing or steering.

When braking with non-ABS brakes pump the brake pedal with a light up-and-down motion until the vehicle is stopped.

If stalled in snow, mud, or sand, use second gear. Accelerate slow- ly to avoid spinning the drive wheels.

Use sand, rock salt, tire chains, or other non-slip material under the drive wheels to provide traction when stalled in ice, snow, or mud.

Rocking the vehicle If it is necessary to rock the vehicle to free it from snow, sand, or mud, first turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around your front wheels. Then, shift back and forth between 1st (First) and R (Reverse) in vehicles equipped with a manual transmission or R (Reverse) and any forward gear in vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission. Do not race the engine, and spin the wheels as little as possible. If you are still stuck after a few tries, have the vehicle pulled out by a tow vehicle to avoid engine overheating and possi- ble damage to the transmission.

SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS

WARNING - ABS Do not pump the brake pedal on a vehicle equipped with ABS.

WARNING - Downshifting Downshifting with an automatic transmission, while driving on slippery surfaces can cause an accident. The sudden change in tire speed could cause the tires to skid. Be careful when down- shifting on slippery surfaces.

CAUTION Prolonged rocking may cause engine over-heating, transmis- sion damage or failure, and tire damage.

OBK052019L

Driving your vehicle

445

NOTICE The ESC system should be turned OFF prior to rocking the vehicle.

Smooth cornering Avoid braking or gear changing in corners, especially when roads are wet. Ideally, corners should always be taken under gentle acceleration. If you follow these suggestions, tire wear will be held to a minimum.

Driving at night Because night driving presents more hazards than driving in the daylight, here are some important tips to remember: Slow down and keep more dis-

tance between you and other vehi- cles, as it may be more difficult to see at night, especially in areas where there may not be any street lights.

WARNING - Spinning tires

Do not spin the wheels, especial- ly at speeds more than 35 mph (56 km/h). Spinning the wheels at high speeds when the vehicle is stationary could cause a tire to overheat which could result in tire damage that may injure bystanders.

OBK059021

WARNING If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., then you may attempt to rock the vehicle free by moving it forward and backward. Do not attempt this procedure if people or objects are anywhere near the vehicle. During the rocking operation the vehicle may suddenly move for- ward of backward as it becomes unstuck, causing injury or dam- age to nearby people or objects.

OBK059020N

5 45

Driving your vehicle

Adjust your mirrors to reduce the glare from other driver's head- lights.

Keep your headlights clean and properly aimed. Dirty or improperly aimed headlights will make it much more difficult to see at night. Headlight operation when using windshield wipers is mandatory in some states.

Avoid staring directly at the head- lights of oncoming vehicles. You could be temporarily blinded, and it will take several seconds for your eyes to readjust to the darkness.

Driving in the rain Rain and wet roads can make driving dangerous, especially if youre not prepared for the slick pavement. Here are a few things to consider when driving in the rain: A heavy rainfall will make it harder

to see and will increase the dis- tance needed to stop your vehicle, so slow down.

Keep your windshield wiping equipment in good shape. Replace your windshield wiper blades when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield.

If your tires are not in good condi- tion, making a quick stop on wet pavement can cause a skid and possibly lead to an accident. Be sure your tires are in good shape.

Turn on your headlights to make it easier for others to see you.

Driving too fast through large pud- dles can affect your brakes. If you must go through puddles, try to drive through them slowly.

If you believe you may have gotten your brakes wet, apply them lightly while driving until normal braking operation returns.

OBK052022L

Driving your vehicle

465

Driving in flooded areas Avoid driving through flooded areas unless you are sure the water is no higher than the bottom of the wheel hub. Drive through any water slowly. Allow adequate stopping distance because brake performance may be affected. After driving through water, dry the brakes by gently applying them sev- eral times while the vehicle is moving slowly.

Driving off-road Drive carefully off-road because your vehicle may be damaged by rocks or roots of trees. Become familiar with the off-road conditions where you are going to drive before you begin driving.

Highway driving Tires Adjust the tire inflation pressures to specification. Low tire inflation pres- sures will result in overheating and possible failure of the tires. Avoid using worn or damaged tires which may result in reduced traction or tire failure.

NOTICE Never exceed the maximum tire inflation pressure shown on the tires.

OBK022001

5 47

Driving your vehicle

Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil High speed travel consumes more fuel than urban motoring. Do not for- get to check both engine coolant and engine oil.

Drive belt A loose or damaged drive belt may result in overheating of the engine.

WARNING Underinflated or overinflated

tires can cause poor handling, loss of vehicle control, and sudden tire failure leading to accidents, injuries, and even death. Always check tires for proper inflation before driv- ing. For proper tire pressures, refer to Tires and wheels in section 8.

Driving on tires with no or insufficient tread is danger- ous. Worn-out tires can result in loss of vehicle control, col- lisions, injury, and even death. Worn-out tires should be replaced as soon as possible and should never be used for driving. Always check the tire tread before driving your car. For further information and tread limits, refer to Tires and wheels in section 7.

Driving your vehicle

485

More severe weather conditions of winter result in greater wear and other problems. To minimize winter driving problems, you should follow these suggestions:

Snowy or icy conditions To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it may be necessary to use snow tires or to install tire chains on your tires. If snow tires are needed, it is neces- sary to select tires equivalent in size and type of the original equipment tires. Failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your car. Furthermore, speeding, rapid acceleration, sudden brake applica- tions, and sharp turns are potentially very hazardous practices. During deceleration, use engine braking to the fullest extent. Sudden brake applications on snowy or icy roads may cause skids to occur. You need to keep sufficient distance between the vehicle in operation in front and your vehicle. Also, apply the brake gently. It should be noted that installing tire chains will provide a greater driving force, but will not prevent side skids.

NOTICE Tire chains are not legal in all coun- tries. Check the country laws before fitting tire chains.

Snow tires If you mount snow tires on your vehi- cle, make sure they are radial tires of the same size and load range as the original tires. Mount snow tires on all four wheels to balance your vehicles handling in all weather conditions. Keep in mind that the traction provid- ed by snow tires on dry roads may not be as high as your vehicle's orig- inal equipment tires.You should drive cautiously even when the roads are clear. Check with the tire dealer for maximum speed recommendations.

Do not install studded tires without first checking local, state and munic- ipal regulations for possible restric- tions against their use.

WINTER DRIVING

WARNING - Snow tire size

Snow tires should be equivalent in size and type to the vehicle's standard tires. Otherwise, the safety and handling of your vehi- cle may be adversely affected.

OBK059025

5 49

Driving your vehicle

Tire chains Since the sidewalls of radial tires are thinner, they can be damaged by mounting some types of tire chains on them. Therefore, the use of snow tires is recommended instead of tire chains. Do not mount tire chains on vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels; tire chains may cause dam- age to the wheels. If tire chains must be used, use wire-type chains with a thickness of less than 0.47 in (12 mm). Damage to your vehicle caused by improper tire chain use is not covered by your vehicle manufacturers war- ranty. Install tire chains only on the rear tires.

Chain installation

When installing chains, follow the manufacturer's instructions and mount them as tightly as you can. Drive slowly with chains installed. If you hear the chains contacting the body or chassis, stop and tighten them. If they still make contact, slow down until it stops. Remove the chains as soon as you begin driving on cleared roads.

CAUTION Make sure the tire chains are

the correct size and type for your tires. Incorrect tire chains can cause damage to the vehicle body and suspen- sion and may not be covered by your vehicle manufacturer warranty. Also, the tire chain connecting hooks may be damaged from contacting vehicle components causing the tire chains to come loose from the tire. Make sure the tire chains are SAE class S certified.

Always check chain installa- tion for proper mounting after driving approximately 0.3 to 0.6 miles (0.5 to 1 km) to ensure safe mounting. Retighten or remount the chains if they are loose.

WARNING - Mounting chains

When mounting tire chains, park the vehicle on level ground away from traffic. Turn on the vehicle Hazard Warning flashers and place a triangular emer- gency warning device behind the vehicle if available. Always place the vehicle in P (Park), apply the parking brake and turn off the engine before installing tire chains.

1JBA4068

Driving your vehicle

505

Use high quality ethylene gly- col coolant Your vehicle is delivered with high quality ethylene glycol coolant in the cooling system. It is the only type of coolant that should be used because it helps prevent corrosion in the cool- ing system, lubricates the water pump and prevents freezing. Be sure to replace or replenish your coolant in accordance with the maintenance schedule in section 7. Before winter, have your coolant tested to assure that its freezing point is sufficient for the temperatures anticipated during the winter.

Check battery and cables Winter puts additional burdens on the battery system. Visually inspect the battery and cables as described in section 7. The level of charge in your battery can be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a service station.

Change to "winter weight" oil if necessary In some climates it is recommended that a lower viscosity "winter weight" oil be used during cold weather. See section 8 for recommendations. If you aren't sure what weight oil you should use, consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Check spark plugs and igni- tion system Inspect your spark plugs as described in section 7 and replace them if necessary. Also check all ignition wiring and components to be sure they are not cracked, worn or damaged in any way.

WARNING - Tire chains The use of chains may

adversely affect vehicle han- dling.

Do not exceed 20 mph (30 km/h) or the chain manufac- turers recommended speed limit, whichever is lower.

Drive carefully and avoid bumps, holes, sharp turns, and other road hazards, which may cause the vehicle to bounce.

Avoid sharp turns or locked- wheel braking.

CAUTION Chains that are the wrong size

or improperly installed can damage your vehicle's brake lines, suspension, body and wheels.

Stop driving and retighten the chains any time you hear them hitting the vehicle.

5 51

Driving your vehicle

To keep locks from freezing To keep the locks from freezing, squirt an approved de-icer fluid or glycerine into the key opening. If a lock is covered with ice, squirt it with an approved de-icing fluid to remove the ice. If the lock is frozen internally, you may be able to thaw it out by using a heated key. Handle the heat- ed key with care to avoid injury.

Use approved window washer anti-freeze in system To keep the water in the window washer system from freezing, add an approved window washer anti-freeze solution in accordance with instruc- tions on the container. Window wash- er anti-freeze is available from an authorized HYUNDAI dealer and most auto parts outlets. Do not use engine coolant or other types of anti- freeze as these may damage the paint finish.

Don't let your parking brake freeze Under some conditions your parking brake can freeze in the engaged position. This is most likely to hap- pen when there is an accumulation of snow or ice around or near the rear brakes or if the brakes are wet. If there is a risk the parking brake may freeze, apply it only temporarily while you put the gear shift lever in P and block the rear wheels so the car cannot roll. Then release the parking brake.

Don't let ice and snow accu- mulate underneath Under some conditions, snow and ice can build up under the fenders and interfere with the steering. When driving in severe winter conditions where this may happen, you should periodically check underneath the car to be sure the movement of the front wheels and the steering com- ponents is not obstructed.

Carry emergency equipment Depending on the severity of the weather where you drive your car, you should carry appropriate emer- gency equipment. Some of the items you may want to carry include tire chains, tow straps or chains, flash- light, emergency flares, sand, a shovel, jumper cables, a window scraper, gloves, ground cloth, cover- alls, a blanket, etc.

Driving your vehicle

525

Tire and loading information label The label located on the driver's door sill gives the original tire size, cold tire pressures recommended for your vehicle, the number of people that can be in your vehicle and vehicle capacity weight.

Vehicle capacity weight: 688 lbs. (312 kg)

Vehicle capacity weight is the maxi- mum combined weight of occupants and cargo.

Seating capacity: Total : 4 persons

(Front seat : 2 persons, Rear seat : 2 persons)

Seating capacity is the maximum number of occupants including a driver, your vehicle may carry. However, the seating capacity may be reduced based upon the weight of all of the occupants, and the weight of the cargo being carried. Do not overload the vehicle as there is a limit to the total weight, or load limit including occupants and cargo, the vehicle can carry.

VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT

OBK062106N

OBK062107N

OBK062108N

OBK062105N

5 53

Driving your vehicle

Towing capacity: We do not recommend using this vehicle for trailer towing.

Cargo capacity: The cargo capacity of your vehicle will increase or decrease depending on the weight and the number of occupants.

Steps for determining correct load limit 1. Locate the statement "The com-

bined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.'' on your vehicle's placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and lug- gage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lbs. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and lug- gage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trail- er, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

NOTICE We do not recommend using this vehicle for trailer towing.

Driving your vehicle

545

OBK059034N

Item Description Total

A Vehicle Capacity 688 lbs

Weight (312 kg) Subtract Occupant

B Weight 688 lbs

172 lbs (78 kg) 4 (312 kg)

C Available Cargo and 0 lbs

Luggage weight (0 kg)

Example 3

Refer to your vehicles tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle's capacity weight and seating positions. The combined weight of the driver, passengers and cargo should never exceed your vehicle's capacity weight.

C190F01JM

Item Description Total

A Vehicle Capacity 688 lbs

Weight (312 kg) Subtract Occupant

B Weight 300 lbs

150 lbs (68 kg) 2 (136 kg)

C Available Cargo and 388 lbs

Luggage weight (176 kg)

Example 1

A B C

OBK059035N

Item Description Total

A Vehicle Capacity 688 lbs

Weight (312 kg) Subtract Occupant

B Weight 600 lbs

150 lbs (68 kg) 4 (272 kg)

C Available Cargo and 88 lbs

Luggage weight (40 kg)

Example 2

5 55

Driving your vehicle

Certification label The certification label is located on the driver's door sill at the center pil- lar. This label shows the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle. This is called the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo. This label also tells you the maxi- mum weight that can be supported by the front and rear axles, called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).

To find out the actual loads on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle.Your dealer can help you with this. Be sure to spread out your load equally on both sides of the center- line.

The label will help you decide how much cargo and installed equipment your vehicle can carry.

If you carry items inside your vehicle - like suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else - they are moving as fast as the vehicle. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, the items will keep going and can cause an injury if they strike the driv- er or a passenger.

OEN056020

WARNING - Over loading Never exceed the GVWR for

your vehicle, the GAWR for either the front or rear axle and vehicle capacity weight. Exceeding these ratings can cause an accident or vehicle damage.You can calculate the weight of your load by weigh- ing the items (or people) before putting them in the vehicle. Be careful not to over- load your vehicle.

(Continued)

(Continued) Do not load your vehicle any

heavier than the GVWR, either the maximum front or rear GAWR and vehicle capacity weight. If you do, parts, including tires on your vehicle can break, and it can change the way your vehicle handles and braking ability. This could cause you to lose control and crash. Also, overloading can shorten the life of your vehi- cle.

Driving your vehicle

565

WARNING Overloading your vehicle can

cause heat buildup in your vehicle's tires and possible tire failure that could lead to a crash.

Overloading your vehicle can cause increased stopping dis- tances that could lead to a crash.

A crash resulting from poor handling, vehicle damage, tire failure, or increased stopping distances could result in seri- ous injury or death.

WARNING - Loose cargo Items you carry inside your vehicle can strike and injure occupants in a sudden stop or turn, or in a crash. Put items in the cargo area of

your vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.

Never stack items, like suit- cases, inside the vehicle above the tops of the seats.

Do not leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle.

When you carry something inside the vehicle, secure it.

CAUTION Overloading your vehicle may

cause damage. Repairs would not be covered by your warran- ty. Do not overload your vehicle.

Using heavier suspension com- ponents to get added durability might not change your weight ratings. Ask your dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way.

5 57

Driving your vehicle

This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating capability. Properly loading your vehicle will provide maximum return of the vehi- cle design performance. Before load- ing your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determin- ing your vehicle's weight ratings, from the vehicle's specifications and the certification label:

Base curb weight This is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or option- al equipment.

Vehicle curb weight This is the weight of your new vehicle when you picked it up from your deal- er plus any aftermarket equipment.

Cargo weight This figure includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight, including cargo and optional equipment.

GAW (Gross axle weight) This is the total weight placed on each axle (front and rear) - including vehicle curb weight and all payload.

GAWR (Gross axle weight rating) This is the maximum allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These numbers are shown on the certification label. The total load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR.

GVW (Gross vehicle weight) This is the Base Curb Weight plus actual Cargo Weight plus passen- gers.

GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating) This is the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle (including all options, equipment, passengers and cargo). The GVWR is shown on the certification label located on the drivers (or front pas- sengers) door sill.

Overloading VEHICLE WEIGHT

WARNING - Vehicle weight

The gross axle weight rating (GAWR) and the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) for your vehicle are on the certification label attached to the driver's door. Exceeding these ratings can cause an accident or vehi- cle damage. You can calculate the weight of your load by weighing the items (and people) before putting them in the vehi- cle. Be careful not to overload your vehicle.

We do not recommend using this vehicle for trailer towing.

TRAILER TOWING

5 58

Driving your vehicle

What to do in an emergency

Road warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

In case of an emergency while driving. . . . . . . . . . 6-2 If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing . . . . . 6-2 If you have a flat tire while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 If engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

If the engine does not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 If engine dose not turn over or turns over slowly . . 6-3 If engine turns over normally but does not start . . . 6-3

Emergency starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Push-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

If the engine overheats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) . . . . . . . 6-7 TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) malfunction

indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Changing a tire with TPMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 If you have a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

Jack and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 Removing and storing the spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 Changing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20 Towing service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20 Removable towing hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21 Emergency towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22

6

What to do in an emergency

26

ROAD WARNING

Hazard warning flasher The hazard warning flasher serves as a warning to other drivers to exer- cise extreme caution when approaching, overtaking, or passing your vehicle.

It should be used whenever emer- gency repairs are being made or when the vehicle is stopped near the edge of a roadway. Depress the flasher switch with the ignition switch in any position. The flasher switch is located in the center console switch panel. All turn signal lights will flash simultaneously.

The hazard warning flasher oper- ates whether your vehicle is run- ning or not.

The turn signals do not work when the hazard flasher is on.

Care must be taken when using the hazard warning flasher while the vehicle is being towed.

If the engine stalls at a cross- road or crossing If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing, set the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position and then push the vehicle to a safe place.

If you have a flat tire while driving If a tire goes flat while you are driv- ing: 1.Take your foot off the accelerator

pedal and let the car slow down while driving straight ahead. Do not apply the brakes immediately or attempt to pull off the road as this may cause a loss of control. When the car has slowed to such a speed that it is safe to do so, brake care- fully and pull off the road. Drive off the road as far as possible and park on firm, level ground. If you are on a divided highway, do not park in the median area between the two traffic lanes.

IN CASE OF AN EMER- GENCY WHILE DRIVING

OBK042044N

6 3

What to do in an emergency

2.When the car is stopped, turn on your emergency hazard flashers, set the parking brake and put the transmission in P (automatic trans- mission) or reverse (manual trans- mission).

3.Have all passengers get out of the car. Be sure they all get out on the side of the car that is away from traffic.

4.When changing a flat tire, follow the instruction provided later in this section.

If engine stalls while driving 1. Reduce your speed gradually,

keeping a straight line. Move cau- tiously off the road to a safe place.

2. Turn on your emergency flashers. 3. Try to start the engine again. If

your vehicle will not start, contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer or seek other qualified assistance.

If engine doesn't turn over or turns over slowly 1. If your vehicle has an automatic

transmission, be sure the gear selector lever is in N(Neutral) or P(Park) and the emergency brake is set.

2. Check the battery connections to be sure they are clean and tight.

3. Turn on the interior light. If the light dims or goes out when you oper- ate the starter, the battery is dis- charged.

4. Check the starter connections to be sure they are securely tight- ened.

5. Do not push or pull the vehicle to start it. See instructions for "Jump starting".

If the engine turns over nor- mally but does not start 1. Check fuel level. 2. With the ignition switch in the

LOCK position, check all connec- tors at the ignition coils and spark plugs. Reconnect any that may be disconnected or loose.

3. If the engine still does not start, call an authorized HYUNDAI deal- er or seek other qualified assis- tance.

IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START

WARNING If the engine will not start, do not push or pull the car to start it.This could result in a collision or cause other damage.

What to do in an emergency

46

EMERGENCY STARTING

Connect cables in numerical order and disconnect in reverse order.

Jump starting Jump starting can be dangerous if done incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid harm to yourself or damage to your vehicle or battery, follow the jump starting procedures. If in doubt, we strongly recommend that you have a competent technician or towing serv- ice jump start your vehicle.

CAUTION Use only a 12-volt jumper sys- tem. You can damage a 12-volt starting motor, ignition system, and other electrical parts beyond repair by use of a 24-volt power supply (either two 12-volt batteries in series or a 24-volt motor generator set).

WARNING - Battery Keep all flames or sparks

away from the battery. The battery produces hydrogen gas which may explode if exposed to flame or sparks. If these instructions are not followed exactly, serious per- sonal injury and damage to the vehicle may occur! If you are not sure how to follow this procedure, seek qualified assistance. Automobile bat- teries contain sulfuric acid. This is poisonous and highly corrosive. When jump start- ing, wear protective glasses and be careful not to get acid on yourself, your clothing or on the car.

Do not attempt to jump start the vehicle if the discharged battery is frozen or if the elec- trolyte level is low; the battery may rupture or explode.

WARNING - Battery Never attempt to check the elec- trolyte level of the battery as this may cause the battery to rupture or explode causing seri- ous injury.

OBK062023

6 5

What to do in an emergency

Jump starting procedure 1. Make sure the booster battery is

12-volt and that its negative termi- nal is grounded.

2. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, do not allow the vehicles to touch.

3. Turn off all unnecessary electrical loads.

4. Connect the jumper cables in the exact sequence shown in the illus- tration. First connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive termi- nal of the discharged battery (1), then connect the other end to the positive terminal on the booster battery (2). Proceed to connect one end of the other jumper cable to the negative terminal of the booster battery (3), then the other end to a solid, sta- tionary, metallic point (for example, the engine lifting bracket) away from the battery (4). Do not con- nect it to or near any part that moves when the engine is cranked. Do not allow the jumper cables to contact anything except the correct battery terminals or the correct ground. Do not lean over the bat- tery when making connections.

5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the booster battery and let it run at 2,000 rpm, then start the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery.

If the cause of your battery discharg- ing is not apparent, you should have your vehicle checked by an author- ized HYUNDAI dealer.

Push-starting Your manual transmission-equipped vehicle should not be push-started because it might damage the emis- sion control system. Vehicles equipped with automatic transmission cannot be push-started. Follow the directions in this section for jump-starting.

WARNING Never tow a vehicle to start it because the sudden surge for- ward when the engine starts could cause a collision with the tow vehicle.

CAUTION - Battery cables Do not connect the jumper cable from the negative terminal of the booster battery to the negative terminal of the dis- charged battery. This can cause the discharged battery to over- heat and crack, releasing bat- tery acid.

What to do in an emergency

66

IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS If your temperature gauge indicates overheating, you experience a loss of power, or hear loud pinging or knocking, the engine is probably too hot. If this happens, you should: :1. Pull off the road and stop as soon

as it is safe to do so. 2. Place the shift lever in P (automat-

ic transmission) or neutral (manual transmission) and set the parking brake. If the air conditioning is on, turn it off.

3. If engine coolant is running out under the car or steam is coming out from underneath the hood, stop the engine. Do not open the hood until the coolant has flow stopped. If there is no visible loss of engine coolant and no steam, leave the engine running and check to be sure the engine cool- ing fan is operating. If the fan is not running, turn the engine off.

4. Check to see if the water pump drive belt is missing. If it is not missing, check to see that it is tight. If the drive belt seems to be satisfactory, check for coolant leaking from the radiator, hoses or under the car. (If the air condition- ing had been in use, it is normal for cold water to be draining from it when you stop).

5. If the water pump drive belt is bro- ken or engine coolant is leaking out, stop the engine immediately and call the nearest authorized HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.

6.If you cannot find the cause of the overheating, wait until the engine temperature has returned to nor- mal. Then, if coolant has been lost, carefully add coolant to the reser- voir to bring the fluid level in the reservoir up to the halfway mark.

7.Proceed with caution, keeping alert for further signs of overheat- ing. If overheating happens again, call an authorized HYUNDAI deal- er for assistance.

WARNING While the engine is running, keep hair, hands and clothing away from moving parts such as the fan and drive belts to pre- vent injury.

WARNING Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. This may result in coolant to be blown out of the opening and cause serious burns.

CAUTION Serious loss of coolant indicates there is a leak in the cooling sys- tem and this should be checked as soon as possible by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

6 7

What to do in an emergency

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)

(1) Low Tire Pressure Telltale/TPMS Malfunction Indicator

(2) Low Tire Pressure Position Telltale

Each tire, including the spare (if pro- vided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle plac- ard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire infla- tion pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pres- sure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi- cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicles handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the drivers responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not oper- ating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illumi- nated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the TPMS malfunction indica- tor remains illuminated after blinking for approximately 1 minute, the sys- tem may not be able to detect or sig- nal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alter- nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from function- ing properly.

OBK062024

OBK044281L

Supervision Type

What to do in an emergency

86

Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alter- nate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

NOTICE If any of the below happens, we rec- ommend that the system be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. 1.The low tire pressure telltale/

TPMS malfunction indicator does not illuminate for 3 seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the ON or engine is running.

2.The TPMS malfunction indicator remains illuminated after blinking for approximately 1 minute.

3.The Low tire pressure position telltale remains illuminated.

Low tire pressure telltale

Low tire pres- sure position telltale

When the tire pressure monitoring system warning indicators are illumi- nated and warning massage dis- played on the cluster LCD display, one or more of your tires is signifi- cantly under-inflated. The low tire pressure position telltale light will indicate which tire is significantly under-inflated by illuminating the cor- responding position light. If either telltale illuminates, immedi- ately reduce your speed, avoid hard cornering and anticipate increased stopping distances. You should stop and check your tires as soon as pos- sible. Inflate the tires to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehi- cles placard or tire inflation pressure label located on the drivers side cen- ter pillar outer panel.

If you cannot reach a service station or if the tire cannot hold the newly added air, replace the low pressure tire with the spare tire. If you drive the vehicle for about 10 minutes at speeds above 15 mph (25 km/h) after replacing the low pres- sure tire with the spare tire, the below will happen: The TPMS malfunction indicator

may blink for approximately 1 minute and then remain continuously illumi- nated because the TPMS sensor is not mounted on the spare wheel.

NOTICE The spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure sensor.

OBK044281L

6 9

What to do in an emergency

TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) malfunction indicator

The TPMS malfunction indicator will illuminate after it blinks for approxi- mately one minute when there is a problem with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System. Have the system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible to determine the cause of the problem.

NOTICE If there is a malfunction with the TPMS, the low tire pressure position telltale will not be displayed even though the vehicle has an under- inflated tire.

WARNING - Low pressure damage

Significantly low tire pressure makes the vehicle unstable and can contribute to loss of vehicle control and increased braking distances. Continued driving on low pres- sure tires can cause the tires to overheat and fail.

CAUTION In winter or cold weather, the low tire pressure telltale may be illuminated if the tire pressure was adjusted to the recom- mended tire inflation pressure in warm weather. It does not mean your TPMS is malfunction- ing because the decreased tem- perature leads to a proportional lowering of tire pressure. When you drive your vehicle from a warm area to a cold area or from a cold area to a warm area, or the outside temperature is greatly higher or lower, you should check the tire inflation pressure and adjust the tires to the recommended tire inflation pressure.

What to do in an emergency

106

Changing a tire with TPMS If you have a flat tire, the Low Tire Pressure and Position telltales will come on. Have the flat tire repaired by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible or replace the flat tire with the spare tire.

Each wheel is equipped with a tire pressure sensor mounted inside the tire behind the valve stem. You must use TPMS specific wheels. It is rec- ommended that you always have your tires serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

If you drive the vehicle for about 10 minutes at speeds above 15 mph (25 km/h) after replacing the low pres- sure tire with the spare tire, the below will happen: The TPMS malfunction indicator

may blink for approximately 1 minute and then remain continu- ously illuminated because the TPMS sensor is not mounted on the spare wheel.

CAUTION The TPMS malfunction indica-

tor may blink for approximate- ly 1 minute and then remain continuously illuminated if the vehicle is moving around elec- tric power supply cables or radio transmitter such as at police stations, government and public offices, broadcast- ing stations, military installa- tions, airports, or transmitting towers, etc. This can interfere with normal operation of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).

The TPMS malfunction indica- tor may blink for approximate- ly 1 minute and then remain continuously illuminated if the snow chains are used or some separate electronic devices such as notebook computer, mobile charger, remote starter or navigation etc., are used in the vehicle. This can interfere with normal operation of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).

CAUTION Never use a puncture-repairing agent not approved by HYUNDAI dealer to repair and/or inflate a low pressure tire.Tire sealant not approved by HYUNDAI dealer may damage the tire pressure sensor.

6 11

What to do in an emergency

You may not be able to identify a tire with low pressure by simply looking at it. Always use a good quality tire pressure gauge to measure. Please note that a tire that is hot (from being driven) will have a higher pressure measurement than a tire that is cold. A cold tire means the vehicle has been sitting for 3 hours and driven for less than 1 mile (1.6 km) in that 3 hour period. Allow the tire to cool before measur- ing the inflation pressure. Always be sure the tire is cold before inflating to the recommended pressure.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and 2. This device must accept any inter-

ference received, including inter- ference that may cause undesired operation.

WARNING - Protecting TPMS

Tampering with, modifying, or disabling the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) com- ponents may interfere with the system's ability to warn the driv- er of low tire pressure condi- tions and/or TPMS malfunctions. Tampering with, modifying, or disabling the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) com- ponents may void the warranty for that portion of the vehicle.

WARNING - TPMS The TPMS cannot alert you to

severe and sudden tire dam- age caused by external factors such as nails or road debris.

If you feel any vehicle instabil- ity, immediately take your foot off the accelerator, apply the brakes gradually with light force, and slowly move to a safe position off the road.

CAUTION Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

What to do in an emergency

126

IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE

Jack and tools The jack, jack handle, and wheel lug nut wrench are stored in the luggage compartment. Pull up the luggage box cover to reach this equipment. (1) Jack handle (2) Jack (3) Wheel lug nut wrench

Jacking instructions The jack is provided for emergency tire changing only. To prevent the jack from rattling while the vehicle is in motion, store it properly. Follow jacking instructions to reduce the possibility of personal injury.

OBK069001A WARNING - Changing

tires Never attempt vehicle repairs

in the traffic lanes of a public road or highway.

Always move the vehicle com- pletely off the road and onto the shoulder before trying to change a tire. The jack should be used on level firm ground. If you cannot find a firm, level place off the road, call a tow- ing service company for assistance.

(Continued)

(Continued) Be sure to use the correct front

and rear jacking positions on the vehicle; never use the bumpers or any other part of the vehicle for jacking support.

The vehicle can easily roll off the jack causing serious injury or death. No person should place any portion of their body under a vehicle that is support- ed only by a jack; use vehicle support stands.

Do not start or run the engine while the vehicle is on the jack.

Do not allow anyone to remain in the vehicle while it is on the jack.

Make sure any children pres- ent are in a secure place away from the road and from the vehicle to be raised with the jack.

6 13

What to do in an emergency

Removing and storing the spare tire Turn the tire hold-down wing bolt counterclockwise. Store the tire in the reverse order of removal. To prevent the spare tire and tools from rattling while the vehicle is in motion, store them properly.

If it is hard to loosen the tire hold-down wing bolt by a hand, you can loosen it easily using the Jack handle.

1. Put the Jack handle (1) into the inside of tire hold-down wing bolt.

2. Turn the tire hold-down wing bolt counterclockwise by the Jack han- dle to utilize the principles of the lever and fulcrum.

Changing tires 1. Park on a level surface and apply

the parking brake firmly. 2. Shift the shift lever into R(Reverse)

with manual transmission or P(Park) with automatic transmission.

3. Activate the hazard warning flasher.

OBK069002 OBK063002 OBK062004L

What to do in an emergency

146

4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench, jack, jack handle, and spare tire from the vehicle.

5. Block both the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite the jack position.

6. Loosen the wheel lug nuts coun- terclockwise one turn each, but do not remove any nut until the tire has been raised off the ground.

OBK069003

WARNING - Changing a tire

To prevent vehicle movement while changing a tire, always set the parking brake fully, and always block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel being changed.

We recommend that the wheels of the vehicle be blocked, and that no person remain in the vehicle that is being jacked.

OBK062014L

6 15

What to do in an emergency

7. Place the jack at the front or rear jacking position closest to the tire you are changing. Place the jack at the designated locations under the frame. The jacking positions are plates welded to the frame with two tabs and a raised dot to index with the jack.

8. Insert the jack handle into the jack and turn it clockwise, raising the vehicle until the tire just clears the ground. This measurement is approximately 30 mm (1.2 in). Before removing the wheel lug nuts, make sure the vehicle is sta- ble and that there is no chance for movement or slippage.

9. Loosen the wheel nuts and remove them with your fingers. Slide the wheel off the studs and lay it flat so it cannot roll away. To put the wheel on the hub, pick up the spare tire, line up the holes with the studs and slide the wheel onto them. If this is difficult, tip the wheel slightly and get the top hole in the wheel lined up with the top stud. Then jiggle the wheel back and forth until the wheel can be slid over the other studs.

WARNING - Jack location To reduce the possibility of injury, be sure to use only the jack provided with the vehicle and in the correct jack position; never use any other part of the vehicle for jack support.

OBK069022OBK069015

What to do in an emergency

166

10. To reinstall the wheel, hold it on the studs, put the wheel nuts on the studs and tighten them finger tight.The nuts should be installed with their tapered small diameter ends directed inward. Jiggle the tire to be sure it is completely seated, then tighten the nuts as much as possible with your fin- gers again.

11. Insert the jack handle into the jack and turn it counterclockwise to lower the vehicle to the ground.

Then position the wrench as shown in the drawing and tighten the wheel nuts. Be sure the socket is seated completely over the nut. Do not stand on the wrench handle or use an extension pipe over the wrench han- dle. Go around the wheel tightening every other nut until they are all tight. Then double-check each nut for tightness. After changing wheels, have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer tighten the wheel nuts to their proper torque as soon as possible.

Wheel nut tightening torque: Steel wheel & aluminum alloy wheel: 65~79 lbft (9~11 kgm)

WARNING Wheels may have sharp edges. Handle them carefully to avoid possible severe injury. Before putting the wheel into place, be sure that there is nothing on the hub or wheel (such as mud, tar, gravel, etc.) that prevents with the wheel from fitting solidly against the hub. If there is, remove it. If there is not good contact on the mount- ing surface between the wheel and hub, the wheel nuts could come loose and cause the loss of a wheel. Loss of a wheel may result in loss of control of the vehicle. This may cause serious injury or death.

OBK069016

6 17

What to do in an emergency

If you have a tire gauge, remove the valve cap and check the air pressure. If the pressure is lower than recom- mended, drive slowly to the nearest service station and inflate to the cor- rect pressure. If it is too high, adjust it until it is correct. Always reinstall the valve cap after checking or adjusting tire pressure. If the cap is not replaced, air may leak from the tire. If you lose a valve cap, buy another and install it as soon as pos- sible. After you have changed wheels, always secure the flat tire in its place and return the jack and tools to their proper storage locations.

To prevent the jack, jack handle, wheel lug nut wrench and spare tire from rattling while the vehicle is in motion, store them properly.

CAUTION Your vehicle has metric threads on the wheel studs and nuts. Make certain during wheel removal that the same nuts that were removed are reinstalled - or, if replaced, that nuts with metric threads and the same chamfer configuration are used. Installation of a non-metric thread nut on a metric stud or vice-versa will not secure the wheel to the hub properly and will damage the stud so that it must be replaced. Note that most lug nuts do not have metric threads. Be sure to use extreme care in checking for thread style before installing aftermarket lug nuts or wheels. If in doubt, consult an author- ized HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING - Wheel studs If the studs are damaged, they may lose their ability to retain the wheel.This could lead to the loss of the wheel and a collision resulting in serious injuries.

WARNING - Inadequate spare tire pressure

Check the inflation pressures as soon as possible after installing the spare tire. Adjust it to the specified pressure, if necessary. Refer to Tires and wheels section 8.

What to do in an emergency

186

Important - use of compact spare tire (if equipped) Your vehicle is equipped with a com- pact spare tire. This compact spare tire takes up less space than a regu- lar-size tire. This tire is smaller than a conventional tire and is designed for temporary use only.

The compact spare should be inflat- ed to 60 psi (420 kPa).

NOTICE Check the inflation pressure after installing the spare tire. Adjust it to the specified pressure, as necessary.

When using a compact spare tire, observe the following precautions: Under no circumstances should

you exceed 50 mph (80 km/h); a higher speed could damage the tire.

Ensure that you drive slowly enough for the road conditions to avoid all hazards. Any road hazard, such as a pothole or debris, could seriously damage the compact spare.

Any continuous road use of this tire could result in tire failure, loss of vehicle control, and possible per- sonal injury.

Do not exceed the vehicles maxi- mum load rating or the load-carry- ing capacity shown on the sidewall of the compact spare tire.

Avoid driving over obstacles. The compact spare tire diameter is smaller than the diameter of a con- ventional tire and reduces the ground clearance approximately 1 inch (25 mm), which could result in damage to the vehicle.

CAUTION You should drive carefully

when the compact spare tire is in use. The compact spare tire should be replaced by the proper conventional tire and rim at the first opportunity.

The operation of this vehicle is not recommended with more than one compact spare tire in use at the same time.

WARNING The compact spare tire is for emergency use only. Do not operate your vehicle on this compact spare at speeds over 50 mph (80 km/h). The original tire should be repaired or replaced as soon as possible to avoid failure of the spare possi- bly leading to personal injury or death.

6 19

What to do in an emergency

Do not take this vehicle through an automatic car wash while the com- pact spare tire is installed.

Do not use tire chains on the com- pact spare tire. Because of the smaller size, a tire chain will not fit properly. This could damage the vehicle and result in loss of the chain.

Do not use the compact spare tire on any other vehicle because this tire has been designed especially for your vehicle.

The compact spare tires tread life is shorter than a regular tire. Inspect your compact spare tire regularly and replace worn com- pact spare tires with the same size and design, mounted on the same wheel.

The compact spare tire should not be used on any other wheels, nor should standard tires, snow tires, wheel covers or trim rings be used with the compact spare wheel. If such use is attempted, damage to these items or other car compo- nents may occur.

Do not use more than one compact spare tire at a time.

Do not tow a trailer while the com- pact spare tire is installed.

What to do in an emergency

206

TOWING

Towing service If emergency towing is necessary, we recommend having it done by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a commercial tow-truck service. Proper lifting and towing procedures are necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle. The use of wheel dollies or flatbed is recommended.

It is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the front wheels on the ground (without dollies) and the rear wheels off the ground. If any of the loaded wheels or sus- pension components are damaged or the vehicle is being towed with the rear wheels on the ground, use a towing dolly under the rear wheels. When being towed by a commercial tow truck and wheel dollies are not used, the rear of the vehicle should always be lifted, not the front.

OBK069017

A

B

C dolly

OBK069018

OBK069019

CAUTION Do not tow the vehicle with the

rear wheels on the ground as this may cause damage to the vehicle.

Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Use wheel lift or flatbed equipment.

6 21

What to do in an emergency

When towing your vehicle in an emergency without wheel dollies : 1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC

position. 2. Place the shift lever in N (Neutral). 3. Release the parking brake.

Removable towing hook (if equipped) 1. Open the trunk, and remove the

towing hook from the tool case. 2. Remove the hole cover pressing

the lower part of the cover on the front or rear bumper.

3. Install the towing hook by turning it clockwise into the hole until it is fully secured.

4. Remove the towing hook and install the cover after use.

CAUTION Failure to place the shift lever in N (Neutral) may cause internal damage to the transmission.

OBK062010

OBK062011

What to do in an emergency

226

Emergency towing If towing is necessary, we recom- mend you to have it done by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a commercial tow truck service.

If towing service is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency tow- ing hook under the front (or rear) of the vehicle. Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle. A driver must be in the vehicle to steer it and operate the brakes. Towing in this manner may be done only on hard-surfaced roads for a short distance and at low speeds. Also, the wheels, axles, power train, steering and brakes must all be in good condition. Do not use the tow hooks to pull a

vehicle out of mud, sand or other conditions from which the vehicle cannot be driven out under its own power.

Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than the vehicle doing the towing.

The drivers of both vehicles should communicate with each other fre- quently.

Before emergency towing, check that the hook is not broken or dam- aged.

Fasten the towing cable or chain securely to the hook.

Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady and even force.

To avoid damaging the hook, do not pull from the side or at a verti- cal angle. Always pull straight ahead.

CAUTION Attach a towing strap to the

tow hook. Using a portion of the vehicle

other than the tow hooks for towing may damage the body of your vehicle.

Use only a cable or chain specifically intended for use in towing vehicles. Securely fasten the cable or chain to the towing hook provided.

OBK062012

OBK062013

Front

Rear

6 23

What to do in an emergency

Use a towing strap less than 16 feet (5 m) long. Attach a white or red cloth (about 12 inches (30 cm) wide) in the middle of the strap for easy visibility.

Drive carefully so that the towing strap is not loosened during towing.

Emergency towing precautions Place the ignition switch in ACC so

the steering wheel isnt locked. Place the transmission shift lever in

N (Neutral). Release the parking bake. Press the brake pedal with more

force than normal since you will have reduced brake performance.

More steering effort will be required because the power steer- ing system will be disabled.

If you are driving down a long hill, the brakes may overheat and brake performance will be reduced. Stop often and let the brakes cool off.

WARNING Use extreme caution when tow- ing the vehicle. Avoid sudden starts or erratic

driving maneuvers which would place excessive stress on the emergency towing hook and towing cable or chain. The hook and towing cable or chain may break and cause serious injury or damage.

If the disabled vehicle can not be moved, do not forcibly con- tinue the towing. Contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a commercial tow truck serv- ice for assistance.

Tow the vehicle as straight ahead as possible.

Keep away from the vehicle during towing.

OBK069020

CAUTION - Automatic transmission

If the car is being towed with all four wheels on the ground, it can be towed only from the front. Be sure that the transmis- sion is in neutral. Be sure the steering is unlocked by placing the ignition switch in the ACC position. A driver must be in the towed vehicle to operate the steering and brakes.

To avoid serious damage to the automatic transmission, limit the vehicle speed to 10 mph and drive less than 1 mile when towing.

Before towing, check the level of the automatic transmission fluid. If it is below the "HOT" range on the dipstick, add fluid. If you cannot add fluid, a tow- ing dolly must be used.

Maintenance

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Maintenance services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Owners responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Owner maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Owner maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 Owner maintenance schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Scheduled maintenance service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Normal maintenance schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 Maintenance under severe usage conditions . . . . . . 7-20

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . . 7-21 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24 Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26 Brake and clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29 Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30 Automatic transmission fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31 Manual transmission fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31 Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31 Parking brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32 Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33 Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34 Wiper blades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36 Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39

Tires and wheels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42 Tire care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42 Recommended cold tire inflation pressures . . . . . . . 7-42 Checking tire inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43 Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44 Wheel alignment and tire balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45 Tire replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46 Wheel replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47 Tire traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48 Tire maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48 Tire sidewall labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48 Tire terminology and definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52 All season tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53 Summer tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54 Snow tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54 Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54 Radial-ply tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56 Instrument panel fuse replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57 Engine compartment fuse replacement . . . . . . . . . . 7-58 Fuse/relay panel description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59 7

Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67 Headlight, parking light, turn signal light,

sidemarker light, front fog light bulb replacement . . 7-68 Rear combination light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . 7-73 Side repeater light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-75 High mounted stop light replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-75 License plate light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-75 Interior light bulb replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-76

Appearance care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-77 Exterior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-77 Interior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-83

Emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-84 California perchlorate notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-87

7

Maintenance

7 3

Maintenance

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

2.0L TCI Engine

1. Negative battery terminal

2. Positive battery terminal

3. Fuse and relay box

4. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

5. Power steering fluid reservoir

6. Air cleaner

7. Radiator cap

8. Engine oil dipstick

9. Engine oil filler cap

10. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir

11. Engine coolant reservoir

OBK012003

* The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

Maintenance

47

1. Negative battery terminal

2. Positive battery terminal

3. Fuse and relay box

4. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

5. Power steering fluid reservoir

6. Air cleaner

7. Radiator cap

8. Engine oil dipstick

9. Engine oil filler cap

10. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir

11. Engine coolant reservoir

3.8 GDI Engine

OBK012004

* The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

7 5

Maintenance

MAINTENANCE SERVICES You should exercise the utmost care to prevent damage to your vehicle and injury to yourself whenever per- forming any maintenance or inspec- tion procedures. Should you have any doubts con- cerning the inspection or servicing of your vehicle, we strongly recom- mend that you have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer perform this work. An authorized HYUNDAI dealer has factory-trained technicians and gen- uine HYUNDAI parts to service your vehicle properly. For expert advice and quality service, see an author- ized HYUNDAI dealer. Inadequate, incomplete or insuffi- cient servicing may result in opera- tional problems with your vehicle that could lead to vehicle damage, an accident, or personal injury.

Owners responsibility

NOTICE Maintenance Service and Record Retention are the owner's responsi- bility.

You should retain documents that show proper maintenance has been performed on your vehicle in accor- dance with the scheduled mainte- nance service charts shown on the following pages. You need this infor- mation to establish your compliance with the servicing and maintenance requirements of your vehicle war- ranties. Detailed warranty information is pro- vided in your Owners Handbook & Warranty Information booklet. Repairs and adjustments required as a result of improper maintenance or a lack of required maintenance are not covered. We recommend you have your vehi- cle maintained and repaired by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. An authorized HYUNDAI dealer meets

HYUNDAIs high service quality standards and receives technical support from HYUNDAI in order to provide you with a high level of serv- ice satisfaction.

Owner maintenance precau- tions Improper or incomplete service may result in problems. This section gives instructions only for the maintenance items that are easy to perform. As explained earlier in this section, several procedures can be done only by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer with special tools.

NOTICE Improper owner maintenance dur- ing the warranty period may affect warranty coverage. For details, read the separate Owners Handbook & Warranty Information booklet pro- vided with the vehicle. If you're unsure about any servicing or main- tenance procedure, have it done by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Maintenance

67

OWNER MAINTENANCE The following lists are vehicle checks and inspections that should be per- formed by the owner or an author- ized HYUNDAI dealer at the frequen- cies indicated to help ensure safe, dependable operation of your vehi- cle. Any adverse conditions should be brought to the attention of your deal- er as soon as possible. These Owner Maintenance Checks are generally not covered by war- ranties and you may be charged for labor, parts and lubricants used.

Owner maintenance schedule When you stop for fuel: Check the engine oil level. Check the coolant level in coolant

reservoir. Check the windshield washer fluid

level. Look for low or under-inflated tires.

WARNING - Maintenance work

Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be danger- ous. You can be seriously injured while performing some maintenance procedures. If you lack sufficient knowledge and experience or the proper tools and equipment to do the work, have it done by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Working under the hood with the engine running is danger- ous. It becomes even more dangerous when you wear jewelry or loose clothing. These can become entangled in moving parts and result in injury. Therefore, if you must run the engine while working under the hood, make certain that you remove all jewelry (especially rings, bracelets, watches, and necklaces) and all neckties, scarves, and sim- ilar loose clothing before get- ting near the engine or cool- ing fans.

WARNING Be careful when checking your engine coolant level when the engine is hot. Scalding hot coolant and steam may blow out under pressure. This could cause burns or other serious injury.

7 7

Maintenance

While operating your vehicle: Note any changes in the sound of

the exhaust or any smell of exhaust fumes in the vehicle.

Check for vibrations in the steering wheel. Notice any increased steer- ing effort or looseness in the steer- ing wheel, or change in its straight- ahead position.

Notice if your vehicle constantly turns slightly or pulls to one side when traveling on smooth, level road.

When stopping, listen and check for unusual sounds, pulling to one side, increased brake pedal travel or hard-to-push brake pedal.

If any slipping or changes in the operation of your transmission occurs, check the transmission fluid level.

Check automatic transmission P (Park) function.

Check parking brake. Check for fluid leaks under your

vehicle (water dripping from the air conditioning system during or after use is normal).

At least monthly: Check the coolant level in the

engine coolant reservoir. Check the operation of all exterior

lights, including the stoplights, turn signals and hazard warning flash- ers.

Check the inflation pressures of all tires including the spare.

At least twice a year (i.e., every Spring and Fall): Check the radiator, heater and air

conditioning hoses for leaks or damage.

Check the windshield washer spray and wiper operation. Clean the wiper blades with clean cloth dampened with washer fluid.

Check the headlight alignment. Check the muffler, exhaust pipes,

shields and clamps. Check the lap/shoulder belts for

wear and function. Check for worn tires and loose

wheel lug nuts.

Maintenance

87

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICE At least once a year: Clean the body and door drain

holes. Lubricate the door hinges and

checks, and hood hinges. Lubricate the door and hood locks

and latches. Lubricate the door rubber weather-

strips. Check the air conditioning system. Check the power steering fluid

level. Inspect and lubricate the automat-

ic transmission linkage and con- trols.

Clean the battery and terminals. Check the brake fluid level.

Follow Normal Maintenance Schedule if the vehicle is usually operated where none of the following conditions apply. If any of the following conditions apply, follow Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions. Repeated short distance driving. Driving in dusty conditions or

sandy areas. Extensive use of brakes. Driving in areas where salt or other

corrosive materials are being used. Driving on rough or muddy roads. Driving in mountainous areas. Extended periods of idling or low

speed operation. Driving for a prolonged period in

cold temperatures and/or extremely humid climates.

More than 50% driving in heavy city traffic during hot weather above 90F (32C).

If your vehicle is operated under the above conditions, you should inspect, replace or refill more fre- quently than the following Normal Maintenance Schedule. After 120 months or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) continue to follow the prescribed maintenance intervals.

7 9

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep receipts for all vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the fre- quency of service is determined by whichever occurs first.

*1 : Check the engine oil level and leak every 350 miles (500 km) or before starting a long trip.

*2 : The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is reduced excessively.

*3 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.

*4 : Rear differential oil should be changed anytime they have been submerged in water.

*5 : Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspection is recom- mended for this maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.

*6 : When adding coolant, use only deionized water or soft water for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at the factory. An improper coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine damage.

*7 : Inspect for excessive valve noise and/or engine vibra- tion and adjust if necessary. We recommend that the system be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

*8 : Replace engine oil and filter (For 2.0L engine) At first, replace at 3,000 miles (5,000 km) or 6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months.

Maintenance

107

7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months

Rotate tire Inspect air cleaner filter Inspect power steering fluid Inspect vacuum hose Replace engine oil and filter *1 *8 (For 3.8L Engine) Add fuel additive *3 (7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)

15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months

Rotate tire Inspect air cleaner filter Inspect vacuum hose Inspect air conditioning refrigerant Inspect brake hoses and lines Inspect drive shafts and boots Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers and rotors Inspect power steering fluid Inspect power steering pump, belt and hoses Inspect propeller shaft Inspect rear brake disc/pads Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball

joint, upper arm ball joint Inspect suspension mounting bolts Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit) Replace engine oil and filter *1 *8 (For 3.8L Engine) Add fuel additive *3 (15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)

*8 : Replace engine oil and filter (For 2.0L engine) At first, replace at 3,000 miles (5,000 km) or 6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months.

Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

7 11

Maintenance

22,500 miles (36,000 km) or 18 months

Rotate tire Inspect air cleaner filter Inspect power steering fluid Inspect vacuum hose Replace engine oil and filter *1 *8 (For 3.8L Engine) Add fuel additive *3

(22,500 miles (36,000 km) or 36 months)

30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months

Rotate tire Inspect vacuum hose Inspect air conditioning refrigerant Inspect brake hoses and lines Inspect drive shafts and boots Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers and rotors Inspect rear brake disc/pads Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball

joint, upper arm ball joint

(Continued)

(Continued)

Inspect suspension mounting bolts Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid Inspect fuel filter *5

Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *5

Inspect parking brake Inspect propeller shaft Inspect power steering fluid Inspect power steering pump, belt and hoses Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit) Replace air cleaner filter Replace engine oil and filter *1 *8 (For 3.8L Engine) Add fuel additive *3 (30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 48 months)

*8 : Replace engine oil and filter (For 2.0L engine) At first, replace at 3,000 miles (5,000 km) or 6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months.

Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

Maintenance

127

37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 30 months

Rotate tire Inspect air cleaner filter Inspect power steering fluid Inspect vacuum hose Inspect rear differential oil *4

Inspect manual transmission fluid (if equipped) Replace engine oil and filter *1 *8 (For 3.8L Engine) Add fuel additive *3 (37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 60 months)

45,000 miles (72,000 km) or 36 months

Rotate tire Inspect air cleaner filter Inspect vacuum hose Inspect air conditioning refrigerant Inspect brake hoses and lines Inspect drive shafts and boots Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers and rotors Inspect propeller shaft Inspect power steering fluid Inspect power steering pump, belt and hoses Inspect drive shafts and boots Inspect rear brake disc/pads Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball

joint, upper arm ball joint Inspect suspension mounting bolts Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit) Replace engine oil and filter *1 *8 (For 3.8L Engine) Replace spark plug (For 2.0L Engine) Add fuel additive *3 (45,000 miles (72,000 km) or 72 months)

*8 : Replace engine oil and filter (For 2.0L engine) At first, replace at 3,000 miles (5,000 km) or 6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months.

Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

7 13

Maintenance

60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months

Rotate tire Inspect vacuum hose Inspect air conditioning refrigerant Inspect brake hoses and lines Inspect drive shafts and boots Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers and rotors Inspect rear brake disc/pads Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball

joint, upper arm ball joint Inspect suspension mounting bolts

(Continued)

(Continued)

Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid Inspect fuel filter *5

Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *5

Inspect parking brake Inspect propeller shaft Inspect power steering fluid Inspect power steering pump, belt and hoses Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap Inspect valve clearance *7

Inspect drive belts *2

(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)

Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit) Replace air cleaner filter Replace engine oil and filter *1 *8 (For 3.8L Engine) Add fuel additive *3 (60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 96 months)

52,500 miles (84,000 km) or 42 months

Rotate tire Inspect air cleaner filter Inspect power steering fluid Inspect vacuum hose Replace engine oil and filter *1 *8 (For 3.8L Engine) Add fuel additive *3 (52,500 miles (84,000 km) or 84 months)

*8 : Replace engine oil and filter (For 2.0L engine) At first, replace at 3,000 miles (5,000 km) or 6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months.

Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

Maintenance

147

67,500 miles (108,000 km) or 54 months

Rotate tire Inspect air cleaner filter Inspect power steering fluid Inspect vacuum hose Replace engine oil and filter *1 *8 (For 3.8L Engine) Add fuel additive *3 (67,500 miles (108,000 km) or 108 months)

75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 60 months

Rotate tire Inspect air cleaner filter Inspect vacuum hose Inspect air conditioning refrigerant Inspect brake hoses and lines Inspect drive shafts and boots Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers and rotors Inspect power steering fluid Inspect power steering pump, belt and hoses Inspect propeller shaft Inspect rear brake disc/pads Inspect rear differential oil *4

Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint, upper arm ball joint

Inspect suspension mounting bolts Inspect manual transmission fluid (if equipped) Inspect drive belts *2

(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)

Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit) Replace engine oil and filter *1 *8 (For 3.8L Engine) Add fuel additive *3 (75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 120 months)

*8 : Replace engine oil and filter (For 2.0L engine) At first, replace at 3,000 miles (5,000 km) or 6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months.

Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

7 15

Maintenance

90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 72 months

Rotate tire Inspect vacuum hose Inspect air conditioning refrigerant Inspect brake hoses and lines Inspect drive shafts and boots Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers and rotors Inspect rear brake disc/pads Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball

joint, upper arm ball joint

(Continued)

(Continued)

Inspect suspension mounting bolts Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid Inspect fuel filter *5

Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *5

Inspect parking brake Inspect propeller shaft Inspect power steering fluid Inspect power steering pump, belt and hoses Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap Inspect drive belts *2

(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)

Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit) Replace air cleaner filter Replace engine oil and filter *1 *8 (For 3.8L Engine) Replace spark plug (For 2.0L Engine) Add fuel additive *3 (90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 144 months)

82,500 miles (132,000 km) or 66 months

Rotate tire Inspect air cleaner filter Inspect power steering fluid Inspect vacuum hose Replace engine oil and filter *1 *8 (For 3.8L Engine) Add fuel additive *3 (82,500 miles (132,000 km) or 132 months)

*8 : Replace engine oil and filter (For 2.0L engine) At first, replace at 3,000 miles (5,000 km) or 6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months.

Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

Maintenance

167

97,500 miles (156,000 km) or 78 months

Rotate tire Inspect air cleaner filter Inspect power steering fluid Inspect vacuum hose Replace engine oil and filter *1 *8 (For 3.8L Engine) Add fuel additive *3 (97,500 miles (156,000 km) or 156 months)

105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months

Rotate tire Inspect air cleaner filter Inspect vacuum hose Inspect air conditioning refrigerant Inspect brake hoses and lines Inspect drive shafts and boots Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers and rotors Inspect power steering fluid Inspect power steering pump, belt and hoses Inspect propeller shaft Inspect rear brake disc/pads Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball

joint, upper arm ball joint Inspect suspension mounting bolts Inspect manual transmission fluid (if equipped) Inspect drive belts *2

(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)

Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit) Replace engine oil and filter *1 *8 (For 3.8L Engine) Replace spark plug (For 3.8L Engine) Add fuel additive *3 (75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 120 months)

*8 : Replace engine oil and filter (For 2.0L engine) At first, replace at 3,000 miles (5,000 km) or 6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months.

Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

7 17

Maintenance

120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 96 months

Rotate tire Inspect vacuum hose Inspect air conditioning refrigerant Inspect brake hoses and lines Inspect drive shafts and boots Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers and rotors Inspect rear brake disc/pads (if equipped) Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball

joint, upper arm ball joint Inspect suspension mounting bolts Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid Inspect fuel filter *5

(Continued)

112,500 miles (180,000 km) or 90 months

Rotate tire Inspect air cleaner filter Inspect power steering fluid Inspect vacuum hose Inspect manual transmission fluid (if equipped) Inspect rear differential oil *4

Replace engine oil and filter *1 *8 (For 3.8L Engine) Add fuel additive *3 (97,500 miles (156,000 km) or 156 months)

*8 : Replace engine oil and filter (For 2.0L engine) At first, replace at 3,000 miles (5,000 km) or 6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months.

Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

(Continued)

Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *5

Inspect parking brake Inspect power steering fluid Inspect power steering pump, belt and hoses Inspect propeller shaft Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap Inspect valve clearance *7

Inspect drive belts *2

(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)

Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit) Replace air cleaner filter Replace engine oil and filter *1 *8 (For 3.8L Engine) Replace coolant*6 (First, 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 120

months after that every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months)

Add fuel additive *3 (60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 96 months)

Maintenance

187

135,000 miles (216,000 km) or 108 months

Rotate tire Inspect air cleaner filter Inspect vacuum hose Inspect air conditioning refrigerant Inspect brake hoses and lines Inspect drive shafts and boots Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers and rotors Inspect power steering fluid Inspect power steering pump, belt and hoses Inspect propeller shaft Inspect rear brake disc/pads Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball

joint, upper arm ball joint Inspect suspension mounting bolts Inspect drive belts *2

(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months after that every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)

Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit) Replace engine oil and filter *1 *8 (For 3.8L Engine) Replace spark plug (For 2.0L Engine) Add fuel additive *3 (75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 120 months)

127,500 miles (204,000 km) or 102 months

Rotate tire Inspect air cleaner filter Inspect power steering fluid Inspect vacuum hose Replace engine oil and filter *1 *8 (For 3.8L Engine) Add fuel additive *3 (97,500 miles (156,000 km) or 156 months)

*8 : Replace engine oil and filter (For 2.0L engine) At first, replace at 3,000 miles (5,000 km) or 6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months.

Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

7 19

Maintenance

142,500 miles (228,000 km) or 114 months

Rotate tire Inspect air cleaner filter Inspect power steering fluid Inspect vacuum hose Replace engine oil and filter *1 *8 (For 3.8L Engine) Add fuel additive *3 (97,500 miles (156,000 km) or 156 months)

(Continued)

Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *5

Inspect parking brake Inspect propeller shaft Inspect power steering fluid Inspect power steering pump, belt and hoses Inspect rear differential oil *4

Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap Inspect drive belts *2

(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)

Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit) Replace air cleaner filter Replace engine oil and filter *1 *8 (For 3.8L Engine) Replace coolant*6 (First, 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 120

months after every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months) Add fuel additive *3 (90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 144 months)

150,000 miles (240,000 km) or 120 months

Rotate tire Inspect vacuum hose Inspect air conditioning refrigerant Inspect brake hoses and lines Inspect propeller shaft Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers and rotors Inspect rear brake disc/pads Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball

joint, upper arm ball joint Inspect suspension mounting bolts Inspect manual transmission fluid (if equipped) Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid Inspect fuel filter *5

Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections

(Continued)

No check, No service required

Automatic transmission fluid (if equipped)

*8 : Replace engine oil and filter (For 2.0L engine) At first, replace at 3,000 miles (5,000 km) or 6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months.

Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

Maintenance

207

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS

A - Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 5 miles (8 km) in nor- mal temperature or less than 10 miles (16 km) in freezing temperature

B - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances C - Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt- spread

roads D - Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very cold

weather

E - Driving in sandy areas F - Driving in heavy traffic area over 90F (32C) G - Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road H - Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack I - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle towing J - Driving over 106 mph (170 km/h) K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions

The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.

R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary

MAINTENANCE ITEM MAINTENANCE

OPERATION MAINTENANCE INTERVALS DRIVING CONDITION

ENGINE OIL AND FILTER R EVERY 3,000 MILES (5,000 KM) OR 3 MONTHS A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, K, L

R EVERY 3,750 MILES (7,500 KM) OR 6 MONTHS A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J,K, L

AIR CLEANER FILTER R MORE FREQUENTLY C, E

SPARK PLUGS R MORE FREQUENTLY A, B, H, I, K

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID R EVERY 60,000 MILES (96,000 KM) C, D, E, G, H, I, J

MANUAL TRANSMISSION FLUID R EVERY 75,000 MILES (120,000 KM) C, D, E, G, H, I, J

BRAKE/PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, E, F, G

REAR DISC BRAKE/PAD, PARKING BRAKE I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, E, G, H

STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS/ LOWER ARM BALL JOINT, UPPER ARM BALL JOINT

I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, E, F, G, H, I

DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, E, F

REAR DIFFERENTIAL OIL R EVERY 75,000 MILES (120,000 KM) C, E, G, H, I, J

CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER (FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER UNIT)

R MORE FREQUENTLY C, E

PROPELLER SHAFT I EVERY 7,500 MILES (12,000 KM) OR 6 MONTHS C, E

For 2.0L ENGINE

For 3.8L ENGINE

7 21

Maintenance

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS Engine oil and filter The engine oil and filter should be changed at the intervals specified in the maintenance schedule. If the car is being driven in severe conditions, more frequent oil and filter changes are required.

Drive belts Inspect all drive belts for evidence of cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil saturation and replace if necessary.

Fuel filter A clogged filter can limit the speed at which the vehicle may be driven, damage the emission system and cause multiple issues such as hard starting. If an excessive amount of foreign matter accumulates in the fuel tank, the filter may require replacement more frequently. After installing a new filter, run the engine for several minutes, and check for leaks at the connections. Fuel filters should be installed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Fuel lines, fuel hoses and con- nections Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections for leakage and dam- age. Have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer replace any damaged or leak- ing parts immediately.

Vapor hose and fuel filler cap The vapor hose and fuel filler cap should be inspected at those inter- vals specified in the maintenance schedule. Make sure that a new vapor hose or fuel filler cap is cor- rectly replaced.

Vacuum crankcase ventilation hoses (if equipped) Inspect the surface of hoses for evi- dence of heat and/or mechanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive swelling indicate deterio- ration. Particular attention should be paid to examine those hose surfaces nearest to high heat sources, such as the exhaust manifold. Inspect the hose routing to assure that the hoses do not come in con- tact with any heat source, sharp edges or moving component which might cause heat damage or mechanical wear. Inspect all hose connections, such as clamps and couplings, to make sure they are secure, and that no leaks are pres- ent. Hoses should be replaced immediately if there is any evidence of deterioration or damage.

Maintenance

227

Air cleaner filter A Genuine HYUNDAI air cleaner fil- ter is recommended when the filter is replaced.

Spark plugs Make sure to install new spark plugs of the correct heat range.

Valve clearance Inspect excessive valve noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if neces- sary. An authorized HYUNDAI dealer should perform the operation.

Cooling system Check cooling system components, such as radiator, coolant reservoir, hoses and connections for leakage and damage. Replace any damaged parts.

Coolant The coolant should be changed at the intervals specified in the mainte- nance schedule.

Manual transmission fluid (if equipped) Inspect the manual transmission fluid according to the maintenance schedule.

Automatic transmission fluid Automatic transmission fluid should not be checked under normal usage conditions. But in severe conditions, the fluid should be changed at an authorized HYUNDAI dealer in accordance to the scheduled maintenance at the beginning of this chapter.

Brake hoses and lines Visually check for proper installation, chafing, cracks, deterioration and any leakage. Replace any deteriorat- ed or damaged parts immediately.

CAUTION The use of a non-specified fluid could result in transmission malfunction and failure. Use only specified automatic transmission fluid. (Refer to Recommended lubricants and capacities in section 8.)

7 23

Maintenance

Brake fluid Check brake fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir. The level should be between MIN and MAX marks on the side of the reservoir. Use only hydraulic brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4 specification.

Parking brake Inspect the parking brake system including the parking brake pedal and cables.

Brake discs, pads, calipers and rotors Check the pads for excessive wear, discs for run out and wear, and calipers for fluid leakage.

Suspension mounting bolts Check the suspension connections for looseness or damage. Retighten to the specified torque.

Steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint With the vehicle stopped and engine off, check for excessive free-play in the steering wheel. Check the linkage for bends or dam- age. Check the dust boots and ball joints for deterioration, cracks, or damage. Replace any damaged parts.

Power steering pump, belt and hoses Check the power steering pump and hoses for leakage and damage. Replace any damaged or leaking parts immediately. Inspect the power steering belt (or drive belt) for evi- dence of cuts, cracks, excessive wear, oiliness and proper tension. Replace or adjust it if necessary.

Drive shafts and boots Check the drive shafts, boots and clamps for cracks, deterioration, or damage. Replace any damaged parts and, if necessary, repack the grease.

Air conditioning refrigerant (if equipped) Check the air conditioning lines and connections for leakage and dam- age.

Maintenance

247

ENGINE OIL

Checking the engine oil level 1. Be sure the vehicle is on level

ground. 2. Start the engine and allow it to

reach normal operating tempera- ture.

3. Turn the engine off and wait for a few minutes (about 5 minutes) for the oil to return to the oil pan.

4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean, and re-insert it fully.

5. Pull the dipstick out again and check the level. The level should be between F and L.

If it is near or at L, add enough oil to bring the level to F. Do not overfill.

Use a funnel to help prevent oil from being spilled on engine com- ponents.

Use only the specified engine oil. (Refer to Recommended lubricants and capacities in section 8.)

WARNING - Radiator hose

Be very careful not to touch the radiator hose when checking or adding the engine oil as it may be hot enough to burn you.

OBK079002

OBK079035

CAUTION Do not overfill with engine oil.

Engine damage may result. Do not spill engine oil, when

adding or changing engine oil. If you drop the engine oil on the engine room, wipe it off immediately.

2.0L

3.8L OBK072003

OBK079036

2.0L

3.8L

7 25

Maintenance

Changing the engine oil and filter Have engine oil and filter changed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer according to the Maintenance Schedule at the beginning of this section.

CALIFORNIA PROPO- SITION 65 WARNING

Engine oil contains chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects and reproductive harm. Used engine oil may cause irritation or cancer of the skin if left in contact with the skin for pro- longed periods of time. Always protect your skin by washing your hands thoroughly with soap and warm water as soon as possible after handling used oil.

Maintenance

267

The high-pressure cooling system has a reservoir filled with year-round antifreeze coolant. The reservoir is filled at the factory. Check the antifreeze protection and coolant level at least once a year, at the beginning of the winter season, and before traveling to a colder cli- mate.

Checking the coolant level ENGINE COOLANT

(Continued) Even if the engine is not oper-

ating, do not remove the radi- ator cap or the drain plug while the engine and radiator are hot. Hot coolant and steam may still blow out under pressure, causing seri- ous injury.

WARNING Removing radiator cap

Never attempt to remove the radiator cap while the engine is operating or hot. Doing so might lead to cooling system and engine damage and could result in serious personal injury from escaping hot coolant or steam.

Turn the engine off and wait until it cools down. Use extreme care when removing the radiator cap. Wrap a thick towel around it, and turn it counterclockwise slowly to the first stop. Step back while the pressure is released from the cooling system. When you are sure all the pressure has been released, press down on the cap, using a thick towel, and continue turning counterclock- wise to remove it.

(Continued)

7 27

Maintenance

Check the condition and connections of all cooling system hoses and heater hoses. Replace any swollen or deteriorated hoses. The coolant level should be filled between F and L marks on the side of the coolant reservoir when the engine is cool.

If the coolant level is low, add enough distilled (deionized) water. Bring the level to F, but do not overfill. If fre- quent additions are required, see an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for a cooling system inspection.

Recommended engine coolant When adding coolant, use only

deionized water or soft water for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at the fac- tory. An improper coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine damage.

The engine in your vehicle has alu- minum engine parts and must be protected by an ethylene-glycol- based coolant to prevent corrosion and freezing.

DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol coolant or mix them with the spec- ified coolant.

Do not use a solution that contains more than 60% antifreeze or less than 35% antifreeze, which would reduce the effectiveness of the solution.

WARNING The electric motor (cooling fan) is con- trolled by engine coolant temperature, refrigerant pressure

and vehicle speed. It may some- times operate even when the engine is not running. Use extreme caution when working near the blades of the cooling fan so that you are not injured by a rotating fan blades. As the engine coolant temperature decreases, the electric motor will automatically shut off. This is a normal condition.

OBK072004

OBK072037

2.0L

3.8L

Maintenance

287

For mixture percentage, refer to the following table.

Changing the coolant Have coolant changed by an author- ized HYUNDAI dealer according to the Maintenance Schedule at the beginning of this section.

WARNING Radiator cap

Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine and radiator are hot. Scalding hot coolant and steam may blow out under pressure causing serious injury.

CAUTION Put a thick cloth around the radiator cap before refilling the coolant in order to prevent the coolant from overflowing into engine parts such as the gener- ator.

WARNING - Coolant Do not use radiator coolant or

antifreeze in the washer fluid reservoir.

Radiator coolant can severely obscure visibility when sprayed on the windshield and may cause loss of vehicle control or damage to paint and body trim.

5F (-15C) 35 65

-13F (-25C) 40 60

-31F (-35C) 50 50

-49F (-45C) 60 40

Ambient Temperature

Mixture Percentage (volume)

Antifreeze Water

OBK072005

7 29

Maintenance

BRAKE AND CLUTCH (IF EQUIPPED) FLUID

Checking the brake/clutch fluid level Check the fluid level in the reservoir periodically. The fluid level should be between MAX and MIN marks on the side of the reservoir. Before removing the reservoir cap and adding brake/clutch fluid, clean the area around the reservoir cap thoroughly to prevent brake/clutch fluid contamination.

If the level is low, add fluid to the MAX level. The level will fall with accumulated mileage. This is a nor- mal condition associated with the wear of the brake linings. If the fluid level is excessively low, have the brake system checked by an author- ized HYUNDAI dealer.

Use only the specified brake/clutch fluid. (Refer to Recommended lubri- cants or capacities in section 8.)

Never mix different types of fluid.

WARNING - Brake fluid When changing and adding brake/clutch fluid, handle it carefully. Do not let it come in contact with your eyes. If brake/clutch fluid should come in contact with your eyes, imme- diately flush them with a large quantity of fresh tap water. Have your eyes examined by a doctor as soon as possible.

WARNING - Loss of brake fluid

In the event the brake system requires frequent additions of fluid, the vehicle should be inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

OBK079007

CAUTION Do not allow brake/clutch fluid to contact the vehicle's body paint, as paint damage will result. Brake/clutch fluid, which has been exposed to open air for an extended time should never be used as its quality can- not be guaranteed. It should be disposed of properly. Don't put in the wrong kind of fluid. A few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your brake / clutch system can damage brake / clutch system parts.

Maintenance

307

POWER STEERING FLUID

Checking the power steering fluid level With the vehicle on level ground, check the fluid level in the power steering reservoir periodically. The fluid should be between MAX and MIN marks on the side of the gauge at the normal temperature. Before adding power steering fluid, thoroughly clean the area around the reservoir cap to prevent power steer- ing fluid contamination. If the level is low, add fluid to the MAX level.

NOTICE Check that the fluid level is in the "HOT" range on the gauge. If the fluid is cold, check that it is in the "COLD" range.

In the event the power steering sys- tem requires frequent addition of fluid, the vehicle should be inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Use only the specified power steering fluid. (Refer to "Recommended lubri- cants or capacities" in section 8.)

Checking the power steering hose Check the connections for oil leaks, damage and twists in the power steering hose before driving.

CAUTION To avoid damage to the power

steering pump, do not operate the vehicle for prolonged peri- ods with a low power steering fluid level.

Never start the engine when the reservoir tank is empty.

When adding fluid, be careful that dirt does not get into the tank.

Too little fluid can result in increased steering effort and/or noise from the power steering system.

(Continued)

(Continued) The use of the non-specified

fluid could reduce the effective- ness of the power steering sys- tem and cause damage to it.

OBK072006

7 31

Maintenance

It is recommended that the automat- ic transmission fluid should be checked or changed at an authorized HYUNDAI dealer in accordance to the scheduled maintenance.

It is recommended that the manual transmission fluid should be checked or changed at an authorized HYUNDAI dealer in accordance to the scheduled maintenance.

Checking the washer fluid level The reservoir is translucent so that you can check the level with a quick visual inspection. Check the fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir and add fluid if neces- sary. Plain water may be used if washer fluid is not available. However, use washer solvent with antifreeze characteristics in cold cli- mates to prevent freezing.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMIS- SION FLUID (IF EQUIPPED)

MANUAL TRANSMISSION FLUID (IF EQUIPPED)

WASHER FLUID

CAUTION The use of a non-specified fluid could result in transmission malfunction and failure. Use only specified automatic transmission fluid. (Refer to Recommended lubricants and capacities in section 8.)

CAUTION The use of a non-specified fluid could result in transmission malfunction and failure. Use only specified manual transmission fluid. (Refer to Recommended lubricants and capacities in section 8.)

OBK072008

Maintenance

327

Checking the parking brake Check the stroke of the parking brake by counting the number of clicks heard while fully applying it from the released position. Also, the parking brake alone should securely hold the vehicle on a fairly steep grade. If the stroke is more or less than specified, have the parking brake adjusted by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Stroke : 5 notches at a force of 44 lbs (20 kg, 196 N).

WARNING - Coolant Do not use radiator coolant or

antifreeze in the washer fluid reservoir.

Radiator coolant can severely obscure visibility when sprayed on the windshield and may cause loss of vehicle control or damage to paint and body trim.

Windshield Washer fluid agents contain some amounts of alcohol and can be flamma- ble under certain circum- stances. Do not allow sparks or flame to contact the washer fluid or the washer fluid reser- voir. Damage to the vehicle or occupants could occur.

Windshield washer fluid is poisonous to humans and ani- mals. Do not drink and avoid contacting windshield washer fluid. Serious injury or death could occur.

OBK059009

PARKING BRAKE

7 33

Maintenance

AIR CLEANER

Filter replacement It must be replaced when necessary, and should not be washed and reused. You can clean the filter when inspect- ing the air cleaner element. Clean the filter by using compressed air.

1. Loosen the air cleaner cover attaching clips and open the cover.

2. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner. 3. Replace the air cleaner filter. 4. Lock the cover with the cover

attaching clips. Replace the filter according to the Maintenance Schedule. If the vehicle is operated in extreme- ly dusty or sandy areas, replace the element more often than the usual recommended intervals. (Refer to Maintenance under severe usage conditions in this section.)

OBK072009 OBK072010 OBK079011

Maintenance

347

Filter inspection The climate control air filter should be replaced according to the Maintenance Schedule. If the vehicle is operated in severely air-polluted cities or on dusty rough roads for a long period, it should be inspected more frequently and replaced earlier. When you replace the climate control air filter, replace it performing the fol- lowing procedure, and be careful to avoid damaging other components. Filter replacement

1. Open the glove box and remove the support rod (1).

CAUTION Do not drive with the air clean-

er removed; this will result in excessive engine wear.

When removing the air cleaner filter, be careful that dust or dirt does not enter the air intake, or damage may result.

Use a HYUNDAI genuine part. Use of non-genuine parts could damage the air flow sen- sor.

CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER (IF EQUIPPED)

OBK079014

7 35

Maintenance

2. With the glove box open, remove the stoppers on both sides to allow the glove box to hang freely on the hinges.

3. Remove the climate control air fil- ter case pulling out both sides of the cover.

4. Replace the climate control air filter. 5. Reassemble in the reverse order

of disassembly.

NOTICE When replacing the climate control air filter install it properly. Otherwise, the system may produce noise and the effectiveness of the fil- ter may be reduced.

OBK079016 OBK079017OBK079015

Maintenance

367

WIPER BLADES

Blade inspection NOTICE Commercial hot waxes applied by automatic car washes have been known to make the windshield diffi- cult to clean.

Contamination of either the wind- shield or the wiper blades with for- eign matter can reduce the effective- ness of the windshield wipers. Common sources of contamination are insects, tree sap, and hot wax treatments used by some commer- cial car washes. If the blades are not wiping properly, clean both the win- dow and the blades with a good cleaner or mild detergent, and rinse thoroughly with clean water.

Blade replacement When the wipers no longer clean adequately, the blades may be worn or cracked, and require replacement.

1JBA5122

CAUTION To prevent damage to the wiper blades, do not use gasoline, kerosene, paint thinner, or other solvents on or near them.

CAUTION To prevent damage to the wiper arms or other components, do not attempt to move the wipers manually.

CAUTION The use of a non-specified wiper blade could result in wiper malfunction and failure.

7 37

Maintenance

Front windshield wiper blade Type A

1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the wiper blade assembly to expose the plastic locking clip.

2. Compress the clip and slide the blade assembly downward.

3. Lift it off the arm. 4. Install the blade assembly in the

reverse order of removal.

Type B

1. Raise the wiper arm.

1LDA5023

CAUTION Do not allow the wiper arm to fall against the windshield, since it may chip or crack the windshield.

1JBA7037

1JBA7038

OHM078059

CAUTION Do not allow the wiper arm to fall against the windshield, since it may chip or crack the windshield.

Maintenance

387

2. Lift up the wiper blade clip. Then pull down the blade assembly and remove it.

3. Install the new blade assembly in the reverse order of removal.

OHM078060 OHM078061

7 39

Maintenance

(Continued)

If any electrolyte gets into your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If electrolyte gets on your skin, thoroughly wash the contacted area. If you feel a pain or a burning sensation, get medical attention immediately.

Wear eye protection when charging or work- ing near a battery. Always provide ventila- tion when working in an enclosed space.

An inappropriately dis- posed battery can be harmful to the environ- ment and human health. Dispose the battery according to your local law(s) or regulation.

(Continued)

For best battery service Keep the battery securely mount-

ed. Keep the battery top clean and dry. Keep the terminals and connec-

tions clean, tight, and coated with petroleum jelly or terminal grease.

Rinse any spilled electrolyte from the battery immediately with a solution of water and baking soda.

If the vehicle is not going to be used for an extended time, discon- nect the battery cables.

BATTERY

OBK079018

WARNING - Battery dangers

Always read the follow- ing instructions carefully when handling a battery.

Keep lighted cigarettes and all other flames or sparks away from the battery.

Hydrogen, a highly com- bustible gas, is always present in battery cells and may explode if ignit- ed.

Keep batteries out of the reach of children because batteries con- tain highly corrosive SULFURIC ACID. Do not allow battery acid to contact your skin, eyes, clothing or paint finish.

(Continued)

Maintenance

407

Battery recharging Your vehicle has a maintenance-free, calcium-based battery. If the battery becomes discharged

in a short time (because, for exam- ple, the headlights or interior lights were left on while the vehicle was not in use), recharge it by slow charging (trickle) for 10 hours.

If the battery gradually discharges because of high electric load while the vehicle is being used, recharge it at 20-30A for two hours.

(Continued)

When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the case may cause battery acid to leak, resulting in per- sonal injury. Lift with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners.

Never attempt to recharge the battery when the battery cables are connected.

The electrical ignition system works with high voltage. Never touch these compo- nents with the engine running or the ignition switched on.

Failure to follow the above warnings can result in serious bodily injury or death.

CAUTION When you dont use the vehi-

cle for a long time in low tem- perature weather, separate the battery and keep it indoors.

Always charge the battery fully to prevent battery case damage in low temperature weather.

If you connect unauthorized electronic devices to the bat- tery, the battery may be dis- charged. Never use unautho- rized devices.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSI- TION 65 WARNING

Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects and reproductive harm. Batteries also contain other chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer. Wash hands after handling.

WARNING - Recharging battery

When recharging the battery, observe the following precau- tions: The battery must be removed

from the vehicle and placed in an area with good ventilation.

Do not allow cigarettes, sparks, or flame near the battery.

(Continued)

7 41

Maintenance

Reset items Items should be reset after the bat- tery has been discharged or the bat- tery has been disconnected. Sunroof (See section 4) Trip computer (See section 4) Climate control system

(See section 4) Clock (See section 4) Audio (See section 4) Auto up/down window

(See section 4)

WARNING Before performing mainte-

nance or recharging the bat- tery, turn off all accessories and stop the engine.

The negative battery cable must be removed first and installed last when the battery is disconnected.

Operation related to the bat- tery should be done in an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

CAUTION Keep the battery away from

water or any liquid. Use genuine HYUNDAI batter-

ies, available at HYUNDAI dealers, when you replace the battery.

(Continued) Watch the battery during charg-

ing, and stop or reduce the charging rate if the battery cells begin gassing (boiling) violent- ly or if the temperature of the electrolyte of any cell exceeds 120F (49C).

Wear eye protection when checking the battery during charging.

Disconnect the battery charger in the following order.

1.Turn off the battery charger main switch.

2. Unhook the negative clamp from the negative battery ter- minal.

3. Unhook the positive clamp from the positive battery ter- minal.

Maintenance

427

CAUTION Underinflation also results in

excessive wear, poor handling and reduced fuel economy. Wheel deformation also is possible. Keep your tire pres- sures at the proper levels. If a tire frequently needs refilling, have it checked by an author- ized HYUNDAI dealer.

Overinflation produces a harsh ride, excessive wear at the center of the tire tread, and a greater possibility of dam- age from road hazards.

TIRES AND WHEELS Tire care For proper maintenance, safety, and maximum fuel economy, you must always maintain recommended tire inflation pressures and stay within the load limits and weight distribution recommended for your vehicle.

Recommended cold tire infla- tion pressures All tire pressures (including the spare) should be checked when the tires are cold. Cold Tires means the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than one mile (1.6 km). Recommended pressures must be maintained for the best ride, top vehi- cle handling, and minimum tire wear. For recommended inflation pressure, refer to Tire and wheels in section 8.

All specifications (sizes and pres- sures) can be found on a label attached to the vehicle.

WARNING - Tire underin- flation

Severe underinflation can lead to severe heat build-up, causing blowouts, tread separation and other tire failures that can result in the loss of vehicle control leading to severe injury or death. This risk is much higher on hot days and when driving for long periods at high speeds.

OBK082005L

7 43

Maintenance

Checking tire inflation pres- sure Check your tires once a month or more. Also, check the tire pressure of the spare tire.

How to check Use a good quality gage to check tire pressure.You can not tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by look- ing at them. Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they're underinflated. Check the tire's inflation pressure when the tires are cold. - "Cold" means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

WARNING - Tire Inflation Overinflation or underinflation can reduce tire life, adversely affect vehicle handling, and lead to sudden tire failure. This could result in loss of vehicle control and potential injury.

CAUTION - Tire pressure Always observe the following: Check tire pressure when the

tires are cold. (After vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or hasn't been driven more than one mile (1.6 km) since startup.)

Check the pressure of your spare tire each time you check the pressure of other tires.

Never overload your vehicle. Be careful not to overload a vehicle luggage rack if your vehicle is equipped with one.

Worn, old tires can cause acci- dents. If your tread is badly worn, or if your tires have been damaged, replace them.

CAUTION Warm tires normally exceed

recommended cold tire pres- sures by 4 to 6 psi (28 to 41 kPa). Do not release air from warm tires to adjust the pres- sure or the tires will be under- inflated.

Be sure to reinstall the tire inflation valve caps. Without the valve cap, dirt or moisture could get into the valve core and cause air leakage. If a valve cap is missing, install a new one as soon as possible.

Maintenance

447

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press the tire gage firm- ly onto the valve to get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches the recommended pressure on the tire and loading information label, no further adjust- ment is necessary. If the pressure is low, add air until you reach the rec- ommended amount. If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gage. Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and mois- ture.

Tire rotation To equalize tread wear, it is recom- mended that the tires be rotated every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or sooner if irregular wear develops. During rotation, check the tires for correct balance. When rotating tires, check for uneven wear and damage. Abnormal wear is usually caused by incorrect tire pres- sure, improper wheel alignment, out- of-balance wheels, severe braking or severe cornering. Look for bumps or bulges in the tread or side of tire. Replace the tire if you find either of these conditions. Replace the tire if fabric or cord is visible. After rotation, be sure to bring the front and rear tire pressures to specification and check lug nut tightness.

WARNING Inspect your tires frequently

for proper inflation as well as wear and damage. Always use a tire pressure gauge.

Tires with too much or too little pressure wear unevenly caus- ing poor handling, loss of vehi- cle control, and sudden tire failure leading to accidents, injuries, and even death. The recommended cold tire pres- sure for your vehicle can be found in this manual and on the tire label located on the dri- ver's side center pillar.

Worn tires can cause acci- dents. Replace tires that are worn, show uneven wear, or are damaged.

Remember to check the pres- sure of your spare tire. HYUNDAI recommends that you check the spare every time you check the pressure of the other tires on your vehicle.

7 45

Maintenance

Disc brake pads should be inspected for wear whenever tires are rotated.

NOTICE The front tire size is different from the rear tire size. So when you rotate tires, check the tire and wheel size.

Wheel alignment and tire bal- ance The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance. In most cases, you will not need to have your wheels aligned again. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels may need to be rebalanced.

OBK079038

Without a spare tire WARNING

Do not mix bias ply and radial ply tires under any circum- stances.This may cause unusu- al handling characteristics that could result in death, severe injury, or property damage.

CAUTION Improper wheel weights can damage your vehicle's alu- minum wheels. Use only approved wheel weights.

Maintenance

467

Tire replacement If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear indicator will appear as a solid band across the tread. This shows there is less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left on the tire. Replace the tire when this happens. Do not wait for the band to appear across the entire tread before replac- ing the tire.

Your vehicle is equipped with asym- metric tires, when you replace the tires, check the inside and outside of the tire. The mark INSIDE(1) and OUT- SIDE(2) is inscribed on the side of the tire. The mark INSIDE(1) should be inside of the vehicle and the mark OUTSIDE(2) should be outside of the vehicle.

OBK079047

Tread wear indicator WARNING - Replacing tires

To reduce the chance or serious or fatal injuries from an acci- dent caused by tire failure or loss of vehicle control: Replace tires that are worn,

show uneven wear, or are damaged. Worn tires can cause loss of braking effec- tiveness, steering control, and traction.

Do not drive your vehicle with too little or too much pressure in your tires. This can lead to uneven wear and tire failure.

When replacing tires, never mix radial and bias-ply tires on the same car. You must replace all tires (including the spare) if moving from radial to bias-ply tires.

(Continued)

OBK079039

7 47

Maintenance

Compact spare tire replacement (if equipped) A compact spare tire has a shorter tread life than a regular size tire. Replace it when you can see the tread wear indicator bars on the tire. The replacement compact spare tire should be the same size and design tire as the one provided with your new vehicle and should be mounted on the same compact spare tire wheel. The compact spare tire is not designed to be mounted on a regular size wheel, and the compact spare tire wheel is not designed for mount- ing a regular size tire.

Wheel replacement When replacing the metal wheels for any reason, make sure the new wheels are equivalent to the original factory units in diameter, rim width and offset.

NOTICE The front tire size is different from the rear tire size. So when you rotate tires, check the tire and wheel size.

(Continued) Using tires and wheel other

than the recommended sizes could cause unusual handling characteristics and poor vehi- cle control, resulting in a seri- ous accident.

Wheels that do not meet HYUNDAIs specifications may fit poorly and result in damage to the vehicle or unusual handling and poor vehicle control.

The ABS works by comparing the speed of the wheels. Tire size can affect wheel speed. When replacing tires, all 4 tires must use the size origi- nally supplied with the vehi- cle. Using tires of a different size can cause the ABS (Anti- lock Brake System) and ESC (Electronic Stability Control) to work irregularly.

WARNING A wheel that is not the correct size may adversely affect wheel and bearing life, braking and stopping abilities, handling characteristics, ground clear- ance, body-to-tire clearance, snow chain clearance, speedometer and odometer cal- ibration, headlight aim and bumper height.

Maintenance

487

Tire traction Tire traction can be reduced if you drive on worn tires, tires that are improperly inflated or on slippery road surfaces. Tires should be replaced when tread wear indicators appear. To reduce the possibility of losing control, slow down whenever there is rain, snow or ice on the road.

Tire maintenance In addition to proper inflation, correct wheel alignment helps to decrease tire wear. If you find a tire is worn unevenly, have your dealer check the wheel alignment. When you have new tires installed, make sure they are balanced. This will increase vehicle ride comfort and tire life. Additionally, a tire should always be rebalanced if it is removed from the wheel.

Tire sidewall labeling This information identifies and describes the fundamental charac- teristics of the tire and also provides the tire identification number (TIN) for safety standard certification. The TIN can be used to identify the tire in case of a recall.

1. Manufacturer or brand name Manufacturer or Brand name is shown.

2. Tire size designation A tires sidewall is marked with a tire size designation. You will need this information when selecting replace- ment tires for your car. The following explains what the letters and num- bers in the tire size designation mean. Example tire size designation: (These numbers are provided as an example only; your tire size designa- tor could vary depending on your vehicle.) 225/45R18 91V

225 - Tire width in millimeters. 45 - Aspect ratio. The tires section

height as a percentage of its width.

R - Tire construction code (Radial). 18 - Rim diameter in inches.

I030B04JM

1

1

2 3

4

5,6

7

7 49

Maintenance

91 - Load Index, a numerical code associated with the maximum load the tire can carry.

V - Speed Rating Symbol. See the speed rating chart in this section for additional information.

Wheel size designation

Wheels are also marked with impor- tant information that you need if you ever have to replace one. The follow- ing explains what the letters and numbers in the wheel size designa- tion mean.

Example wheel size designation: 7.5JX18

7.5 - Rim width in inches. J - Rim contour designation. 18 - Rim diameter in inches.

Tire speed ratings

The chart below lists many of the dif- ferent speed ratings currently being used for passenger car tires. The speed rating is part of the tire size designation on the sidewall of the tire. This symbol corresponds to that tire's designed maximum safe oper- ating speed.

3. Checking tire life (TIN : Tire Identification Number)

Any tires that are over 6 years old, based on the manufacturing date, (including the spare tire) should be replaced by new ones. You can find the manufacturing date on the tire sidewall (possibly on the inside of the wheel), displaying the DOT Code. The DOT Code is a series of num- bers on a tire consisting of numbers and English letters. The manufactur- ing date is designated by the last four digits (characters) of the DOT code.

DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO The front part of the DOT means a plant code number, tire size and tread pattern and the last four num- bers indicate week and year manu- factured. For example: DOT XXXX XXXX 1613 represents that the tire was produced in the 16th week of 2013.

S 112 mph (180 km/h)

T 118 mph (190 km/h)

H 130 mph (210 km/h)

V 149 mph (240 km/h)

W 168 mph (270 km/h)

Y 186 mph (300 km/h)

Maximum Speed Speed Rating Symbol

Maintenance

507

4. Tire ply composition and mate- rial

The number of layers or plies of rub- ber-coated fabric in the tire.Tire manu- facturers also must indicate the materi- als in the tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others. The letter "R" means radial ply construction; the letter "D" means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter "B" means belted-bias ply construction.

5. Maximum permissible inflation pressure

This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should be put in the tire. Do not exceed the maximum permissible inflation pressure. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information label for recommended inflation pressure.

6. Maximum load rating This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire. When replacing the tires on the vehicle, always use a tire that has the same load rating as the factory installed tire.

7. Uniform tire quality grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maxi- mum section width. For example: TREAD wear 200 TRACTION AA TEMPERATURE A

Tread wear

The tread wear grade is a compara- tive rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified govern- ment test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one-and-a- half times (1) as well on the gov- ernment course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

WARNING - Tire age Tires degrade over time, even when they are not being used. Regardless of the remaining tread, it is recommended that tires generally be replaced after six (6) years of normal service. Heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading condi- tions can accelerate the aging process. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure, which could lead to a loss of control and an acci- dent involving serious injury or death.

7 51

Maintenance

These grades are molded on the side-walls of passenger vehicle tires. The tires available as standard or optional equipment on your vehicle may vary with respect to grade.

Traction - AA, A, B & C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tires ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on spec- ified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perform- ance.

Temperature -A, B & C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tires resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled condi- tions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C cor- responds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the labora- tory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight- ahead braking traction tests, and does not include accelera- tion, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat build-up and possible sudden tire failure. This can cause loss of vehicle control and serious injury or death.

Maintenance

527

Tire terminology and definitions Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on the tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or kilo- pascal (kPa). Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight of optional acces- sories. Some examples of optional accessories are, automatic transmis- sion, power seats, and air condition- ing. Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire's height to its width. Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made from steel or other reinforcing materials. Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim. Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or kilo- pascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat from driving. Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor vehicle with standard and optional equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but without passengers and cargo. DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric des- ignator which can also identify the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand and date of production. GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the Front Axle. GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the Rear axle.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle. Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure. Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279 that corre- sponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire. Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The maxi- mum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall. Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the maximum per- missible inflation pressure for that tire. Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curb weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight; and production options weight. Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 pounds (68 kg).

7 53

Maintenance

Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions. Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of a asymmetrical tire that has a par- ticular side that faces outward when mounted on a vehicle. The outward facing sidewall bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on the inner facing sidewall. Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose vehicles. Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle manufacturer's recommend- ed tire inflation pressure and shown on the tire placard. Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread. Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire beads are seat- ed. Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire can operate. Traction: The friction between the tire and the road surface. The amount of grip provided. Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road. Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes called "wear bars," that show across the tread of a tire when only 2/32 inch of tread remains. UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards, a tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire's traction, tempera- ture and treadwear. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing proce- dures. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire. Vehicle Capacity Weight: The num- ber of designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plus the rated cargo and luggage load.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an individual tire due to curb and accessory weight plus maximum occupant and cargo weight. Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire: Load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occu- pant weight and dividing by 2. Vehicle Placard: A label permanent- ly attached to a vehicle showing the original equipment tire size and rec- ommended inflation pressure.

All season tires HYUNDAI specifies all season tires on some models to provide good performance for use all year round, including snowy and icy road condi- tions. All season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mud and Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow traction than all season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas.

Maintenance

547

Summer tires HYUNDAI specifies summer tires on some models to provide superior performance on dry roads. Summer tire performance is substantially reduced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have the tire traction rat- ing M+S (Mud and Snow) on the tire side wall. if you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions. HYUNDAI recommends the use of snow tires or all season tires on all four wheels.

Snow tires If you equip your car with snow tires, they should be the same size and have the same load capacity as the original tires. Snow tires should be installed on all four wheels; other- wise, poor handling may result. Snow tires should carry 4 psi (28 kPa) more air pressure than the pressure recommended for the stan- dard tires on the tire label on the dri- ver's side of the center pillar, or up to the maximum pressure shown on the tire sidewall, whichever is less.

Do not drive faster than 75 mph (120 km/h) when your car is equipped with snow tires.

Tire chains Tire chains, if necessary, should be installed on the drive wheels (rear wheels). Be sure that the chains are installed in accordance with the manufactur- er's instructions. To minimize tire and chain wear, do not continue to use tire chains when they are no longer needed.

WARNING - Snow or ice When driving on roads cov-

ered with snow or ice, drive at less than 20 mph (30 km/h).

Use the SAE S class or wire chains.

If you hear noise caused by chains contacting the body, retighten the chain to avoid contact with the vehicle body.

To prevent body damage, retighten the chains after driv- ing 0.3~0.6 miles (0.5~1.0 km).

Do not use tire chains on vehicles equipped with alu- minum wheels. In unavoid- able circumstance, use a wire type chain.

Use wire chains less than 0.47 inches (12 mm) to prevent damage to the chains con- nection.

7 55

Maintenance

Radial-ply tires Radial-ply tires provide improved tread life, road hazard resistance and smoother high speed ride. The radi- al-ply tires used on this vehicle are of belted construction, and are selected to complement the ride and handling characteristics of your vehicle. Radial-ply tires have the same load carrying capacity, as bias-ply or bias belted tires of the same size, and use the same recommended inflation pressure. Mixing of radial-ply tires with bias-ply or bias belted tires is not recommended. Any combina- tions of radial-ply and bias-ply or bias belted tires when used on the same vehicle will seriously deteriorate vehicle handling. The best rule to fol- low is: Identical radial-ply tires should always be used as a set of four. Longer wearing tires can be more susceptible to irregular tread wear. It is very important to follow the tire rotation interval shown in this section to achieve the tread life potential of these tires. Cuts and punctures in radial-ply tires are repairable only in the tread area, because of sidewall flexing. Consult your tire dealer for radial-ply tire repairs.

Low aspect ratio tire (if equipped) Low aspect ratio tires, whose aspect ratio is lower than 50, are provided for sporty looks. Because the low aspect ratio tires are optimized for handling and brak- ing, it may be more uncomfortable to ride in and there is more noise com- pare with normal tires.

CAUTION Because the sidewall of the low aspect ratio tire is shorter than the normal, the wheel and tire of the low aspect ratio tire is easi- er to be damaged. So, follow the instructions below. - When driving on a rough road

or off road, drive cautiously because tires and wheels may be damaged. And after driving, inspect tires and wheels.

- When passing over a pothole, speed bump, manhole, or curb stone, drive slowly so that the tires and wheels are not dam- aged.

(Continued)

CAUTION It is not easy to recognize the

tire damage with your own eyes. But if there is the slight- est hint of tire damage, even though you cannot see the tire damage with your own eyes, have the tire checked or replaced because the tire damage may cause air leak- age from the tire.

If the tire is damaged by driv- ing on a rough road, off road, pothole, manhole, or curb stone, it will not be covered by the warranty.

You can find out the tire infor- mation on the tire sidewall.

(Continued) - If the tire is impacted, we rec-

ommend that you inspect the tire condition or contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

- To prevent damage to the tire, inspect the tire condition and pressure every 3,000km.

Maintenance

567

FUSES

A vehicles electrical system is pro- tected from electrical overload dam- age by fuses.

This vehicle has 3 fuse panels, one located in the drivers side panel bol- ster, the others in the engine com- partment. If any of your vehicles lights, acces- sories, or controls do not work, check the appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse has blown, the element inside the fuse will be melted. If the electrical system does not work, first check the drivers side fuse panel. Before replacing a blown fuse, dis- connect the negative battery cable. Always replace a blown fuse with one of the same rating. If the replacement fuse blows, this indicates an electrical problem. Avoid using the system involved and imme- diately consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. Three kinds of fuses are used: blade type for lower amperage rating, car- tridge type, and fusible link for higher amperage ratings.

OBK079042

Normal

Normal

Blade type

Cartridge type

Fusible link

Blown

Blown

Normal Blown

WARNING - Fuse replace- ment

Never replace a fuse with any- thing but another fuse of the same rating.

A higher capacity fuse could cause damage and possibly a fire.

Never install a wire or alu- minum foil instead of the prop- er fuse - even as a temporary repair. It may cause extensive wiring damage and a possible fire.

CAUTION Do not use a screwdriver or any other metal object to remove fuses because it may cause a short circuit and damage the system.

7 57

Maintenance

Instrument panel fuse replace- ment 1. Turn the ignition switch and all

other switches off. 2. Open the fuse panel cover. 3. Pull the suspected fuse straight

out. Use the removal tool provided in the main fuse box in the engine compartment.

4. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it is blown.

5. Push in a new fuse of the same rating, and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.

If it fits loosely, consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

If you do not have a spare, use a fuse of the same rating from a circuit you may not need for operating the vehicle, such as the cigarette lighter fuse. If the headlights or other electrical components do not work and the fuses are OK, check the fuse panel in the engine compartment. If a fuse is blown, it must be replaced.

OBK079019

CAUTION When replacing a blown fuse or

relay with a new one, make sure the new fuse or relay fits tightly into the clips. The incomplete fas- tening fuse or relay may cause the vehicle wiring and electric systems damage and a possible fire.

Do not remove fuses, relays and terminals fastened with bolts or nuts. The fuses, relays and termi- nals may be fastened incomplete- ly, and it may cause a possible fire. If fuses, relays and terminals fastened with bolts or nuts are blown, consult with an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Do not input any other objects except fuses or relays into fuse/relay terminals such as a driver or wiring. It may cause con- tact failure and system malfunc- tion.

Maintenance

587

Fuse switch Always, put the fuse switch at the ON position. If you move the switch to the OFF position, some items such as audio and digital clock must be reset and transmitter (or smart key) may not work properly.

Engine compartment fuse replacement 1. Turn the ignition switch and all

other switches off. 2. Remove the fuse panel cover by

pressing the tab and pulling up.

3. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it is blown. To remove or insert the fuse, use the fuse puller in the engine compartment fuse panel.

4. Push in a new fuse of the same rating, and make sure it fits tightly in the clips. If it fits loosely, consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

CAUTION Always place the fuse switch in the ON position while driving the vehicle.

OBK072042

OBK072021

OBK079048

CAUTION After checking the fuse panel in the engine compartment, securely install the fuse panel cover. If not, electrical failures may occur from water contact.

7 59

Maintenance

Multi fuse If the multi fuse is blown, it must be removed as follows: 1. Turn off the engine. 2. Disconnect the negative battery

cable. 3. Remove the fuse panel on the

right side in the engine compart- ment.

4. Remove the nuts shown in the pic- ture above.

5. Replace the fuse with a new one of the same rating.

6. Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

NOTICE If the multi fuse is blown, consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Fuse/relay panel description Inside the fuse/relay panel covers, you can find the fuse/relay label describing fuse/relay name and capacity.

NOTICE Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle. It is accurate at the time of printing. When you inspect the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer to the fuse panel label.

OBK072022

Maintenance

607

Instrument panel fuse panel

NOTICE The actual fuse/relay panel label may differ from equipped items.

OBK072049N

OBK079023

7 61

Maintenance

Engine compartment fuse panel

NOTICE The actual fuse/relay panel label may differ from equipped items.

OBK072050N

OBK072025

Maintenance

627

Engine compartment fuse panel

NOTICE The actual fuse/relay panel label may differ from equipped items.

OBK072051N

OBK072024

7 63

Maintenance

Instrument panel (Drivers side fuse panel)

Description Fuse rating Protected component

AUDIO 15A Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Multi Gauge, Multi Monitor Front Monitor, MTS Module

DRV P/SEAT 30A Driver Seat Manual Switch, Driver Lumbar Support Switch

HAZARD 15A BCM, Flasher Sound Relay

PDM1 25A PDM

ROOM LP 10A Driver/Passenger Door Lamp, Trunk Room Lamp Driver/Passenger Door Scuff Lamp, Vanity Lamp LH/RH Map Lamp

C/LIGHTER 15A Front Power Outlet

MEMORY1 10A

BCM, Data Link Connector, Auto Light & Photo Sensor Ignition Key ILL. & Door Warning Switch, Electro Chromic Mirror Instrument Cluster (IND. MICOM), A/C Control Module Tire Pressure Monitoring Module

MEMORY2 7.5A RF Receiver

ABS 7.5A E/R Junction Box LH (Multipurpose Check Connector) ESC Module, ESC & PAS Switch, Steering Angle Sensor

A/BAG IND 7.5A Instrument Cluster (Air Bag IND.)

A/BAG 15A SRS Control Module, A/C Control Module, PODS Module

B/UP LP 15A Back-Up Lamp Switch, TCM, Transmission Range Switch

MODULE3 10A ECM, PDM, Smart Key Control Module, Injector Drive Box (G6DJ)

MODULE1 7.5A AMP, Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Multi Monitor, MTS Module Front Monitor, Map Lamp, Power Outside Mirror Switch

POWER OUTLET

15A Console Power Outlet

MODULE6 10A BCM, PDM, Smart Key Control Module

Maintenance

647

Description Fuse rating Protected component

MODULE2 7.5A

IPS Control Module, Instrument Cluster (IND, MICOM), BCM, ATM Shift Lever IND., Multifunction Switch (Remote Control), Multi Gauge, Cruise Clutch Pedal Position Switch, A/C Control Module, Auto Head Lamp Leveling Device Unit, Stop Lamp Switch, Driver/Passenger Seat Warmer Module, Electro Chromic Mirror, MTS Module, Tire Pressure Monitoring Module, Head Lamp Leveling Device Actuator LH/RH, Front Parking Assist Sensor LH/RH Rear Parking Assist Sensor Side LH/RH Rear Parking Assist Sensor Center LH/RH

MODULE5 7.5A Sport Mode Switch (A/T), Key Solenoid

STOP LP 15A Stop Signal Relay

MODULE7 7.5A Blower Relay, Sunroof Control Module, A/C Control Module, Cluster Ionizer (Auto A/C)

MODULE4 7.5A BCM, PDM, IPS Control Module, Vacuum Switch E/R Junction Box LH (Vacuum Pump Relay)

WIPER FRT 25A MultiFunction Switch (Wiper), Front Wiper Motor E/R Junction Box LH (Wiper FRT Relay)

START 10A E/R Junction Box LH (Start Relay), Ignition Lock Switch, PDM Transmission Range Switch, ECM (G6DJ), B/Alarm Relay

BLOWER 7.5A A/C Control Module

HTD MIRR 7.5A A/C Control Module, Driver/Passenger Power Outside Mirror

TRUNK 10A Trunk Lid & Fuel Filler Door Switch, ICM Relay Box (Trunk Lid Relay)

PDM2 10A PDM, Smart Key Control Module, Start Stop Button Switch, FOB Holder

SAFETY POWER WINDOW RH

25A Passenger Safety Power Window Module

FOG LP RR 10A (Not Used)

S/HEATER 15A Driver/Passenger Seat Warmer Module

AMP 25A AMP (JBL)

SAFETY POWER WINDOW LH

25A Driver Safety Power Window Module

7 65

Maintenance

Engine compartment main fuse panel

Description Fuse rating Protected component

MULTI FUSE

C/FAN 60A Cooling Fan (High) Relay, Cooling Fan (Low) Relay

B+1 60A Smart Junction Box ((Fuse : S/HEATER, AMP, SAFETY POWER WINDOW LH/RH), IPS 2, IPS Control Module)

BLOWER 40A Smart Junction Box (Blower Relay)

ABS2 40A Multipurpose Check Connector, ESC Module

ABS1 40A Multipurpose Check Connector, ESC Module

ALT 150A Alternator, Multi Fuse (ABS1, ABS2, BLOWER, B+1, C/FAN), Fuse (S/ROOF FRT, DEICER, VACUUM PUMP)

RR HTD 40A RR HTD Relay

B+2 60A Smart Junction Box ((Fuse : HAZARD, PDM1, MODULE5, STOP LP, TRUNK, PDM2), IPS 1, ARISU 2, IPS Control Module)

B+3 60A Smart Junction Box ((Fuse : AUDIO, DRV P/SEAT, ROOM LP, MEMORY1, MEMORY2), ARISU 1, IPS Control Module, Leak Current Autocut Device Switch, Leak Current Autocut Device Relay)

FUSE

IG2 30A Start Relay, IG2 Relay, Ignition Switch

IG1 40A IG1 Relay, ACC Relay, Ignition Switch

S/ROOF FRT 20A Sunroof Control Module

DEICER 15A Deicer Relay

VACUUM PUMP 15A Vacuum Pump Relay (G4KF A/T)

DR LOCK 10A Smart Junction Box (Door Lock Relay, Door Unlock Relay), ICM Relay Box (Two Turn Unlock Relay)

BRAKE SW 10A Stop Lamp Switch

HORN 15A Horn Relay

DEDICATED DRL 10A Dedicated DRL Relay

B/UP LP 10A M/T - Back-Up Lamp Switch A/T - Rear Combination Lamp LH/RH, Electro Chromic Mirror, A/V & Navigation Head Unit

Maintenance

667

Engine compartment sub fuse panel

Description Fuse rating Protected component

B+ 50A Fuse (EMS 30A, ECU1 10A, F/PUMP 20A)

EMS 30A Engine Control Relay

F/PUMP 20A F/Pump Relay

ECU 1 10A G4KF ECM, TCM

G6DJ ECM, TCM, Injector Drive Box

INJECTOR 15A G4KF F/Pump Relay, Injector #1/#2/#3/#4

G6DJ F/Pump Relay, Fuel Pump Relay (Low), ECM

IGN COIL 20A G4KF Ignition Coil #1/#2/#3/#4, Condenser

G6DJ Ignition Coil #1/#2/#3/#4/#5/#6, Condenser #1/#2

ECU 2 20A G4KF ECM

G6DJ Injector Drive Box

SENSOR 1 10A G4KF Cooling Fan (High)/(Low) Relay, Oxygen Sensor (Up)/(Down)

G6DJ Cooling Fan (High)/(Low) Relay, ECM, Oxygen Sensor #1/#2/#3/#4

SENSOR 2 15A G4KF

Camshaft Position Sensor #1/#2, RCV Control Solenoid Valve, Immobilizer Module, Canister Close Valve, Purge Control Solenoid Valve, Crankshaft Position Sensor, Oil Control Valve #1/#2

G6DJ ECM, Oil Control Valve #1/#2/#3/#4, Purge Control Solenoid Valve, Immobilizer Module, Canister Close Valve

7 67

Maintenance

LIGHT BULBS

Use only the bulbs of the specified wattage.

NOTICE After heavy, driving rain or washing, headlight and taillight lenses could appear frosty. This condition is caused by the temperature difference between the lamp inside and outside. This is similar to the condensation on your windows inside your vehicle during the rain and doesnt indicate a problem with your vehicle. If the water leaks into the lamp bulb cir- cuitry, have the vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING - Working on the lights

Prior to working on the light, firmly apply the parking brake, ensure that the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position and turn off the lights to avoid sudden movement of the vehi- cle and burning your fingers or receiving an electric shock.

CAUTION Be sure to replace the burned- out bulb with one of the same wattage rating. Otherwise, it may cause damage to the fuse or electric wiring system.

CAUTION If you dont have necessary tools, the correct bulbs and the expertise, consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. In many cases, it is difficult to replace vehicle light bulbs because other parts of the vehicle must be removed before you can get to the bulb. This is especially true if you have to remove the headlight assembly to get to the bulb(s). Removing/installing the head- light assembly can result in damage to the vehicle.

Maintenance

687

Headlight, parking light, turn signal light, side marker light and front fog light bulb replacement Type A (1) Front turn signal light /

Position light (2) Headlight (High) /

DRL (If equipped) (3) Headlight (Low) (4) Front fog light (6) Side marker light

Type B (1) Front turn signal light /

Position light (2) Headlight (High) (3) Headlight (Low) (4) Front fog light (5) Day time running light (DRL)

(if equipped) (6) Side marker light

1.Open the hood.

OBK072052

OBK072053

OBK072054N

OBK072026

7 69

Maintenance

2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.

3. Loosen the retaining bolts . - Head lights assembly : 2 EA - Air duct : 4 EA - Front bumper upper board : 2 EA - Front bumper under cover : 2 EA - Front bumper cover : 1 EA

4.Remove the air duct. 5.Pull the front bumper cover out. (1) 6.Pull the headlights assembly out to

the front of the vehicle. (2) 7.Disconnect the power connector(s)

from the back of the headlight assembly.

Headlight bulb OHD076046

WARNING - Halogen bulbs Halogen bulbs contain pres-

surized gas that will produce flying pieces of glass if bro- ken.

Always handle them carefully, and avoid scratches and abra- sions. If the bulbs are lit, avoid contact with liquids.

Never touch the glass with bare hands. Residual oil may cause the bulb to overheat and burst when lit.

(Continued)

OBK072055

Maintenance

707

8. Remove the headlight bulb cover by turning it counter clockwise.

9. Disconnect the headlight bulb socket connector.

10. Unsnap the headlight bulb retain- ing wire by depressing the end and pushing it upward.

11. Remove the bulb from the head- light assembly.

12. Install a new headlight bulb and snap the headlight bulb retaining wire into position by aligning the wire with the groove on the bulb.

13. Connect the headlight bulb sock- et connector.

14. Install the headlight bulb cover by turning it clockwise.

15. Connect the power connector(s) to the back of the headlight assembly.

16. Reinstall the headlight assembly to the body of the vehicle.

(Continued) If a bulb becomes damaged or

cracked, replace it immediate- ly and carefully dispose of it.

Wear eye protection when changing a bulb. Allow the bulb to cool down before han- dling it.

OBK072045N

7 71

Maintenance

Turn signal light and side marker bulb replacement 8. Remove the socket from the

assembly by turning the socket counter clockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the assembly.

9. Remove the bulb from the socket by pressing it in and rotating it until the tabs on the bulb align with the slots in the socket. Pull the bulb out of the socket.

10. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into the socket and rotating it until it locks into place.

11. Install the socket into the assem- bly by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the assembly. Push the socket into the assembly and turn the socket clockwise.

Headlight (HID type) bulb replace- ment

WARNING - HID Headlight low beam (if equipped)

Do not attempt to replace or inspect the low beam (XENON bulb) due to electric shock dan- ger. If the low beam (XENON bulb) is not working, have your vehicle checked by an author- ized HYUNDAI Dealer

OBK072064N

CAUTION If your vehicle is equipped with High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlights, these headlights contain mercury. So if you need to have your vehicle disposed, you should remove the HID Headlights before disposal. The removed HID headlights should be recycled, re-used or dis- posed as hazardous waste.

Maintenance

727

NOTICE HID lamps have superior perform- ance vs. halogen bulbs. HID lamps are estimated by the manufacturer to last twice as long or longer than halo- gen bulbs depending on their fre- quency of use. They will probably require replacement at some point in the life of the vehicle. Cycling the headlamps on and off more than typ- ical use will shorten HID lamps life. HID lamps do not fail in the same manner as halogen incandescent lamps. If a headlamp goes out after a period of operation but will immedi- ately relight when the headlamp switch is cycled it is likely the HID lamp needs to be replaced. HID light- ing components are more complex than conventional halogen bulbs thus have higher replacement cost.

If the light bulb is not operating, have the vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Front fog light bulb replacement (if equipped) 1. Turn the steering wheel fully. (If

you want to replace driver side fog lamp, turn the steering wheel to the front passenger side.)

2. Open the hood. 3. Disconnect the negative battery

cable. 4. Loosen the retaining bolt on the

service cover. And then pull down the service cover.

5. Remove the fog light bulb cover by turning it counter clockwise.

6. Remove the socket from the assembly by turning the socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the assembly

7. Pull the bulb out of the socket. 8. Insert a new bulb into the socket. 9. Install the socket in the assembly

by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the assembly. Push the socket into the assembly and turn the socket clockwise.

10. Install the fog light bulb cover by turning it clockwise. And then assemble the service cover.

OBK072056 OBK072057

7 73

Maintenance

Rear combination light bulb replacement (1) Back-up light (2) Rear turn signal light (3) Stop and tail light (4) Side marker

1. Open the trunk lid. 2. Remove the service cover by

pulling out the service cover.

3. Loosen the assembly retaining nuts.

4. Remove the rear combination light assembly from the body of the vehicle.

OBK072028 OBK072029

OBK072061

OBK072062

Maintenance

747

Turn signal light 5. Remove the socket from the

assembly by turning the socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the assembly.

6. Remove the bulb from the socket by pressing it in and rotating it counterclockwise until the tabs on the bulb align with the slots in the socket. Pull the bulb out of the socket.

7. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into the socket and rotating it until it locks into place.

8. Install the socket in the assembly by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the assembly. Push the socket into the assembly and turn the socket clockwise.

Back up light 5. Remove the socket from the

assembly by turning the socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the assembly.

6. Remove the bulb by pulling it out. 7. Inset a new bulb by inserting it into

the socket. 8. Install the socket in the assembly

by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the assembly. Push the socket into the assembly and turn the socket clockwise.

Tail light, Stop and tail light (LED), Side marker (LED) If the light is not operating, we rec- ommend that you checked an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

OBK072063

Back up

Turn signal

7 75

Maintenance

Side repeater light bulb replacement (if equipped) If the light bulb is not operating, have the vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

High mounted stop light replacement If the light is not operating, have the vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

License plate light bulb replacement 1. Remove the lens by pressing the

tabs. 2. Remove the socket by turning the

socket counter clockwise. 3. Remove the bulb by pulling it

straight out. 4. Install a new bulb in the socket

and install the socket to the lens. 5. Reinstall the lens securely.

OBK049023

OBK079031

OBK072031

Type A

Type B OFD067030

Maintenance

767

Interior light bulb replacement 1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver,

gently pry the lens (map lamp) or lamp (luggage lamp, glove box lamp and sunvisor lamp) from the interior light housing.

2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.

3. Install a new bulb in the socket. 4. Align the lens tabs with the interior

light housing notches and snap the lens into place.

CAUTION Use care not to dirty or damage lens, lens tab, and plastic hous- ings.

WARNING Prior to working on the Interior Lights, ensure that the OFF button is depressed to avoid burning your fingers or receiv- ing an electric shock.

Sunvisor lamp

Luggage lamp

Map lamp

Glove box lamp

OBK079033/OTD079035/OBK079032/OBK079049

7 77

Maintenance

Exterior care Exterior general caution It is very important to follow the label directions when using any chemical cleaner or polish. Read all warning and caution statements that appear on the label.

Finish maintenance Washing

To help protect your vehicles finish from rust and deterioration, wash it thoroughly and frequently at least once a month with lukewarm or cold water. If you use your vehicle for off-road driving, you should wash it after each off-road trip. Pay special attention to the removal of any accumulation of salt, dirt, mud, and other foreign materials. Make sure the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors and rocker panels are kept clear and clean. Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings, industrial pollution and similar deposits can damage your vehicles finish if not removed immediately.

Even prompt washing with plain water may not completely remove all these deposits. A mild soap, safe for use on painted surfaces, may be used. After washing, rinse the vehicle thor- oughly with lukewarm or cold water. Do not allow soap to dry on the fin- ish.

APPEARANCE CARE

CAUTION Do not use strong soap, chem-

ical detergents or hot water, and do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or when the body of the vehicle is warm.

Do not wash the side windows too close with high pressure water. Water may leak through the windows and wet the inte- rior.

To prevent damage to the plastic parts and lamps, do not clean with chemical sol- vents or strong detergents.

WARNING - Wet brakes After washing the vehicle, test the brakes while driving slowly to see if they have been affected by water. If braking performance is impaired, dry the brakes by applying them lightly while maintaining a slow forward speed.

Maintenance

787

Waxing

A good coat of wax is a barrier between your paint and contaminate. Keeping a good coat of wax on your vehicle will help protect it. Wax the vehicle when water will no longer bead on the paint. Always wash and dry the vehicle before waxing. Use a good quality liquid or paste wax, and follow the manufacturers instructions. Wax all metal trim to protect it and to main- tain its luster. Removing oil, tar, and similar materi- als with a spot remover will usually strip the wax from the finish. Be sure to re-wax these areas even if the rest of the vehicle does not yet need waxing.

CAUTION Wiping dust or dirt off the

body with a dry cloth will scratch the finish.

Do not use steel wool, abra- sive cleaners, or strong deter- gents containing highly alka- line or caustic agents on chrome-plated or anodized aluminum parts. This may result in damage to the protec- tive coating and cause discol- oration or paint deterioration.CAUTION

Water washing in the engine compartment including high pressure water washing may cause the failure of electrical circuits or engine and related part located in the engine compartment.

Never allow water or other liq- uids to come in contact with electrical/electronic compo- nents inside the vehicle as this may damage them.

OJB037800

7 79

Maintenance

Finish damage repair Deep scratches or stone chips in the painted surface must be repaired promptly. Exposed metal will quickly rust and may develop into a major repair expense.

NOTICE If your vehicle is damaged and requires any metal repair or replacement, be sure the body shop applies anti-corrosion materials to the parts repaired or replaced.

Bright-metal maintenance To remove road tar and insects,

use a tar remover, not a scraper or other sharp object.

To protect the surfaces of bright- metal parts from corrosion, apply a coating of wax or chrome preser- vative and rub to a high luster.

During winter weather or in coastal areas, cover the bright metal parts with a heavier coating of wax or preservative. If necessary, coat the parts with non-corrosive petroleum jelly or other protective compound.

Underbody maintenance Corrosive materials used for ice and snow removal and dust control may collect on the underbody. If these materials are not removed, acceler- ated rusting can occur on underbody parts such as the fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust system, even though they have been treated with rust protection. Thoroughly flush the vehicle under- body and wheel openings with luke- warm or cold water once a month, after off-road driving and at the end of each winter. Pay special attention to these areas because it is difficult to see all the mud and dirt. It will do more harm than good to wet down the road grime without removing it. The lower edges of doors, rocker panels, and frame members have drain holes that should not be allowed to clog with dirt; trapped water in these areas can cause rusting.

Maintenance

807

Aluminum or chrome wheel main- tenance The aluminum or chrome wheels are coated with a clear protective finish. Do not use any abrasive cleaner,

polishing compound, solvent, or wire brushes on aluminum or chrome wheels. They may scratch or damage the finish.

Clean the wheel when it has cooled.

Use only a mild soap or neutral detergent, and rinse thoroughly with water. Also, be sure to clean the wheels after driving on salted roads. This helps prevent corro- sion.

Avoid washing the wheels with high-speed car wash brushes.

Do not use any alkaline or acid detergent. It may damage and cor- rode the aluminum or chrome wheels coated with a clear protec- tive finish.

Corrosion protection Protecting your vehicle from corro- sion

By using the most advanced design and construction practices to combat corrosion, we produces cars of the highest quality. However, this is only part of the job. To achieve the long- term corrosion resistance your vehi- cle can deliver, the owner's coopera- tion and assistance is also required.

Common causes of corrosion

The most common causes of corro- sion on your car are: Road salt, dirt and moisture that is

allowed to accumulate underneath the car.

Removal of paint or protective coatings by stones, gravel, abra- sion or minor scrapes and dents which leave unprotected metal exposed to corrosion.

WARNING After washing the vehicle, test

the brakes while driving slow- ly to see if they have been affected by water. If braking performance is impaired, dry the brakes by applying them lightly while maintaining a slow forward speed.

If the underbody of you vehi- cle is sprayed with coating substances, the high-speed drive system parts such as the drive shaft or propeller shaft will be out of balance and make noise or vibrate. Moreover, the high-speed drive system parts may be damaged.

7 81

Maintenance

High-corrosion areas

If you live in an area where your car is regularly exposed to corrosive materials, corrosion protection is particularly important. Some of the common causes of accelerated cor- rosion are road salts, dust control chemicals, ocean air and industrial pollution.

Moisture breeds corrosion

Moisture creates the conditions in which corrosion is most likely to occur. For example, corrosion is accelerated by high humidity, partic- ularly when temperatures are just above freezing. In such conditions, the corrosive material is kept in con- tact with the car surfaces by moisture that is slow to evaporate. Mud is particularly corrosive because it is slow to dry and holds moisture in contact with the vehicle. Although the mud appears to be dry, it can still retain the moisture and promote corrosion. High temperatures can also acceler- ate corrosion of parts that are not properly ventilated so the moisture can be dispersed. For all these rea- sons, it is particularly important to keep your car clean and free of mud or accumulations of other materials. This applies not only to the visible surfaces but particularly to the underside of the car.

To help prevent corrosion

You can help prevent corrosion from getting started by observing the fol- lowing:

Maintenance

827

Keep your car clean The best way to prevent corrosion is to keep your car clean and free of corrosive materials. Attention to the underside of the car is particularly important.

If you live in a high-corrosion area where road salts are used, near the ocean, areas with industrial pollution, acid rain, etc., you should take extra care to prevent corrosion. In winter, hose off the underside of your car at least once a month and be sure to clean the underside thoroughly when winter is over.

When cleaning underneath the car, give particular attention to the components under the fenders and other areas that are hidden from view. Do a thorough job; just damp- ening the accumulated mud rather than washing it away will acceler- ate corrosion rather than prevent it. Water under high pressure and steam are particularly effective in removing accumulated mud and corrosive materials.

When cleaning lower door panels, rocker panels and frame members, be sure that drain holes are kept open so that moisture can escape and not be trapped inside to accel- erate corrosion.

Keep your garage dry Don't park your car in a damp, poor- ly ventilated garage. This creates a favorable environment for corrosion. This is particularly true if you wash your car in the garage or drive it into the garage when it is still wet or cov- ered with snow, ice or mud. Even a heated garage can contribute to cor- rosion unless it is well ventilated so moisture is dispersed.

Keep paint and trim in good con- dition Scratches or chips in the finish should be covered with "touch-up" paint as soon as possible to reduce the possibility of corrosion. If bare metal is showing through, the atten- tion of a qualified body and paint shop is recommended.

Bird droppings : Bird droppings are highly corrosive and may damage painted surfaces in just a few hours. Always remove bird droppings as soon as possible.

Don't neglect the interior Moisture can collect under the floor mats and carpeting to cause corro- sion. Check under the mats periodi- cally to be sure the carpeting is dry. Use particular care if you carry fertil- izers, cleaning materials or chemi- cals in the car. These should be carried only in proper containers and any spills or leaks should be cleaned up, flushed with clean water and thoroughly dried.

7 83

Maintenance

Interior care Interior general precautions Prevent chemicals such as perfume, cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand cleaner, and air freshener from contacting the interior parts because they may cause damage or discoloration. If they do contact the interior parts, wipe them off immediately. See the instructions that follow for the proper way to clean vinyl.

Cleaning the upholstery and inte- rior trim Vinyl

Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with a vinyl cleaner.

Fabric

Remove dust and loose dirt from fab- ric with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner. Clean with a mild soap solu- tion recommended for upholstery or carpets. Remove fresh spots immedi- ately with a fabric spot cleaner. If fresh spots do not receive immediate attention, the fabric can be stained and its color can be affected. Also, its fire-resistant properties can be reduced if the material is not properly maintained.

Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt webbing Clean the belt webbing with any mild soap solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpet. Follow the instructions provided with the soap. Do not bleach or re-dye the webbing because this may weaken it.

Cleaning the interior window glass If the interior glass surfaces of the vehicle become fogged (that is, cov- ered with an oily, greasy or waxy film), they should be cleaned with glass cleaner. Follow the directions on the glass cleaner container.

CAUTION Never allow water or other liq- uids to come in contact with electrical/electronic compo- nents inside the vehicle as this may damage them.

CAUTION Using anything but recommend- ed cleaners and procedures may affect the fabrics appear- ance and fire-resistant proper- ties.

CAUTION Do not scrape or scratch the inside of the rear window. This may result in damage to the rear window defroster grid.

CAUTION When cleaning leather products (steering wheel, seats etc.), use neutral detergents or low alco- hol content solutions. If you use high alcohol content solutions or acid/alkaline detergents, the color of the leather may fade or the surface may get stripped off.

Maintenance

847

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM The emission control system of your vehicle is covered by a written limited warranty. Please see the warranty information contained in the Owners Handbook & Warranty Information booklet in your vehicle. Your vehicle is equipped with an emission control system to meet all applicable emission regulations. There are three emission control systems, as follows.

(1) Crankcase emission control sys- tem

(2) Evaporative emission control sys- tem

(3) Exhaust emission control system

In order to assure the proper function of the emission control systems, it is recommended that you have your car inspected and maintained by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer in accordance with the maintenance schedule in this manual.

Caution for the Inspection and Maintenance Test (With Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system) To prevent the vehicle from mis-

firing during dynamometer test- ing, turn the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system off by pressing the ESC switch.

After dynamometer testing is completed, turn the ESC system back on by pressing the ESC switch again.

1. Crankcase emission control system

The positive crankcase ventilation system is employed to prevent air pollution caused by blow-by gases being emitted from the crankcase. This system supplies fresh filtered air to the crankcase through the air intake hose. Inside the crankcase, the fresh air mixes with blow-by gases, which then pass through the PCV valve into the induction system.

2. Evaporative emission con- trol (including ORVR: Onboard Refueling Vapor Recovery) system

The Evaporative Emission Control System is designed to prevent fuel vapors from escaping into the atmos- phere. (The ORVR system is designed to allow the vapors from the fuel tank to be loaded into a canister while refu- eling at the gas station, preventing the escape of fuel vapors into the atmosphere.)

7 85

Maintenance

Canister Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel tank are absorbed and stored in the onboard canister. When the engine is running, the fuel vapors absorbed in the canister are drawn into the surge tank through the purge control sole- noid valve.

Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV) The purge control solenoid valve is controlled by the Engine Control Module (ECM); when the engine coolant temperature is low during idling, the PCSV closes so that evap- orated fuel is not taken into the engine. After the engine warms-up during ordinary driving, the PCSV opens to introduce evaporated fuel to the engine.

3. Exhaust emission control system

The Exhaust Emission Control System is a highly effective system which controls exhaust emissions while maintaining good vehicle per- formance.

Vehicle modifications This vehicle should not be modified. Modification of your vehicle could affect its performance, safety or durability and may even violate gov- ernmental safety and emissions reg- ulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from any modifi- cation may not be covered under warranty. If you use unauthorized electronic

devices, it may cause the vehicle to operate abnormally, wire damage, battery discharge and fire. For your safety, do not use unauthorized electronic devices.

Engine exhaust gas precautions (carbon monoxide) Carbon monoxide can be present

with other exhaust fumes. Therefore, if you smell exhaust fumes of any kind inside your vehi- cle, have it inspected and repaired immediately. If you ever suspect exhaust fumes are coming into your vehicle, drive it only with all the windows fully open. Have your vehicle checked and repaired immediately.

Do not operate the engine in con- fined or closed areas (such as garages) any more than what is necessary to move the vehicle in or out of the area.

When the vehicle is stopped in an open area for more than a short time with the engine running, adjust the ventilation system (as needed) to draw outside air into the vehicle.

Never sit in a parked or stopped vehicle for any extended time with the engine running.

Maintenance

867

When the engine stalls or fails to start, excessive attempts to restart the engine may cause damage to the emission control system.

Operating precautions for catalytic converters (if equipped)

WARNING - Fire A hot exhaust system can

ignite flammable items under your vehicle. Do not park, idle, or drive the vehicle over or near flammable objects, such as grass, vegetation, paper, leaves, etc.

The exhaust system and cat- alytic system are very hot while the engine is running or immediately after the engine is turned off. Keep away from the exhaust system and catalytic, you may get burned. Also, do not remove the heat sink around the exhaust sys- tem, do not seal the bottom of the vehicle or do not coat the vehicle for corrosion control. It may present a fire risk under certain conditions.

WARNING - Exhaust Engine exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide (CO). Though colorless and odorless, it is dangerous and could be lethal if inhaled. Follow the instructions on this page to avoid CO poi- soning.

CALIFORNIA PROPO- SITION 65 WARNING

Engine exhaust and a wide vari- ety of automobile components and parts, including compo- nents found in the interior fur- nishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause can- cer and birth defects and repro- ductive harm. In addition, cer- tain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of compo- nent wear contain or emit chem- icals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproduc- tive harm.

7 87

Maintenance

Your vehicle is equipped with a cat- alytic converter emission control device. Therefore, the following precautions must be observed: Use only UNLEADED FUEL for

gasoline engines. Do not operate the vehicle when

there are signs of engine malfunc- tion, such as misfire or a noticeable loss of performance.

Do not misuse or abuse the engine. Examples of misuse are coasting with the ignition off and descending steep grades in gear with the ignition off.

Do not operate the engine at high idle speed for extended periods (5 minutes or more).

Do not modify or tamper with any part of the engine or emission con- trol system. All inspections and adjustments must be made by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Avoid driving with a very low fuel level. If you run out of gasoline, it could cause the engine to misfire and result in excessive loading of the catalytic converter.

Failure to observe these precautions could result in damage to the catalyt- ic converter and to your vehicle. Additionally, such actions could void your warranties.

Perchlorate Material-special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/ hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Notice to California Vehicle Dismantlers : Perchlorate containing materials, such as air bag inflators, seatbelt pretensioners and keyless remote entry batteries, must be disposed of according to Title 22 California Code of Regulations Section 67384.10 (a).

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE NOTICE

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Bulb wattage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Tires and wheels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 Weight and volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 Recommended lubricants and capacities . . . . . . . 8-4

Recommended SAE viscosity number . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 Vehicle certification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 Tire specification and pressure label . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Engine number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Refrigerant label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Consumer information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

8

Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects

28

DIMENSIONS

BULB WATTAGE

Item in (mm)

Overall length 182.2 (4,630)

Overall width 73.4 (1,865)

Overall height 54.5 (1,385)

Front tread 63.2 (1,605) / 63.0 (1,601)*1

Rear tread 64.0 (1,625) / 63.8 (1,621)*1

Wheelbase 111 (2,820)

ENGINE

Item Gasoline 2.0 Gasoline 3.8

Displacement [cu.in(cc)] 121.9

(1,998) 230.5

(3,778)

Bore x Stroke [in(mm)] 3.38 x 3.38 (86 x 86)

3.78 x 3.42 (96 x 87)

Firing order 1-3-4-2 1-2-3-4-5-6

No. of cylinders 4, In-line 6, V-Type

Light Bulb Wattage Bulb type

Headlights (Low) 55 or

35 (HID) H7HPLL

Headlights (High) 55 H7HPLL

Front turn signal lights 28 PY28WLL

Front side maker 5 W5WLL

Front fog lights 35 H8L

Front position lights 8 PY28/8WLL

Daytime running lights* LED LED

Stop and tail lights LED LED

Rear turn signal lights 27 P27WL

Back-up lights 16 W16W

Rear side marker LED LED

High mounted stop light LED LED

License plate lights 5 W5WL

Map lamps 10 W10W

Luggage lamp 5 FESTOON

Glove box lamp 5 FESTOON

Vanity mirror lamps 5 FESTOON

Side repeater lights* LED LED

* : if equipped

*1 : with R19 tire

8 3

Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects

TIRES AND WHEELS Inflation pressure

psi (kPa)

Front Rear

225/45R18 7.5J18 35 (240) -

245/45R18 8.0J18 - 35 (240)

225/40R19 8.0J19 35 (240) -

245/40R19 8.5J19 - 35 (240)

T135/90D17 4.0T17 60 (420) 60 (420)

T135/80R18 4.0T18

Full size tire

Compact spare tire

Wheel lug nut torque

lbft (kgm, Nm)

65~79

(9~11 , 88~107)

Item Tire

size Wheel size

Item Gasoline 2.0 Gasoline 3.8

M/T A/T M/T A/T

Gross vehicle weight lbs. (kg)

4299 (1950)

4343 (1970)

4343 (1970)

4409 (2000)

Luggage volume cu ft (l) 10 (284)

WEIGHT/VOLUME

Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects

48

RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.

*1 Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.

*2 Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel economy by reducing the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure in everyday driving, but in a years time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.

*3 If the API service SM engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use API service SL, ILSAC GF-4, ACEA 3.

To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality. The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.

Lubricant Volume Classification

Engine oil *1 *2

(drain and refill) Recommends

2.0 TCI 5.7 US qt. (5.4 l) API service SM, ILSAC GF-4, ACEA A5 or above*3

3.8L 6.02 US qt. (5.7 l)

Automatic transmission fluid 10.14 US qt. (9.6 l) GS ATF SP-IV-RR, HYUNDAI genuine

ATF SP-IV-RR or other brands meeting the above specification approved by HYUNDAI Motor Co.,

Manual transmission fluid 2.3 ~ 2.4 US qt.

(2.2 ~ 2.3 l)

HYUNDAI Genuine transaxle fluid (API GL-4, SAE 75W/85) Use the Manual transaxle fluid approved by HYUNDAI motor company. Consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.

Power steering 0.95 US qt. (0.9 l) Pentosin CHF 202

Coolant

2.0L M/T 6.87 US qt. (6.5 l)

Mixture of antifreeze and water

(Ethylene glycol base coolant for aluminum radiator)

A/T 6.06 US qt. (6.3 l)

3.8L M/T 9.51 US qt. (9 l)

A/T 9.30 US qt. (8.8 l)

Brake fluid 0.7 ~ 0.8 US qt. (0.7 ~ 0.8 l) SAE J1703, FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4

Fuel 17.17 US gal. (65 l) Unleaded gasoline

Rear differential oil 1.48 US qt. (1.4 l) Hypoid gear oil API GL-5, SAE 75W/90

Recommended SAE viscosity number

Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has an effect on fuel economy and cold weather operating (engine start and engine oil flowability). Lower viscosity engine oils can provide better fuel economy and cold weather perform- ance, however, higher viscosity engine oils are required for satisfactory lubri- cation in hot weather. Using oils of any viscosity other than those recommend- ed could result in engine damage.

When choosing an oil, consider the range of temperature your vehicle will be operated in before the next oil change. Proceed to select the recom- mended oil viscosity from the chart.

CAUTION Always be sure to clean the area around any filler plug, drain plug, or dipstick before check- ing or draining any lubricant. This is especially important in dusty or sandy areas and when the vehicle is used on unpaved roads. Cleaning the plug and dipstick areas will prevent dirt and grit from entering the engine and other mechanisms that could be damaged.

8 5

Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects

Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers

Temperature

Gasoline Engine Oil (3.8L) *1

Gasoline Engine Oil (2.0 TCI)

C (F)

-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 -10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120

10W-30

5W-30

5W-30, 5W-40

*1 For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of a viscosity grade SAE 5W-30 (API SM / ILSAC GF-4 / ACEA A5). However, if the engine oil is not available in your country, select the proper engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.

Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects

68

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the number used in register- ing your car and in all legal matters pertaining to its ownership, etc. The number is punched on the floor under the front passengers seat. To check the number, open the cover.

The VIN is also on a plate attached to the top of the dashboard. The number on the plate can easily be seen through the windshield from outside.

The vehicle certification label attached on the drivers side center pillar gives the vehicle identification number (VIN).

OBK089001

Frame number

OBK082002LOBK089006N

VIN label (if equipped)

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL

8 7

Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects

The tires supplied on your new vehi- cle are chosen to provide the best performance for normal driving. The tire label located on the driver's side center pillar gives the tire pres- sures recommended for your car.

The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown in the drawing.

The refrigerant label is located on the underside of the hood. The label contains the following infor- mation: Type of refrigerant Amount of refrigerant

OBK082003

OBK089004

3.8L

2.0 TCI

OBK082005L

TIRE SPECIFICATION AND PRESSURE LABEL

ENGINE NUMBER REFRIGERANT LABEL

OBK082006N

Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects

88

This consumer information has been prepared in accordance with regula- tions issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S. Department of Transportation. Your Hyundai dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this information.

Hyundai motor vehicles are designed and manufactured to meet or exceed all applicable safety stan- dards.

For your safety, however, we strongly urge you to read and follow all direc- tions in this Owner's Manual, particu- larly the information under the head- ings "NOTICE", "CAUTION" and "WARNING".

If, after reading this manual, you have any questions regarding the operation of your vehicle, please contact your nearest Hyundai Motor America Regional Office as listed in the following:

Eastern Region: Connecticut, Delaware, Maine, Massachusetts, New Hampshire, New Jersey, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, Vermont.

Eastern Region 1122 Cranbury South River Road Jamesburg, NJ 08831 (800) 633-5151

Southern Region: Florida, Georgia, North Carolina, South Carolina, Virginia, and West Virginia.

Southern Region 3025 Chastain Meadows Parkway suite 100 Marietta, GA 30066 (800) 633-5151

South Central Region: Alabama, Arkansas, Louisiana, Mississippi, New Mexico, Oklahoma, Tennessee, Texas.

South Central Region 1421 South Beltline Road, Suite 400 Coppell, TX 75019 (800) 633-5151

Central Region: Illinois, Indiana, lowa, Kentucky, Michigan, Minnesota, Nebraska, North Dakota, South Dakota, Ohio, Wisconsin, Kansas, Missouri.

Central Region 1705 Sequoia Drive Aurora, Illinois 60506 (800) 633-5151

Western Region: Alaska, Hawaii, Arizona, California, Colorado, ldaho, Montana, Nevada, Oregon, Utah, Washington, Wyoming.

Western Region 10550 Talbert Avenue P.O.Box 20850 Fountain Valley, California 92728-0850 (800) 633-5151

CONSUMER INFORMATION

8 9

Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investiga- tion, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1- 888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424- 9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave SE., West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

Index

I

Index

2I

ABS (Anti-lock brake system) 5-29

Active headrest 3-9

Air bag warning labels3-63

Air bag warning light3-40

Air bags3-36

Air bag warning labels 3-63

Air bag warning light 3-40

Collision sensors 3-55

Curtain air bag3-54

Driver's and passenger's front air bag 3-48

Occupant classification system 3-43

Side impact air bag3-52

SRS components and functions 3-39

Air cleaner 7-33

Alarm system(see the Theft-alarm system)4-14

alcohol and methanol1-4

Antenna (Glass) 4-130

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) 5-29

Appearance care

Exterior care 7-77

Interior care 7-83

Appearance care7-77

Ashtray4-124

Audio control 4-140

Audio system 4-130

Audio control 4-140

Bluetooth Hands free 4-157

Bluetooth Wireless Technology 4-157

Glass antenna 4-130

IPOD4-151

Steering wheel audio control4-131

USB device4-147

XM satellite Radio 4-152

Auto Cruise (see the cruise control system)5-37

Automatic climate control system 4-104

Air conditioning 4-113

Climate control air filter4-102, 114

Automatic tranmission5-17

Shift lock 5-22

Sports mode5-20

Automatic tranmission fluid 7-31

Aux, USB and iPod port4-129

Base curb weight 5-57

Battery7-39

Battery saver function4-84

Before driving5-3

Bing arbitration8-9

Bluetooth Hands free 4-157

Bluetooth Wireless Technology 4-157

Bottle holders, see cup holders4-125

A

B

I 3

Index

Brake system5-25

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)5-29

Electronic stability program (ESC)5-31

Parking brake 5-27

Power brakes 5-25

Brakes/clutch fluid7-29

Bulb replacement 7-68

Bulb wattage 8-2

California perchlorate notice 7-87

Capacities (Lubricants) 8-4

Care

Exterior care 7-77

Interior care 7-83

Tire care7-42

Cargo capacity 5-53

Cargo weight5-57

Center console storage4-122

Central door lock switch4-18

Certification label 5-55

Certification label 8-6

Chains

Tire chains 5-49

Changing tires6-13

Checking tire inflation pressure7-43

Child restraint system 3-27

Lower anchor 3-34

Passerger's seat 3-38

Seat belt 3-30

Tether anchor system3-32

Cigarette lighter 4-124

Climate control air filter 4-102, 114

Climate control air filter replacement 7-34

Clock (Digital) 4-127

Collision sensors3-55

Combined instrument, see instrument cluster 4-45

Compact spare tire replacement 7-47

Compass4-37

Consumer information 8-8

Coolant7-26

Cooling fluid, see engine coolant 7-26

Crankcase emission control system7-84

Cruise control system 5-37

Cup holder 4-125

Curtain air bag 3-54

Dashboard illumination, see instrument panel illumination 4-47

Dashboard, see instrument cluster 4-45

Daytime running light (DRL)4-85

Defogging (Windshield) 4-116

D

C

Index

4I

Defogging logic (Windshield) 4-119

Defroster (Front window)

Front windshield deicer4-93

Defroster (Rear window) 4-93

Defrosting (Windshield) 4-116

Digital clock4-127

Dimensions 8-2

Display illumination, see instrument panel illumination 4-47

Displays, see instrument cluster 4-45

Door locks4-16

Central door lock switch 4-18

Speed sensing door lock system 4-19

Drinks holders, see cup holders4-125

Driver's 3-point seat belt3-18

Driver's and passenger's front air bag3-48

Driving at night5-44

Driving in flooded areas 5-46

Driving in the rain 5-45

Driving off-road5-46

DRL 4-85

Economical operation 5-41

Electric chromic mirror (ECM) 4-35

Electronic stability program (ESC) 5-31

Emergency fuel filler lid release4-29

Emergency starting

Jump starting 6-4

Push starting 6-5

Emergency while driving6-2

Emission control system7-84

Crankcase emission control system 7-84

Evaporative emission control System7-84

Exhaust emission control system 7-85

Engine compartment 2-6, 7-3

Engine compartment fuse label 7-61

Engine compartment panel fuse 7-58

Engine coolant 7-26

Engine coolcant temperature gauge4-48

Engine number8-7

Engine oil7-24

Engine overheats6-6

Engine Specification8-2

Engine start/stop button 5-8

Engine will not start6-3

Escort function4-84

Evaporative emission control system 7-84

Exhaust emission control system7-85

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items 7-21

Exterior care7-77

Exterior overview (front)2-2

Exterior overview (rear) 2-3

E

I 5

Index

Flat tire6-12

Jack and tools 6-12

Changing tires 6-13

Removing and storing the spare tire 6-13

Floor mat anchor(s) 4-128

Fluid

Automatic tranmission fluid7-31

Brakes/clutch fluid 7-29

Manual tranmission fluid 7-31

Power steering fluid 7-30

Washer fluid 7-31

Folding the outside rearviwe mirror 4-44

Folding the rear seat 3-13

Front seat adjustment (manual) 3-4

Front seat adjustment (Power)3-5

Front windshield deicer 4-93

Fuel additives1-5

Fuel filler lid 4-27

Emergency fuel filler lid release 4-29

Fuel gauge4-49

Fuel requirements 1-3

Alcohol and methanol 1-4

Fuel additives 1-5

Fuse switch 7-58

Fuses 7-56

Engine compartment panel fuse7-58

Fuse switch7-58

Fuse/relay panel description7-59

Instrument panel fuse 7-56

Label7-59

Multi fuse 7-59

Gauge 4-47

Engine coolant temperature gauge4-48

Fuel gauge 4-49

Multi gauge 4-72

GAW (Gross axle weight) 5-57

GAWR (Gross axle weight rating) 5-57

Glass antenna 4-130

Glove box4-122

Glove box lamp 4-92

GVW (Gross vehicle weight) 5-57

GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating) 5-57

Hazard warning flasher 4-83, 6-2

Hazardous driving conditions5-43

Headlamp welcome function 4-84

F

G

H

Index

6I

Headlight escort function4-84

Headrest 3-7

Highway driving 5-46

HomeLink system4-38

Hood4-26

Horn 4-34

How to use this manual 1-2

Immobilizer system 4-4

Indicator symbols on the instrument cluster 1-8

Indicators and warnings4-62

Inside rearview mirror 4-35

Instrument cluster 4-45

Engine coolant temperature gauge4-48

Fuel gauge 4-49

Instrument panel illumination 4-47

LCD display warning 4-57

Odometer 4-50

Speedometer 4-47

Tachometer 4-48

Trip computer 4-50

User setting mode4-54

Warning and indicators 4-62

Instrument panel fuse7-57

Instrument panel fuse label7-60

Instrument panel illumination4-47

Instrument panel overview 2-5

Interior care7-83

Interior features4-124

Ashtray 4-124

Aux, USB and iPod port 4-129

Cigarette lighter4-124

Cup holder 4-125

Digital clock 4-127

Floor mat anchor(s) 4-128

Outside thermometer 4-128

Power outlet 4-126

Sunvisor4-125

Interior light 4-91

Glove box lamp4-92

Map lamp 4-91

Trunk room lamp4-92

Vanity mirror lamp 4-92

Interior overview 2-4

IPOD 4-151

Jack and tools6-12

Jump starting6-4

J

I

I 7

Index

Key positions 5-5

Keys 4-3

Immobilizer key 4-4

Remote key battery replacement4-13

Smart key battery replacement4-8

Label

Air bag warning labels 3-63

Engine compartment fuse label7-61

Instrument panel fuse label 7-60

Refrigerant label8-7

Tire sidewall labeling 7-48

Tire specification and pressure label8-7

Vehicle certification label8-6

LCD display warning4-57

Light bulbs 7-67

Lighting4-84

Battery saver function 4-84

Daytime running light (DRL) 4-85

Headlamp welcome function 4-84

Headlight escort function 4-84

Lighting control4-85

Lighting control 4-85

Lower anchor 3-34

Lubricants and capacities8-4

Luggage net 4-128

Lumbar support3-9

Maintenance

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items 7-21

Maintenance services 7-5

Maintenance under severe usage conditions7-20

Normal maintenance schedule 7-9

Owner maintenance7-6

Scheduled maintenance service 7-8

Tire maintenance 7-48

Maintenance schedule7-8

Maintenance under severe usage conditions7-20

Normal maintenance schedule 7-9

Maintenance services7-5

Manual climate control system4-94

Air conditioning 4-100

Climate control air filter4-102, 114

Heating and air conditioning4-95

Manual tranmission 5-13

Manual tranmission fluid7-31

Map lamp 4-91

K

L

M

Index

8I

Mirrors 4-35

Day/night rearview mirror 4-35

"Electric chromic mirror (ECM) with HomeLink system and compass"4-35

Folding the outside rearviwe mirror 4-44

Inside rearview mirror4-35

Outside rearview mirror 4-43

Remote control 4-44

Multi fuse7-59

Multi gauge4-72

Occupant classification system3-43

Odometer 4-50

Oil (Engine) 7-24

Outside rearview mirror4-43

Outside rearview mirror remote control 4-44

Outside thermometer 4-127

Overheats 6-6

Owner maintenance 7-6

Parking assist system4-78

Parking brake 5-27

Parking brake 7-32

Passerger's seat for Child restraint system 3-38

Power brakes5-25

Power outlet 4-126

Power steering 4-33

Power steering fluid7-30

Pre-tensioner seat belt3-20

Push starting6-5

Rear parking assist system4-75

Rear seat 3-13

Rear seat entry 3-12

Recommended cold tire inflation pressures 7-42

Recommended lubricants and capacities8-4

Recommended SAE viscosity number8-5

Refrigerant label 8-7

Remote control (Mirror) 4-44

Remote key battery replacement 4-13

Remote keyless entry 4-11

Remote key battery replacement4-13

Removable towing hook6-21

Replacement light bulb7-68

Reportin safety defects 8-9

Road warning6-2

Rocking the vehicle 5-43

O

P

R

I 9

Index

Satellite Radio4-155

Scheduled maintenance service 7-8

Maintenance under severe usage conditions7-20

Normal maintenance schedule 7-9

Seat belt warning 3-17

Seat belts 3-16

Pre-tensioner seat belt 3-20

Seat belt - Driver's 3-point system3-18

Seat belt warning3-17

Shoulder belt extension guide 3-20

Seat Warmer3-10

Seatback pocket 3-11

Seating capacity 5-52

Seats 3-2

Active headrest3-9

Folding the rear seat3-13

Front seat adjustment (manual)3-4

Front seat adjustment (Power) 3-5

Headrest3-7

Lumbar support 3-9

Rear seat 3-13

Rear seat entry3-12

Seatback pocket3-11

Walk in device3-12

Warmer 3-10

Security indicator4-16

Shift Lock 5-22

Shoulder belt extension guide 3-20

Side impact air bag 3-52

Smart key 4-6

Smart key battery replacement4-8

Smart key battery replacement 4-8

Smooth cornering5-44

Snow tires 5-48

Spare tire

Compact spare tire replacement7-47

Removing and storing the spare tire 6-13

Special driving conditions 5-43

Driving at night 5-44

Driving in flooded areas5-46

Driving in the rain 5-45

Driving off-road 5-46

Hazardous driving conditions 5-43

Highway driving5-46

Rocking the vehicle5-43

Smooth cornering 5-44

Speed sensing door lock system4-19

Speedometer4-47

Sports mode 5-20

SRS components and functions 3-39

Starting difficulties, see engine will not start 6-3

Steering wheel4-33

Horn4-34

S

Index

10I

Power steering4-33

Tilt & Telescope steering 4-34

Steering wheel audio control 4-131

Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit 5-53

Storage compartment 4-122

Center console storage 4-122

Glove box 4-122

Luggage net 4-128

Sunglass holder 4-123

Sunglass holder4-123

Sunroof4-30

Sunvisor 4-125

Tachometer4-48

Tether anchor system 3-32

Theft-alarm system 4-14

Tilt & Telescope steering4-34

Tire and loading information label 5-52

Tire chains5-49

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) 6-7

Tire specification and pressure label 8-7

Tires and wheels7-42, 8-3

Checking tire inflation pressure 7-43

Compact spare tire replacement7-47

Recommended cold tire inflation pressures7-42

Tire care7-42

Tire maintenance 7-48

Tire replacement7-46

Tire rotation7-44

Tire sidewall labeling 7-48

Tire traction 7-48

Wheel alignment and tire balance7-45

Wheel replacement7-47

Towing 6-20

Removable towing hook 6-21

Towing capacity5-53

Towing hook 6-21

TPMS6-7

Trailer Towing 5-58

Trip computer 4-51

Trunk4-20

Trunk emergency safety release 4-21

Trunk room lamp 4-92

Ttranmission

Automatic tranmission 5-17

Manual tranmission5-13

USB device 4-147

User setting mode 4-54

T

U

I 11

Index

Vanity mirror lamp4-92

Vehicle break-in process 1-5

Vehicle capacity weight 5-52

Vehicle certification label 8-6

Vehicle curb weight 5-57

Vehicle data collection and event data recorders 1-7

Vehicle identification number (VIN)8-6

Vehicle load limit5-52

Cargo capacity5-53

Certification label5-55

Seating capacity 5-52

Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit 5-53

Tire and loading information label5-52

Towing capacity 5-53

Vehicle capacity weight 5-52

Vehicle weight 5-57

Base curb weight 5-57

Cargo weight 5-57

GAW (Gross axle weight) 5-57

GAWR (Gross axle weight rating)5-57

GVW (Gross vehicle weight)5-57

GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating) 5-57

Vehicle curb weight5-57

VIN number 8-6

Volume/weight 8-3

Walk in device 3-12

Warning and indicators 4-62

Washer fluid7-31

Weight/volume8-3

Welcome function 4-84

Wheel alignment and tire balance 7-45

Wheel replacement 7-47

Windows 4-22

Auto up/down window4-23

Windshield defrosting and defogging4-116

Defogging logic4-119

Winter driving5-48

Snow tires5-48

Tire chains 5-49

Wiper blades 7-36

Wipers and washers 4-89

XM satellite Radio

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the Genesis Hyundai works, you can view and download the Hyundai Genesis 3.8 R Spec 2014 Coupe Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Hyundai Genesis as well as other Hyundai manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Hyundai Genesis. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Hyundai Genesis 3.8 R Spec 2014 Coupe Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Hyundai Genesis 3.8 R Spec 2014 Coupe Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Hyundai Genesis 3.8 R Spec 2014 Coupe Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Hyundai Genesis 3.8 R Spec 2014 Coupe Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Hyundai Genesis 3.8 R Spec 2014 Coupe Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.